Blog

The Purpose of Political Communication – Political communication is communication that involves political messages and political actors or those related to power, government and also government policies. So political communication is not something new, but we can also understand political communication as a communication between the government and society. The following is the definition of political communication from several figures:

• Gabriel Almond also argues that political communication is a function that always exists in every political system.
• Subakti argues that political communication is the process of conveying information about politics from the government to the public and from the community to the government.
• Cangara argues that political communication is a field or discipline that examines the behavior and communication activities that are political in nature have political consequences or influence on political behavior.
• According to Nimmo, political communication is a communication activity that is considered political communication based on its consequences (actual or potential) that govern human behavior in conditions of conflict.
• Meanwhile, McNair argues that political communication is not only communication from political actors to voters with the intention of achieving certain goals, but also communication addressed to politicians by voters and newspaper columnists, as well as communication about political actors and their activities. as found in news, editorials, and other forms of media political discussion.

 

 

Elements of Political Communication

Political communication also consists of various elements, namely:

1. Political Communicator

Political communicators are for those who can provide information about meaningful things about politics. For example the President, Ministers, members of the DPR, politicians and pressure groups in society that can influence the running of a government.

2. Political Messages

Political messages are statements that are conveyed, both in writing and in writing, both verbally and non-verbally, hidden or openly, both consciously and unconsciously which contain politics. For example, such as political speeches, political statements, books, brochures and newspaper news about politics and others.

3. Political Channels or Media

Channels or political media is a tool or a means that can be used by communicators in conveying political messages. For example, print media, electronic media, online media, outreach, group communication by parties, community organizations, and so on.

4. Political means or targets

Means are members of the public who can provide support in the form of voting to parties or candidates in general elections. Such as businessmen, civil servants, workers, youth, women, students and the like.

5. Influence or Effect of Political Communication

The expected effect of political communication is to create an understanding of the system of government and political parties, the activeness of society in political participation, which will later have an impact on voting in general elections.

Political Communication Approach

There are several approaches to political communication, namely:

1. Process approach

This approach is that everything in the world is a result or a process. Spengler argued that the key to history is the law of societies and civilizations which also arise and fall in recurring cycles.

Arnold Joseph Toynbee who is a British historian argues that social reality is a cycle that has repeating patterns for the rise and fall of civilization. This approach can be used to understand political socialization and public policy.

2. Agenda Setting Approach

This second approach was developed by Maxell C. McCombs who is a newspaper research professor and also the director of the communications research center at the University of Syracuse USA, and Donald L. Shaw, who is a professor of journalism from the University of North Carolina.

The agenda setting approach begins with the assumption that the mass media screens the news, articles or writings that will be broadcast. This selection is made by those who are known as gatekeepers, namely they are journalists, chief editors, and image editors. It is from this gatekeeper that determines what news should be loaded and what should be hidden.

 

 

Political Communication Models

The following is an explanation of the models of political communication, namely:

1. Aristotle’s Model Edit

Aristotle’s model is the most classic model in the field of communication science. Aristotle lived at a time when rhetorical communication was highly developed in Greece. The development of people’s skills in making defense speeches before courts and public meetings attended by the people.

This model is oriented towards speech, especially speech to influence others. So that a model like this can also be called a rhetorical model or a rhetorical model which is now known as public communication. This communication model also has three basic parts of communication, namely the speaker , the message , and the listener .

The communication process also occurs when the speaker conveys his message to the audience with the aim of changing their behavior. For Aristotle, the essence of communication is perception and also the influence that can be achieved by someone who is trusted by the public.

According to Aristotle, persuasion can be achieved for who you are or your ethos-beliefs, your arguments or logos-logic in arguing, and also by playing on audience emotions or audience pathos. In other words, the factors that determine the persuasive effect of a speech include the content of the speech, its structure, and the method of delivery.

Aristotle also realized that the role of the audience is listeners. Persuasion proceeds through audiences when they are led by speech into an emotional state. However, the first weakness of this model is that communication is regarded as a static phenomenon, focused on purposeful or intentional communication that occurs when a person persuades others to accept his opinion.

This model also does not take into account non-verbal communication in influencing others. Nevertheless, this model inspired scientists to develop modern communication models. For example in Indonesia, when the success team from the presidential and vice presidential candidates campaigned for the candidates and their vision and mission as leaders to the people. All of that is a form of rhetoric in the world of politics.

2. Model Harold Lasswell Hunting

This communication model is in the form of verbal expressions. Lasswell put forward three functions of communication, namely:

• Environmental monitoring
• Correlation of the various separate parts of society that respond to the environment
• Transmission of social heritage from one generation to the next.

According to Lasswell three groups of specialists are responsible for carrying out these functions. For example, political leaders and diplomats belong to environmental watchdog groups. Lasswell also views that a communication process always has an effect or influence. Thus, Lasswell’s model stimulates communication research in the field of political communication. This model also shows that the communicator must have a desire to influence the recipient.

Thus, communication is seen as an effort of persuasion. Efforts to convey the message will produce results either positive or negative. According to Lasswell, things like this are only determined by the form and method of delivery. Not all communication is two-way, with a smooth flow and feedback occurring between sender and receiver.

In society, a lot of information is filtered by message controllers, who receive information and convey it to the public with some changes or deviations. An important function of communication is to provide information about other powerful countries in the world.

It is important for a society to discover and control the factors that interfere with efficient communication. The weakness of this Lasswell model is that it does not describe elements of feedback or feedback so that the communication process described is linear or unidirectional.

3. Model Gudykunst as well as Kim Edit

This model is basically a model of intercultural communication, namely communication between people who come from different cultures or communication with foreigners. Although basically this model also applies to everyone, because basically no two people have the same cultural, sociocultural and psychocultural background.

The assumption of this model is that two people are parallel in communicating, each of them acting as a sender as well as a receiver or both as encoding and decoding. Therefore we can see that a message from one person is a feedback for another.

These factors are filters that limit the predictions we make about how others might respond to our communication behavior, thereby influencing how we encode messages. Filters like these limit what stimuli we will pay attention to and how we notice and how we interpret those stimuli.

Cultural factors explain similarities as well as differences in culture, religion, language, individualism, collectivity, which affect values ​​and norms in communication. Socio-cultural influences concern the process of social arrangement, namely membership in groups, self-concept, roles and definitions of interpersonal relationships. Psychocultural factors concern about personal arrangements such as stereotypes and attitudes towards other groups of people.

The environment influences, in terms of geographical location, climate, situation, architecture, and also our perception of the environment. Influences from culture, socio-culture, and psycho-culture function as conceptual filters to convey and encode messages. Cultural influences in this model include factors that explain cultural similarities and differences, for example world views (religion), language, attitudes towards humans and others.

These factors affect the values, norms, and rules in our communication behavior. One element that completes Gudykunst and Kim’s model is the environment. The environment influences us in decoding messages. Therefore, between two communicators may have different perceptions and orientations towards the environment, they may interpret behavior in different ways in the same situation.

4. The Interactional Model

This model has a qualitative, non-systemic and nonlinear character. Communication is described as the formation of meaning or interpretation of messages or other people’s behavior by the participants of the communication. Some of the important concepts used are self , other self , and action.

According to the symbolic interaction model, people as communication participants are active, reflective and creative, and also display behavior that is difficult to predict. This understanding rejects the idea that individuals are passive organisms, in this context Blumer put forward three premises which form the basis of the Interactional model.

• Humans act regarding the meaning that individuals give to their social environment.
• Meaning is directly related to social interaction between individuals and their social environment.
• Meaning is created, maintained, and changed through the process of interpretation carried out by individuals in dealing with their social environment. The interactional model assumes that humans are much more active in the communication process. The important concepts used are self, other self, symbol, meaning, interpretation, and action.

The interactional model of people who develop their human potential through social interaction, through taking on the roles of others. The self develops through interaction with other people, family, the game stage to the wider environment in a stage called the game stage.

Where individuals always see themselves through perspective (other people’s roles), so that self-concept grows based on how other people see the individual’s self. The Interactional Model places communicators in an equal position with other communicators so that democratic interplay occurs in the giving and receiving quadrant of communication. Communicators are usually not reluctant to meet many people, hear and build cooperation with various parties, including people or political forces who have been at odds with them.

5. Agenda Setting Edit

This agenda setting was introduced by McCombs and DL Shaw in 1972. The assumption of this theory is that if the media puts pressure on an event, then the media will influence the audience to consider it important. So, what is considered important by the media, is also important for society.

In this case the media is assumed to have a very strong effect, especially because this assumption is related to the learning process and not to changes in attitudes and opinions. The mass media has a very strong effect, especially because it is related to the learning process and not to changing attitudes and opinions. Agenda setting theory assumes that people will learn what issues are, and how these issues are structured based on their level of importance.

According to McCombs and Donald Shaw, the audience does not only learn news and other things through the mass media, but also learns the importance given to an issue from the way the mass media emphasizes the topic.

For example, the mass media seems to determine which topics are important in reflecting what the candidates say in an election campaign. This means that the mass media sets the “agenda” of the campaign and its ability to influence individual cognition. If prospective voters consider an issue important, they will choose the party candidate who is most competent in dealing with that issue. And according to Funkhouser, the news media is believed by many to be a reliable source of information, but news media is not necessarily so.

The Edit Political Communication process is the same as the communication process in general, namely face-to-face communication and media communication with channels and components. The following are the lines in political communication edit, namely:

• Communicator or message sender
• Encoding-the process of compiling ideas into symbols or messages
• Messages
• Media-channel
• Decoding-the process of solving or translating symbols
• Communicator or Message Recipients
• Feedback-feedback, response

 

 

Political Communication Purposes

The following are the objectives of political communication, namely:

1. Raise the impact of the process of political communication

one of the goals of political communication is to bring up the effect or impact of the process of political communication carried out by the communicator on the communicator. The effect or impact is expected to be in accordance with what the communicator wants.

2. Influence audiences

Political communication is a verbal or nonverbal communication activity that has political content, in the form of influencing or providing a stimulus to others to carry out political activities.

As explained in the 2009 Government Communication and Policy Effectiveness by Eri Hariyanto’s work, some experts describe three objectives of political communication, such as:

a. Building a political image

Political communication is often aimed at building a good or positive image in front of the public. The image is built based on information received by the public through the political and mass media.

b. Forming and fostering public opinion

In political communication, the formation of public opinion is one important dimension that deserves attention. This formation can be done through the help of political media, especially the mass media.

c. Encourage political participation

Political participation is meant for the public to participate in political activities. For example, the public uses their voting rights in the ELECTIONS that are being held.

When discussing political communication, it’s a good idea for Sinaumed’s to read a book as a reference. And get the book available at www.sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best!

Defensiveness is – We’ve probably heard the saying “Why are you so defensive?” from a friend or acquaintance. In fact, it could be that we ourselves have said that to someone because of their attitude. Often, people say things like that without knowing exactly what they mean.

Of course, we need to know how the word “defensive” is actually used in a sentence. In order to really know this, of course we also have to know the meaning of “defensive” in psychology. Because, defensiveness refers to an attitude that is commonly found in learning related to psychology.

Sinaumed’s, let’s look at the discussion about defensiveness below!

Definition of Defensive Attitude

Before getting to know more about defensiveness, we definitely have to think about defensiveness. Because, the word defensive itself is an absorption form of ” defensive” which means “to endure”. As for more deeply, the meaning is “guarding or protecting from injury or attack”. A number of other words that are often used in general also more or less refer to the same meaning.

Fundamentally, this attitude is related to defending or protecting something or someone. This is often done by a country through military action to defend itself, or parents who defend their children from danger. When we behave psychologically, it means that we are trying to defend ourselves from someone or something and we feel it is important to do this.

Even so, what exactly do we want to protect? In general, we behave this way because we want to protect the ego. We want people to think we are smart, kind, or fun people, just like how we wish we were.

It could also be that we want to justify decisions that have already been made, things that have already been done, or even who we are personally.

Feelings and behavior are references to defensiveness. Usually, feelings arise when someone seems to be criticizing and causing feelings, sadness, embarrassment, and anger. Meanwhile, behavior generally stems from these feelings, so we may give the silent treatment, sarcastically, or respond back with criticism.

The Purpose of the Defensive Stance

The goal of defensive behavior is to distract yourself from feeling humiliated or hurt. Whether we realize it or not, we want to divert attention to other people’s mistakes so that we feel better afterwards.

With this goal that some might consider “evil,” this behavior may actually help us feel better, but in the short term. In the long run, being defensive will only make us feel worse.

In order to avoid feeling attacked, we point out other people’s shortcomings. This will eventually lead the other person to behave this way too and make the whole thing like a vicious cycle of defensiveness that goes back and forth, with no end, and probably no one even tries to understand.

Defensive Signs

By knowing only its meaning and purpose, we cannot necessarily be sure that our attitude or that of someone is defensive. Because even this attitude can be difficult to recognize, especially when it comes from within ourselves.

When you feel criticized, pay attention to whether Sinaumed’s does any of the following:

• Don’t want to listen to other people.
• Blaming others for their criticism of us.
• Making excuses for the thing the person is criticizing.
• Accusing others of doing the same.
• Trying to find justification for our attitude.
• Point out the wrong things others have done in the past and avoid talking about current problems.
• Telling people they shouldn’t be doing and feeling things like that.

If Sinaumed’s experiences some of the above attitudes when receiving criticism, it indicates that Sinaumed’s is on the defensive.

Why Someone Becomes Defensive

Defensiveness is a potentially damaging psychological defense. Indeed, our brains are wired to protect against threats and that is good because it defends us from helplessness.

However, defensiveness is a very complex type of behavior. It is based on a combination of our attitudes, beliefs, feelings, and personality.

Early in life is the most time people start to engage in defensive behavior. We may have learned this behavior from others when we were young. When we feel threatened, we also find ways to be defensive of the threat in order to feel more secure, just like everyone else.

When we grow up, we then apply the same behavior, whether to respond to the environment or even when facing threats. Often, these defenses are not what we really need now but simply because they have been learned in the past.

Keep in mind that people who are behaving defensively are not usually doing so out of malicious intent. Basically, the only thing they cared about the most at the time was a way to feel better after what happened. Unfortunately, this behavior is generally dangerous for both those who do it and those who receive it.

In short, sometimes these gestures are used inappropriately or in ways that prevent effective communication even though these mechanisms are not inherently a bad thing.

Defensive Stance Type

The clearer about this, this attitude is actually divided into several types that have several differences. So, what are the types of attitude?

Let’s try to check if one of these types corresponds to our feelings and behavior:

1. Ad hominem attack :

It is a type of attitude in which we attack others in some way in order to discredit their statements or criticisms.

2. Bringing up the past

This type means that we talk about the past mistakes of someone who criticized us.

3 . Silent treatment or silent treatment

As with many cases Sinaumed’s is probably familiar with, this type of defensiveness refers to not interacting with someone who criticizes us to get back at them.

4. Gaslighting

Denying or lying that we have done something to make others question their memory and sanity. This type is usually done together or in the form of an innuendo that the person is not thinking clearly or rationally.

5. Blame/aggression

The next type of defensive attitude is blaming. In other words, diverting criticism of us with other people’s mistakes.

6. Righteous indignation

Act as if no one is allowed to ask the topic that triggers the defensive attitude for some reason. For example, calling ourselves hard workers and that is a reason to put family first.

7. Innocent victims

Crying or blaming yourself excessively after agreeing to a critique to cause the other person to sympathize, feel guilty, and decide not to criticize further.

The Impact of Being Defensive

Sinaumed’s, why is it a bad thing to take a defensive stance to protect yourself? Actually, what kind of loss could arise if we continue to do so?

1. Influence Individual or Group Relations

Defensive attitudes can affect our relationships with individuals or other groups that relate and interact with each other in life. If we often respond to other people with a defensive attitude, our relationship with that individual is very likely to not be good from day to day.

2. Can Make Relationships Become Strained

Then, we may also create a hostile and tense environment if we continue to be on the defensive with our partners or loved ones.

3. Can Complicate Relationships

On the other hand, a defensive attitude at work can also complicate relationships, both with supervisors or managers, and co-workers. An overly emotional attitude like this can even make us banished from social groups or become the center of the group but secretly humiliated and unwanted.

4. Can Create Distrust

Defensive behavior can also create unprecedented mistrust and hostility instead of protecting us from psychological attacks. This will also eventually create a “vicious circle” where there are defensiveness, feelings of frustration, defensiveness of frustration, and ultimately make us feel worse.

For better results for everyone, it’s better to be clear from the start than to be defensive.

Control Strategies for Reducing Defence

The more you know the causes and effects of a wrong defensive attitude, the more you want to know how to control this attitude so that you become less defensive. What’s the strategy? Are there some things we can do to minimize and eventually eliminate our bad defensiveness?

Here are some strategic tips to get started on being less defensive:

1. Recognize Our Defensiveness

The first step to stopping defensive behavior is to really recognize when it is happening. Indeed, it is very easy to avoid confronting the behavior or admit that we are behaving defensively.

Instead, try to pay attention to how you feel and react to other people in that moment. We can also journal about feelings at the end of the day and explore how different situations make us feel or react.

2. Feeling Validation

Once you become aware of when you become defensive, it is important to begin validating how you feel when you are criticized. The simple act of admitting that we are feeling hurt, worried, embarrassed, scared, or insecure can help defuse the situation.

Instead of feeling worse for having these feelings, try not to complicate things. Acknowledge the feeling so we don’t become too focused on it.

3. Avoid Acting on Emotions alone

When we validate our feelings of having been hurt or embarrassed, and then show compassion to ourselves for how we feel, we can also acknowledge the fact that there is no need to act on impulse to react defensively.

While it may make sense to feel defensive, that doesn’t mean we have to take action. Instead, we can show compassion for ourselves for those feelings and recognize that everyone feels this way from time to time.

4. Align Yourself with Self-Value

Is acting defensively compatible with how we want to be a certain person? Most don’t, and it’s time to get clear on how we want to behave. When we feel as if we are getting defensive, how can the best version of ourselves handle the situation?

If unsure, use a journal or Sinaumed’s diary to write a list of things that can be done right now instead of acting on purely defensive feelings.

Here are some ideas for actions you can take to prevent yourself from acting on the defensive in certain situations:

• Let others know that their comments make us feel hurt and why that is.
• Behave assertively and demand respect from others, regardless of their criticism.
• Stay on topic and discuss solutions to problems rather than trying to get sidetracked.

5. Anticipate When There’s a Chance of Being Defensive

Does Sinaumed’s have a pretty good sense of when we’re usually going to get defensive? Perhaps around people or in certain situations, the best thing to do is to make a list of situations that might cause defensiveness.

Feeling caught off guard or surprised by someone can make us tend to react defensively. Therefore, if we can anticipate when it might happen, we can plan how to show ourselves compassion and how we want to react.

6. Increase Self-Esteem

If there are certain problems or areas in life that tend to put us on the defensive, it may help to do things that make us feel more confident or increase our self-esteem.

For example, if you feel bad when someone talks about your physical health, you may feel more confident when you know that you are doing everything you can to be the healthiest version of yourself.

7. See a Therapist

If Sinaumed’s has trouble with defensiveness and can’t seem to control it on his own, he might try investing in therapy or counseling to deal with the problem. This can be especially helpful if we are experiencing a defensive attitude in the relationship.

In fact, we can even attend counseling for couples to practice communication as a couple.

8. More Responsible

Instead of reacting immediately to how you feel hurt or criticized, you can try taking responsibility for whatever part you may be responsible for in the situation.

For example, if you were asked to do something and didn’t do it, you could respond by saying, “You’re right, I should have done that. I am sorry.”

Acknowledging that you played some role in the problem will help defuse the situation and allow you to work with others to solve the problem.

9. Improve Communication Skills

Another way to manage defensiveness is to improve communication skills. If Sinaumed’s knows that certain topics always make us feel hurt or angry, then that could also be telling others that we don’t want to discuss them unless the goal is to find a solution.

Constantly rehashing issues for the sake of arguing is not effective communication. To get better at communicating, try practicing in low-stakes situations beforehand or imagine how you might want to communicate before the situation occurs.

Imagine yourself remaining calm while discussing the problem, instead of reacting defensively.

How to Respond to Someone Who Is Being Defensive

Some of our acquaintances, friends, and friends may have an overly defensive attitude even though we have wholeheartedly supported them. How will Sinaumed’s feel if he continues to face this situation? Here’s how to respond to someone who is on the defensive.

1. Finding the Middle Way

It would be great if we and our friends could find a middle ground or something to agree on, even if it’s just a small thing. If your friend is being defensive and very childish, it might be even better if you can ignore some of these behaviors.

2. Keep Calm

Generally, a calm attitude can help us to talk about problems in a simpler, direct, and honest way depending on the closeness of our relationship with the social environment, especially friends who act like that.

3. Avoiding reactions in the form of defenses

Avoiding reacting to defenses from friends may also help us respond in a good way. The reason is, often our response without realizing it is a negative way and very offensive. Again, most people with this attitude learn this behavior early on or because the emotional stress is too great.

Conclusion

Everyone has their own way of being defensive. In addition, everyone will also be defensive at certain moments.

From all the explanations above it can be said that this attitude has a considerable influence in everyday life. Of course, it’s important to keep this attitude in moderation and not negative because being defensive is a vulnerable behavior. Thus the discussion about defensiveness and how to respond to it, I hope all the discussion in this article will be useful for Sinaumed’s.

Deep web is – Many people believe that in this internet era, Google can help people find all the information they need. But in fact, the internet is not that shallow and there are millions of things that are hidden from Google. One of them is the deep web.

Launching from safaridigital.com, currently there are around 200 million active websites and more than 55 billion website pages indexed by Google robots. Meanwhile, siteefy.com says there are 1.17 billion websites, although 83% of them are inactive. They also estimate that 252 thousand new websites appear every day. A very fantastic amount, right?

But again, this is only what Google’s robots can find. Meanwhile, the deep web, which is hidden from Google, is even bigger. According to the Wilson Center’s records, the number of websites that are included as ” deep web ” is 400-500 times greater than that number. So roughly how much? You do the math huh!

Anyway , maybe Sinaumed’s is still confused about what the ” deep web ” really is ? Why are there so many of them? And what’s in it? To answer these questions, I will briefly explain some important things about the deep web that you need to know.

Get to know Surface Web, Deep Web, Dark Web

To understand what the deep web is , I will discuss three important terms that you need to know first. This term will give a little picture of the invisible world of the internet.

Without understanding all three, you will most likely have a hard time understanding the deep web and the parts within it. However, what I have described is only a brief introduction. So that the discussion will not go too deep and explore many things.

OK, without further ado, let’s start with an introduction to the surface web, deep web , and dark web .

SurfaceWeb

Sinaumed’s, if everything on the internet is likened to a vast ocean, then the 1.17 billion websites mentioned earlier are the surface, namely the sea water that you usually see directly or through photographs. This section is also called the surface web .

You can find everything on the surface by typing keywords into a search engine–like Google, Bing, Yahoo. The contents that appear and you can click on them one by one, are deliberately made “visible” by their owners so that they can be accessed by anyone.

Google, through the robot they created, collects all of this content and then shows it to users of their services.

Deep Web

Behind the surface of this vast ocean, there is another part that is even wider and deeper. Namely the website , content, and everything that is hidden from the Google engine. This part is known as the deep web .

In short, the deep web itself can be considered as content that is beyond the reach of search engine robots. Either because the owner didn’t give permission or the content is protected. What is clear, its depth or size is impossible to calculate.

Even so, according to the Wilson Center , the data held by the 60 largest websites on the deep web is 40 times greater than on the surface web. That’s just the 60 biggest websites , not the smaller ones.

The concept of the deep web actually emerged with the increasing popularity of the World Wide Web (WWW) in the mid-90’s. However, at that time the deep web did not attract much public attention.

It was only in October 2013 that the deep web managed to attract the attention of the world community after the arrest of ” Dread Pirate Roberts ” aka Ross William Ulbricht. Ulbricht is the originator and operator of the ” Silk Road ” marketplace which is a place for transactions of illegal goods.

Since then, the deep web has never been forgotten by those interested in conspiracies, mysteries, secrets or all things horror.

Dark Web

Deep beneath the deep web , in darkness that no light can penetrate at all, there are parts that are inaccessible to everyone–especially ordinary people like us. This third section is also known as the dark web .

Dark web in short is a network or content that cannot be reached by the internet if no one is directly sharing it. This means that if there are dark web users who share data on the internet, we can still see it.

Unlike the surface, to be able to see what’s on the dark web you need special equipment, namely the TOR browser . And the majority of the site can only be accessed anonymously.

Bitcoin, which went viral two years ago, was initially often used for transactions on the dark web . But it became popular on the surface because it was made ransom from infection with the wannacry virus.

On the dark web you will find magical things–whatever they are–that will never appear on a Google search page, no matter how hard you search.

If Sinaumed’s wants to understand more about the ins and outs of the internet world, you can use the book Basic Concepts of the Internet by Bambang Eka Purnama as a reference.

Misconceptions about the Deep Web

The interesting thing about the deep web is that there are misconceptions in society about this part. Not a few people think that the deep web is a place for scary, weird, crazy, thieves, psycho, and so on.

Even though if you examine it more deeply, the content on the deep web is even more “weighty” or “valuable” than what is on the surface. As previously explained, the deep web is a hidden part of the Google search engine.

Because “hidden” means he can’t be found by Google or other search engines. However, this does not make the deep web content “unseen”. It still exists, but not everyone can access it.

In short, the deep web is deliberately hidden from Google’s reach because the data or information it contains has more value than what is on the surface. Or it could be because it is secret.

Actually, you often access the deep web in your daily life, but you don’t realize it. How did it happen? Because every website that requires visitors to log in using a password is included in the deep web section .

Websites such as Facebook, Twitter, your email inbox page , company websites that can only be accessed by employees, or even your Whatsapp chat with your crush are part of the deep web .

Do you want important emails from bosses or clients to be opened to the general public? Certainly not. Therefore, Google makes your email inbox page “hidden” from the reach of its search engine robots.

So it’s clear now, the deep web is not a gathering place for “anti- mainstream ” internet users . Nor is it a place for buying and selling illegal goods. The deep web is just too valuable information to hide from the masses.

3 Main Differences Deep Web and Dark Web

So that Sinaumed’s understands better, here are 3 main differences between the deep web and the dark web that you should remember carefully:

1. Fill

Deep Web

Information or data on the deep web usually falls into the following categories:

• Contextual web pages : web pages whose contents vary, depending on which page you access.
• Dynamic pages : data collected from forms or keywords
• Limited access content : web pages that cannot be indexed by search engines
• Private website : The website and all the pages on it which can only be accessed after visitors register and then log in
• Enterprise data : includes personal data and files distributed on digital storage services such as Google Drive, Dropbox
• Scripted content : a category of website pages that can only be accessed via links generated with JavaScript
• Software-gated pages : pages that can only be accessed using certain programs or applications and cannot be accessed using mainstream browsers.
• Unlinked content : a category of website pages that have not been found by search engines because there are no links referring to that content
• Web archives : A category for websites that are no longer active but whose contents can still be viewed through the web archive service
• Intranet networks, websites and forums that can only be accessed by members, email and private chat, locked social media accounts, digital bank accounts and other protected data.

Dark Web

All content on the dark web can usually only be accessed via the darknet, a special network that can only be accessed using certain browsers , requires special authorization, and is encrypted.

The majority of darknets are usually peer-to-peer (P2P) with a small scope. However, there are also large ones, such as TOR , Freenet , and I2P . Content commonly found on the dark web is:

• Malware : malicious programs, viruses, or software for exploitation of software that is traded. These contents are usually used by cyber-attackers.
• Illicit Marketplaces (black market) : places where criminals transact drugs, stolen goods or data. This stolen data is usually used to carry out cyber attacks or identity theft.
• Hacking services : sellers of hacking services that can be used to carry out digital attacks on certain parties
• Fraud, forgery, and identity theft : Personal information and data that is traded, such as email data or digital bank accounts
• Bitcoin service : Criminals on the dark web often transact using bitcoin, both for services and goods.
• Stolen data : Personal and sensitive data stolen from companies are freely sold on the dark web

With exclusive access through special software , data and information on the dark web cannot be found by everyone. In addition, anonymous access makes the dark web a great place for criminals to congregate and carry out illegal transactions.

Along with the development of technology, cyber crime is also growing. It can take various forms, ranging from hacking, defamation, copyright infringement, malicious comments, and so on. You can get an idea of ​​how crime is in cyberspace through the book Why? Cyber ​​Crime – Cyber ​​Crime written by YeaRimDang.

2. Access

Deep web

There are many parts of the deep web that can be accessed legally, such as your email inbox , data uploaded to digital storage services, company intranet networks, and personal websites where you are registered as a member.

Even so, theft or burglary of personal information and data on the deep web is an act that violates the law. Examples include breaking into government-owned data, and so on.

Dark Web

In the United States, a person is allowed to access the dark web using special software such as the TOR browser . With a note, he must accept the consequences for the crimes he committed on the internet. Like buying illegal drugs, accessing blocked content, and so on.

3. Usability

Deep Web

The deep web is generally used for several purposes, such as protecting information and personal data in cyberspace; securing databases, interacting on social media, accessing certain educational courses, using subscription services.

Dark Web

Meanwhile, the dark web , which can only be accessed with a special browser that hides the identity of its users, tends to be used for purposes that violate the law.

For example like:

• Carrying out illegal activities
• Conducting certain investigations
• Organize protests on politics
• Surf the internet anonymously

The following table contains the complete differences between the deep web and the dark web : Conclusion

So it’s clear, the deep web is not the same as the dark web and the majority of its content is safe to access, and even tends to be more valuable. However, for some people who are able to break into system security, the deep web can be a “gold mine”.

While the dark web is more populated by criminals and criminals. For those of you who are curious and want to know what the contents of the dark web are like, it’s best to throw this desire away. Especially if you are an ordinary person who uses the internet to play social media.

The potential dangers of the dark web  outweigh its secrets. You never know what will happen once you open this deepest part of the internet. Better use your time to learn about programming and developers . As shown by Eryanto Sitorus in the book Hackers and Security .

This is a review of the deep web that Sinaumed’s needs to understand. Sinaumed’s can also read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Gill

Deep talk is – Human life can never be separated from problems and unfortunately they can appear anywhere, such as at home, office, school, hangouts, playgrounds, even places of worship. Every problem that arises, definitely makes someone overthinking or can also become annoyed.

As a social being who is obliged to interact with other people, it is impossible for you to avoid problems. It’s a shame, when problems come, sometimes you have to keep them to yourself until you feel tired of dealing with them.

In situations like that, deep talk can be a way out so that you are a little relieved from feeling tired. Yes, think of it as cheap entertainment solace. However, you must have friends who can understand you to do deep talk.

Well, how come you can do that? What exactly is deep talk ? Why can’t everyone do it? What benefits can you get from this activity? How to do deep talk ? Let’s find the answer below.

Definition of Deep Talk

In short, deep talk is a “deeper” conversation about various topics that is carried out by two people. In this case, what is meant by the topic of depth is not just a hobby or the weather, but other things that are happening in your life or something that is interesting to you and the person you are talking to.

For example, such as politics, social issues, ideology, or other issues that are currently hot. Interestingly, sometimes deep talk starts with a silly question, but it can make you express all your thoughts, feelings, and perspectives. That’s why some call deep talk deep conversations.

If deep talk starts with a silly question, it’s common for other people who are near you to think that you and the person you’re talking to are weird or take things too seriously.

For example, you imagine what if humans really move to mars one day. The discussion then continues with reflections about your plan to live on the red planet. Topics like these actually spark the imagination of you and your interlocutor.

Why Can’t Everyone Do Deep Talk ?

For some people, deep talk is an activity that is difficult to do. Especially for those who are not curious enough to ask questions and don’t dare to express their perspective.

Therefore, deep talk is usually only done by two people. Because yes, it is quite difficult to find someone who is on the same frequency as you. Not infrequently, people who are close or have known you for a long time, are actually not good deep talk friends.

However, along with your life journey, you will definitely find someone who immediately “clicks” when talking or communicating. Don’t give up on searching if you haven’t met the right deep talk opponent yet.

As part of the “art of speaking”, there are actually certain tips that can train this ability. Therefore, the book Talking Has Art written by Oh Su Hyang you must read because this book contains various techniques of communication, persuasion, and negotiation.

How to Do a Deep Conversation or Deep Talk ?

For some people, communication is not easy even though this has become part of everyday life. Some people even find it difficult to open a chat and are more comfortable being a listener.

Luckily when doing deep talk , the chat often just flows. Especially if you’ve met the right person. Therefore, the main task for you is to find a trusted person who can listen without judging whatever complaints or perspectives you put out.

After that, try to find the right place, situation, and time because these three also play a role in making the conversation deeper. As much as possible, make sure you and your interlocutor have free time to talk at length.

Choose a place that is comfortable and can make your mood better, relax and calm. That way, you can chat freely without being disturbed by the environment around you.

If the situation and conditions are favorable, you can start the conversation with small talk, such as asking how the other person is doing or how busy they are. Remember, deep talk doesn’t have to start with a heavy topic. In fact, even a funny story can be an effective opener.

Not infrequently, light topics like this actually raise other topics that are more interesting to explore and discuss further. Then, to keep the conversation going, it’s best to use open-ended questions.

The reason is, open questions that start with “5W + 1H” will make your interlocutor interested in explaining or telling more than closed questions where the answers are only “yes” and “no”.

You can also make questions from the conversation that is issued by your interlocutor, so listen carefully when he is talking. Therefore, when we do deep talk, we will indirectly learn to be good listeners.

For example, he said he was working on a new project to build his portfolio. You can ask the reasons that made him choose the project and what difficulties he faced while working on it and so on.

The longer the chat you have will continue to expand to other topics. Don’t forget, you also have to tell the problem or issue that interests you.

What are the Benefits of Doing Deep Talk ?

The most common benefit that you will get when doing deep talk is that you can become closer to the person you are talking to. However, the benefits don’t stop there, because there are still many advantages or benefits that you can get from this activity.

1. Feeling More Relieved

Many studies have found that when you share negative emotions with those closest to you, you feel less stressed and pressured, both physical and mental. Therefore, you should not harbor problems and negative feelings for too long.

The reason is, when you issue negative feelings, you are unconsciously reducing the response of the amygdala. The amygdala is the part of the brain that is responsible for regulating emotional responses such as fear, anger or sadness.

More than that, by accepting your situation that is not okay, you can also find peace and be free from anger and sadness.

2. Add Happiness

According to research in Psychological Science , people who frequently engage in deep talk are much happier than those who rarely engage in it. Unfortunately, until now it is still not certain what connects the two.

One possibility that is obtained is because humans really need to interact with other humans. So, whatever the answer, what is clear is that deep talk is very effective in strengthening human relations.

3. Expanding Viewpoints About Life

Every human being you meet must have a point of view about something. Knowing other people’s opinions or perspectives will make you realize that there are still other points of view that you have never thought of at all.

In addition, Sinaumed’s can also learn to see a problem from a different angle. This ability will often become new knowledge that is useful for developing yourself.

4. Maintaining the Warmth of Relationships

For those of you who have a partner, try to do deep talk with him. If necessary, make a regular schedule because it turns out that communication like this is very good for maintaining the warmth of your relationship.

Even if you’ve been with him for years, it’s not certain that you can know and read his mind. This healthy communication will prevent you from misunderstandings, including for trivial matters.

Deep talk also allows you to find out what feelings he is feeling or it could be the problem he is facing. That way, you can provide a solution or at least understand him.

How to deep talk with your partner so you don’t turn into bickering

Seeing the benefits of deep talk to maintain a warm relationship with your partner, of course you can’t miss it. However, be careful, this activity can turn into a fight if you don’t apply the three methods below.

Speak Slower

When talking with your partner, make sure you always pay attention to the choice of words you use. These words will be very influential to improve communication and make him feel comfortable.

Don’t let you only think about your own interests and force him to accept everything that comes out of your mouth. Listen carefully to what he has to say, ask relevant questions, and respond to show that you are interested in what he has to say.

Also consider your partner’s emotions

One of the times that is prone to triggering fights is when you and He are exhausted, either because of work, assignments, or something else. At a time like this, of course you have to understand how he feels so that the fight doesn’t get worse.

One way is by deep talk , but since he’s tired, it’s best to consider his feelings too. Ask questions that can trigger him to express his feelings.

Also, find out what he really needs. It could be that he needs a break or just wants to be heard from what he has to say, it could also be that he wants his point of view to be understood.

If that’s not possible, don’t continue deep talk with your partner. It’s better to find another, more appropriate time than having to start a fight. If something like that happens, then you can invite deep talk when you meet or before going to bed.

Moreover, in a relationship, the form of communication also varies. So, not just deep talk . You also need to remember, he also has the right to choose the communication concept he wants. However, maintaining communication is far more important than forcing deep talk at inopportune times.

Be More Open

Sharing personal things and feelings of insecurity is one of the keys to having a lasting relationship. You can be honest with him about anything, whether you like it or not. With honesty like this, you will be more sensitive to his feelings, and vice versa.

You can also keep things to yourself that you don’t want to tell him. If possible, share the sorrows and difficulties you are experiencing so that your relationship can become even more intimate.

All of these things are done to achieve a goal and the goal is for you to understand each other and not judge easily when problems arise.

Well, talking with your partner is quite risky. But if you know the power of talking itself, maybe Sinaumed’s will be more than happy to do it. So it’s best to read the book The Power Of Talk & Body Language by Abhicandra YS.

Topics You Can Discuss When Deep Talk With Your Partner

Sexual Education

Even though it’s still seen as a taboo topic to talk about, there’s nothing wrong with trying to talk about sexual education with your partner. Especially if you and he already have a steady plan to step into marriage.

Knowledge about sex can help you to understand each other’s feelings while in bed. Joseph Grennys, a social researcher, revealed that couples who often talk about sex tend to be 10 times happier than couples who rarely discuss it.

You also have to talk about sexual expectations so that your sex life after marriage will be warmly maintained. Not only that, by knowing each other’s sexual expectations, you can also try to fulfill them.

Then, there are also topics on reproductive health, planning for children, and the use of contraceptives. Although, maybe the discussion is a bit awkward, but this is still necessary so that you and he can understand each other.

Mental health

It cannot be denied, mental health has now become a common conversation among young people. Especially the millennial and Z generations. Moreover, this mental health can indeed affect behavior, thinking, and also mood.

In addition, a healthy mentality is also very much needed so that the body and mind continue to function properly. When this understanding is lacking, it is likely to have a negative impact on your emotions and mentality, thus triggering fights in your relationship.

Talking about mental health cannot be separated from the thing called happiness. For Sinaumed’s who want to know the art of being happy, they can buy a book by Ardhina Nugrahaeni entitled The Art of Happiness: A Way to Find Your Happiness From Now, Tomorrow, and Forever

Finance

Just like sexual education, finance is still taboo to talk about. However, in the context of being in a relationship, this topic is actually very crucial because it can affect the continuity of your relationship.

FYI, most of the divorces that occur in this world are caused by economic problems. Therefore, you and he must understand each other’s point of view on financial matters so that there are no misunderstandings.

Parenting

For those of you who are determined to marry him, it’s better to start talking about parenting or raising children. Find out what parenting skills you have, how is your perspective on raising children, and other important things. The goal is that when your little one is present in your household later, you can provide maximum support for him.

Body Positivity

Body positivity has recently emerged as a topic that is hotly discussed by society, especially on social media. You can also discuss this matter with your partner because it is quite related to mental health.

Moreover, societal standards regarding appearance often have a negative effect on mental health. In addition, instilling body positivity also cannot be done easily. It takes a long time to make you commit to treating each other’s bodies properly and properly.

Conflict Resolution

As long as you are in contact with humans, you are bound to encounter conflict, even if you don’t want it yourself. Likewise in love relationships. You and your partner will face many problems that must be resolved properly.

To make it happen, maturity is needed which acts as the foundation. With maturity, you can discuss problems with a cool head and find solutions together.

After getting married, the problems you face will be more complex and intense. When you are used to dealing with it together, then you will be able to solve problems that come well.

Self reflection

Not infrequently, simple things can make you know how to think partner. For example, the question “how was today?” which discusses her daily activities, including her problems and achievements.

From these questions, you can understand how to deal with the stress he feels at work, how he builds relationships with “annoying” coworkers, or how he deals with his superiors and subordinates, how he views the work he does, and much more. .

Whatever the topic, the most important thing is that you have to listen well when doing deep talk because by listening to other people, you can be wiser in your attitude. As Muthia Sayekti wrote in the book The Art of Listening: Hearing What’s Unspoken, Understanding What’s Unsaid.

Conclusion

Deep talk is a way of communication that makes you and the other person talk. Anyone who does it has the goal of digging deeper into feelings and thoughts and then conveying them more freely. Therefore, never take it for granted because communication is one of the important keys to maintaining human relations.

That’s the discussion about deep talk , which is accompanied by the benefits of doing deep talk. So that you and your partner become a more romantic and happy couple, you can find the information at sinaumedia.com . With sinaumedia, you can get #MoreWithReading information

Author: Gill

Also read:

Understanding deed of sale and purchase – Everyone will agree that property is a very important type of asset to own. Property such as houses and land is a promising investment not only as a place to live but also attracts many people. This is because property investment offers promising income opportunities and tends to be safe.

However, property such as buildings and land carries a relatively high risk of ownership. In fact, we do not rule out the possibility of property disputes if property ownership is not managed properly. To prevent this, a sale and purchase deed or commonly abbreviated as AJB is mandated.

In general, the deed of sale and purchase is a letter or certificate officially issued by the PPAT which contains information about the new owner and the agreement on the transfer of property rights between the parties concerned. Of course it is very important to understand the role of this document in order to avoid the risk of problems when buying and selling land and buildings.

So, to find out more about what a sale and purchase deed is, what its function is, how to manage it, and examples of explanations, let’s look at the full discussion below.

What is the Deed of Sale and Purchase?

The deed of sale and purchase is one of the documents that cannot be made by yourself because it requires the services of a notary or PPAT (Land Deed Making Officer). The purpose of making a sale and purchase deed is to prove the existence of a sale and purchase transaction and the transfer of rights to land and buildings.

When buying land or a building, this document is one of the legal requirements to protect you if the seller commits an offense and can cause you harm, and the buyer must have evidence that can be brought to court.

The sale and purchase deed has considerable legal force and has a legal or legal basis which includes the form of a land or building purchase agreement.

A deed of sale and purchase is also required when changing ownership of the item you are buying or selling. The purchase of land and buildings is of course very valuable, but if this purchase is equated with the purchase of other goods whose value is much lower, criminal cases such as fraud that harms one of the parties can of course be carried out easily.

Making a sale and purchase deed must be done officially by a notary. If this document is produced by a party that does not comply with the rules, this document cannot be made as valid evidence from a legal point of view. Compliance with proper regulations.

When purchasing land or property, managing the title and deed of sale is essential to ensure peace of mind for both parties. This document is original and implies conditions closely related to the process of manufacture, form and physicality.

Not everyone can do a sale and purchase deed, so you should find a notary or a trusted government official to do it. In addition, it is important for readers to understand the function and use of this document to avoid misuse.

Reversal of the name to buy land or property with a sale and purchase deed is a commitment made by both parties. If any party is found to be involved in fraud, the situation becomes more complicated, so don’t forget this document.

Of course, this document also plays an important role for the seller to ensure the buyer’s payment process is in accordance with the original contract. In addition, the deed of sale and purchase of land is also often associated with documents such as sales agreements and deed of ownership, but there are differences between the two.

Sale Purchase Deed function

Of course, before dealing with making a sale and purchase deed, you must know what must be in this document. One of the main functions in preparing this document is as legal evidence of transactions made by both parties in purchasing land or houses.

Of course, the terms of both parties must also be met, according to a mutual agreement, with a mutually agreed upon amount. You must acknowledge and agree to all items listed in the purchase and proof of purchase.

This provision becomes null and void if one party does not agree. Another function of this document is as legal evidence that can be brought to court if it is found that one of the parties has not fulfilled his obligations under the previous agreement.

This document becomes evidence of the case and convicts one of the parties. With this deed, both parties have legal protection, so you don’t have to worry when making large transactions.

Another function is to prove that sellers and buyers have fulfilled their rights and obligations based on applicable regulations. This legal evidence can serve as a guide for both sellers and buyers, so it is important to include it in transactions.

Reversal of the name to buy land or property with a sale and purchase deed is a commitment made by both parties. If any party is found to be involved in fraud, the situation becomes more complicated, so don’t forget this document.

Of course, this document also plays an important role for the seller to ensure the buyer’s payment process is in accordance with the original contract.

Apart from that, deed of sale and purchase is also often associated with documents such as sales agreement and deed of ownership, but there are differences between the two.

Compulsory Items Included in the Deed of Sale and Purchase

Deed of sale and purchase is a document in the form of a deed which contains several provisions and articles relating to the sale and purchase of land or buildings. This document usually requires several things, such as documents such as identity cards (KTP), certificates of land rights, land rights certificates of the United Nations.

The consent of the husband and wife is usually also required so that the mixing of joint assets between husband and wife does not cause disputes in the future. This is an object in the form of a document required for a sales contract, which must be attached.

Several documents must be examined first to prove the validity of the data which is information from both parties. Of course, the purpose of data checking is to prevent one-sided commercial fraud.

From the discussion above, it can be concluded that the deed of sale and purchase has several important features that can make the trading process authentic and minimize the risk of property disputes.

Learn more about the various functions of the sale and purchase agreement below

• Legitimate evidence that the transaction or sale of land, houses or other types of buildings takes place according to the price and terms agreed upon by the parties concerned.

• Failure of one of the parties to carry out its obligations based on the previously agreed agreement.

• Both parties have fulfilled their obligations and rights in accordance with the previously made agreement, which is valid evidence for both parties.

Characteristics of a Legitimate Sale and Purchase Deed

In conducting a land or building sale and purchase transaction, the authenticity and legality of the sale and purchase agreement must first be checked.

Be sure to participate in monitoring all stages of the sales contract so as not to be deceived. The method is as follows.

1. Don’t let property sellers worry about documents without verifying the manufacturing process with a notary or PPAT. If necessary, it is agreed in advance with the seller and the PPAT office to process documents together and conclude a sales contract according to the agreement.

2. If AJB’s manufacturing goes through stages or is found not to follow the correct process, we should be suspicious. Equally important, ensure that the sales contract is executed through a reliable PPAT service and registered with ATR or the Ministry of BPN. You can easily check the legitimacy and reliability of PPAT services through the official website of the Ministry of Agrarian Affairs/BPN.

3. remember to bring two witnesses and a companion when signing the sales contract. Witnesses who become witnesses can be residents of the neighborhood or the area around the property. For example the RT administrator or the local RW administrator.

Cost of Making Sale and Purchase Deed

For those who are interested in making a deed of sale and purchase, it is advisable to know the costs in advance. In general, you can create this document yourself, but some people prefer to rely on a management services agency.

Besides being more practical, you need to prepare more money to use this service. To draw up a deed of sale yourself, you need to contact the BPN office. BPN usually charges a fee of 5% to 1% of the total transaction value.

Collecting these fees is worth it. Because by using these funds, he engaged in notary services, issued deeds and changed names. However, you will also need to provide funds to pay for land and rent. The fee is 5% of the value of the house less the acquisition value of the property tax free i.e. the cost of the sale and purchase deed.

The PPAT Bureau should have determined the amount of the contribution according to the needs of the party submitting the contribution. If an entrepreneur wants to use the services of an agency, they have to pay for the service, so they have to set up a higher fee, but it’s still convenient.

When making a sale and purchase deed, of course there are costs that must be prepared. Who bears the costs, the seller or the buyer? These costs are usually borne by the buyer. However, please note that these fees can be adjusted again after consultation.

If there is an exception in the contract that the seller bears production costs, that is also fine. Neither buyer is liable for any costs, although this is usually the case.

Because, logically the buyer is the person who gets the desired building or property. The buying process requires a purchase contract and the costs are automatically borne by the buyer.

However, it doesn’t matter if the seller and buyer share the costs as long as both parties know and agree to the agreement. Avoid conflicts and misunderstandings that can harm both parties later.

The difference between AJB, SHM, and PPJB

After knowing the meaning of the deed of sale and purchase above, it might be confusing to distinguish between SHM (Certificate of Property Rights) and PPJB (Sale and Purchase Agreement) or what can also be called property rights. However, if explored further, both AJB, PPJB, and SHM have their respective roles and functions.

1. Deed of Sale and Purchase (AJB)

In the deed of sale and purchase, the deed is evidence or fact of the existence of the sale and purchase of goods, both land and buildings.

2. Certificate of Ownership (SHM)

SHM (Certificate of Property Rights) is the best and strongest proof of ownership of all property, be it land or buildings. Therefore, it is understandable whether SHM is proof of property ownership.

3. Sale Purchase Agreement (PPJB) 

PPJB or (Sales and Purchase Contract Agreement) is the first contract between the seller and the buyer of the property. Compared to the two previous types of documents, this PPJB is not authentic.

From the explanation above, it can be concluded that before submitting a sale and purchase deed and obtaining a SHM, the parties conducting a property sale and purchase transaction must first process a document called the PPJB.

This is because the deed is drawn up by the prospective buyer or seller and other parties and does not require the involvement of a notary.

Therefore, the PPJB is only a document that explains whether there is a process of buying and selling land or buildings by the parties whose names appear.

In essence, the deed of sale and purchase is an important file that is used to complete a sale and purchase transaction of a property, be it land, house or other type of building, and must be submitted to the PPAT or local notary. will be executed.

After the sale and purchase deed document has been processed, the buyer can record the delivery of the name certificate and take the buyer’s SHM. Sellers and buyers can carry out a transaction deed through PPJB because there is a binding agreement for the sale of property before the sale and purchase deed is finalized.

Therefore, although these types of documents have different roles, all three are related and involved in a series of transactions or property purchases.

The difference between Sale and Purchase Deed and Land Certificate

For those who often misunderstand that a sale and purchase deed and a Land Certificate are the same document, we will clarify the difference between the two to help you better understand the use and function of the two different types of documents. .

Of course, from the understanding that we have provided, the reader already knows that this document is proof of a sale and purchase transaction of land or a house at a mutually agreed price.

Land Certificate means land rights, management rights, certificates written in the land register. These certificates are also classified into various types such as Flat Unit Title Certificates, Property Rights Certificates and others.

Another difference is that the deed of sale and purchase is issued by the Land Deed Making Officer (PPAT). PPAT is appointed directly by the Director of Home Affairs from the Home Office. Land certificates, on the other hand, are issued by BPN and are usually assisted by the PPAT’s role as well.

Can the Deed of Sale and Purchase be Considered as Legal Proof of Ownership?

You may wonder whether the deed of sale and purchase can later become legal proof of ownership from a legal point of view, so the deed of sale and purchase is not proof of legal ownership of land or property.

A sale and purchase deed proves that you have purchased the property or land, and does not prove ownership of the property. Therefore, it is different from Freehold Certificates or SHM, which have the highest title and the strongest legal rights.

Don’t misunderstand again to understand the difference between proof of ownership and proof of process. It is not possible for the owner of the sale and purchase deed to prove that he owns the land or property because the two terms are different.

To own certain objects, you need a SHM with a certificate issued by BPN. The reason SHM is the best proof of ownership is because building use rights and usufructuary rights have a certain period of time.

As with renting, the building or land is not entirely yours. Land titles provide the highest level of proof of ownership, but that doesn’t mean you shouldn’t need a sale and purchase deed when buying or selling land or property.

Example of Deed of Sale and Purchase

The deed of sale and purchase must comply with the rules and regulations accurately and completely. In the process of making it, there are several important dates or information that must be included in the deed of sale and purchase in connection with the sale and purchase transaction or transfer of rights over the land or building in question.

For further information, here are some conditions that must be included in the deed of sale and purchase:

• Date or time of delivery of goods
• Buyer’s personal information
• Seller’s personal data
• Information about land or houses being traded. This information includes price, location, and size of the property.
• PPAT or notary letterhead
• Matters agreed upon by both parties regarding the land purchase contract.
• Signature of both parties on the sales contract and approval on stamp duty.

How to make a sale and purchase deed

When drawing up a sale and purchase deed, it might be a bit confusing as to what to do first and what documents to prepare. Therefore, we present procedures that can be followed so that you don’t make mistakes while in the PPAT office.

1. Preparation of Various Supporting Documents

First, you need to prepare various documents required for a sales contract. Based on the identity of the seller and the buyer, it can be in the form of a KTP or KK. In addition, it must include your name, date of birth, ID number and clear address.

In addition, the procedure that must be followed is a letter of proof of interest or approval issued by the village head or sub-district head. The letter states that the party concerned controls the land or property, then will obtain a power of attorney if given this.

You must also bring a photocopy of the current year’s PBB SPPT file to match the original document. In addition, you must bring proof of payment of sales and purchase taxes, land registry documents, and proof that the subject matter of the lawsuit is inviolable.

2. PPAT office visits

The next step in making the deed is to complete the various documents mentioned above and then visit the local PPAT office. Prospective property owners must come to the office and state the purpose and purpose of their arrival.

The PPAT office then verifies legal feasibility and technical data from the old land register or land owner to the Land Agency office. If the data is good and valid, the PPAT must proceed to the next stage and wait for the process to complete.

Author: Ziaggi Fadhil Zahran

Also read the sinaumedia articles below:

Adjudication: Definition, Characteristics, Forms, and Adjudication Process

Definition and Examples of Patents and Differences with Copyrights

Definition of Administrative Law: Functions, Types, and Implementation

The Definition of Property Law and the 14 Laws That Regulate It

Definition of Customary Law According to Experts and Its Development in Indonesia

Decomposers are – In the environment and habitat of living things, every living thing has its own role and function. There are living things that have a role as producers or even eaters, there are also living things that have other roles, namely as decomposers. Living things that have a role as decomposers are also known as decomposers.

Decomposers are organisms that help in the process of decomposition or decay of organic matter in nature. They help in breaking down organic matter into simpler compounds that can be reused by plants and other animals. Some examples of decomposers include fungi, bacteria, and invertebrates such as ladybugs and earthworms. Decomposers are very important in maintaining the balance of nature and maintaining soil fertility.

Definition of Decomposer

In an ecosystem, decomposers have a very important role. They help break down unused organic matter into simpler compounds that can be reused by plants and other animals. Some examples of decomposers include fungi, bacteria, and invertebrates such as ladybugs and earthworms. They play an important role in maintaining the balance of nature and maintaining soil fertility. Then what is the definition of a decomposer?

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), decomposers are several types of organisms such as bacteria and fungi that break down organic substances or elements into simpler parts in the ecological cycle process by living from or destroying dead protoplasm. This is an important role in maintaining the balance of nature and maintaining soil fertility.

In general, decomposers are organisms that obtain energy by decomposing the remains of living things that have died. They play an important role in the sustainability of ecosystems on land and in the sea by helping to break down dead organisms into inorganic substances that can be reused by plants and other animals.

In the pattern of the food chain, there are also producers, namely organisms that produce their own food, and consumers, namely organisms that eat other organisms. Decomposers help break down dead organisms so they can be returned to the soil as nutrients essential for growth.

Through the decomposition process carried out by the decomposer, carbon dioxide gas will be produced. This gas is very useful for the photosynthesis process of plants. In addition, decomposers also help add organic compounds to the soil. Substances such as carbon, water and nitrogen will be returned to the ecosystem through decomposition activities carried out by decomposers. Thus, decomposers play an important role in maintaining the balance of nature and maintaining soil fertility.

In an ecosystem, there are three biotic components that influence and interact with each other: producers, consumers, and decomposers. Producers are organisms that are able to produce their own food through the process of photosynthesis. For example, green plants that can convert sunlight into sugar and other simple carbohydrates.

Consumers are organisms that eat plants or other animals to get energy. Consumers are divided into two levels, namely consumers I (herbivores) who eat plants, and consumers II (carnivores) who eat animals. For example, the giraffe is consumer I and the lion is consumer II. Meanwhile, decomposers are organisms that get energy by breaking down dead organisms into nutrients. For example, fungi, bacteria, and invertebrates such as ladybugs and earthworms are decomposers.

Decomposer Function

Decomposers play an important role in every ecosystem. They help break down dead organisms into organic matter that can be reused by other plants and animals. Without decomposers, dead organisms will not be broken down and recycled into nutrients that can support the growth and reproduction of other living things.

The main function of the decomposer is to decompose organic matter from dead organisms so that it can provide nutrients for other organisms. Therefore, the decomposer has several functions, including the following:

1. Serves as a chemical reagent in the soil

Decomposer organisms found in the soil play an important role in breaking down organic matter in the soil into nitrates. These nitrates are then needed by plants to grow and develop.

2. Decomposers function as decomposers of pollutants buried in the ground

Another function of decomposers is as a biological agent whose job is to clean up pollutants in the soil.

Pollutants buried in the soil will then be broken down and become materials that are harmless. The decomposition of pollutants in the soil can take place very quickly, if the activity of decomposer organisms in the soil is high.

3. Serves as a deterrent to the development of diseases that grow in the soil

Soil can be said to be in normal conditions, if there is activity in the soil of organisms and organic compounds in a high enough capacity. So that’s when the organisms in the soil manage to fight off diseases and pathogens that enter the soil.

Organisms that have been included in the category of decomposers or decomposers will naturally take advantage of the principle of biological control. That way, all other organisms that are considered disturbing will be easier and can be controlled.

4. Give effect to soil texture

Another role of the decomposer is that it can provide texture to the soil. Based on the texture, soil can be categorized into several types.

There are soils that have a fine texture, there are also soils that have a medium to coarse texture. The soil textures are also influenced by the decomposers in the soil.

5. Can affect fertility in the soil

Decomposers do not only play a role in providing texture to the soil, organisms from decomposers also have a role in being able to form soil structure and can determine the level of soil fertility.

Soil is composed of particles that are bound by one another. It is these particle binders that are formed from organic materials which are produced by decomposer organisms that live in the soil.

Organisms in the soil can also create pores which have the benefit of making the soil more friable. This will also make the process of soil aeration take place. With these two factors, it will allow various kinds of plants to thrive from all types of soil.

Apart from the five functions of the decomposer above, the decomposer also has the following functions:

• Helps break down organic matter into simpler compounds such as carbon, water and nitrogen.
• Produces carbon dioxide gas that plants need in the process of photosynthesis.
• Increase the content of organic compounds in the soil needed by plants for growth.
• Assist in managing organic waste by decomposing food scraps, garbage and other waste into simpler compounds.
• Helps maintain soil fertility by decomposing the remains of dead plants and animals so they can be returned to the soil as nutrients essential for growth.

Types and Examples of Decomposers

Decomposers are organisms found in various types of ecosystems, such as terrestrial, grassland, desert, fresh water, and marine ecosystems. Each ecosystem also has different types of decomposers, depending on the decomposers’ ability to adapt to the environment in which they live.

In general, decomposers can be grouped into four types based on their nature:

1. Microbes 

Microbes are very tiny organisms, usually invisible to the naked eye. Included in the microbial group are bacteria, fungi, protozoa, and viruses.

Bacteria are the most common microbes found in nature, especially in soil, water and air. Several types of bacteria are beneficial to humans, such as bacteria used in the fermentation process to make food, such as yogurt and cheese, as well as bacteria used in the process of making medicines. However, some types of bacteria can also cause disease, such as Salmonella and E. coli.

Fungus is also a microbe that is commonly found in nature, especially in soil and leaves. Fungi or bacteria have unique properties and function as a balancer in the environmental ecosystem.

2. Microfauna

Microfauna are very small organisms that cannot be seen with the naked eye, that live in soil, water or other environments. Organisms included in the microfauna group are bacteria, fungi, protozoa, and earthworms.

Microfauna play an important role in ecosystems, especially in breaking down organic matter into simpler compounds that can be reused by plants and other animals. Microfauna can also help control populations of pathogens (organisms that cause disease) and increase soil fertility.

Microfauna can also be an indicator of environmental quality, because the presence and abundance of microfauna can be affected by environmental conditions, such as pH, humidity and nutrient content.

3. Meiofauna

The meiofauna are organisms that are between 0.1 and 1 millimeter in size, including earthworms, nematodes, rotifers, and tardigrades. Meiofauna live in soil, water, or other environments, and play an important role in ecosystems, especially in breaking down organic matter into simpler compounds that can be reused by other plants and animals.

Meiofauna can also help control populations of pathogens (organisms that cause disease) and increase soil fertility. Meiofauna can also be an indicator of environmental quality, because the presence and abundance of meiofauna can be affected by environmental conditions, such as pH, humidity, and nutrient content.

4. Macrofauna 

Macrofauna are organisms larger than 1 millimeter, including insects, cockroaches, slugs, and lumbricus (earthworms). Macrofauna live in soil, water, or other environments, and play an important role in ecosystems, especially in breaking down organic matter into simpler compounds that can be reused by other plants and animals.

Macrofauna can also help control populations of pathogens (organisms that cause disease) and increase soil fertility. Macrofauna can also be an indicator of environmental quality, because the presence and abundance of macrofauna can be affected by environmental conditions, such as pH, humidity, and nutrient content.

Decomposer example

Based on the types of decomposers described above, there are several examples of decomposers grouped based on their ecosystem. Each ecosystem has different types of decomposers. Here’s an explanation.

 

• Decomposers in Forest Ecosystems

Forest ecosystems are ecosystems consisting of trees, grass, animals and microorganisms that are interrelated and influence one another. Forest ecosystems can consist of tropical rain forests, monsoon forests, mangrove forests, mangrove forests, brackish forests, and mountain forests.

In forest ecosystems, decomposers play an important role in breaking down the remains of dead plants and animals into nutrients that can be reused by other plants and animals. Several types of decomposers that can be found in forest ecosystems are: fungi, bacteria, slugs, slugs, earthworms.

 

• Decomposers in Polar Ecosystems

Polar ecosystems are ecosystems found in the polar regions, namely in the North Pole and South Pole. The polar ecosystem consists of plants, animals and microorganisms that have adapted to a very cold and dry climate.

The poles have very low temperatures, making it impossible for decomposers to live. However, there is one type of decomposer organism that is able to live in polar ecosystems, namely bacteria. This is because bacteria have the ability to survive in any condition or temperature.

 

• Decomposers in Desert Ecosystems

Desert ecosystems are ecosystems found in desert areas, which are dry and hot areas with very few plants and animals. Desert ecosystems consist of plants, animals and microorganisms that have adapted to a dry and hot climate.

Desert ecosystems are the opposite of arctic ecosystems. Because desert ecosystems have extreme hot temperature conditions and make it difficult for several types of decomposers or decomposers to survive in these ecosystems.

Several types of decomposers or decomposers that can survive in desert ecosystems include earthworms, bacteria, millipedes and beetles.

 

• Decomposers in Water Ecosystems

An aquatic ecosystem is an ecosystem consisting of water and the organisms that live in or around it. Water ecosystems can consist of fresh water, sea water, brackish water, underground freshwater and open water.

Water ecosystems can be grouped into several types based on depth, acidity and other physical conditions. Several types of aquatic ecosystems that are often encountered are:

• Freshwater ecosystems: Examples are lakes, swamps, rivers and ponds.
• Marine water ecosystems: Examples are shallow seas, deep seas, and outer seas.
• Brackish water ecosystems: Examples are estuaries, beaches, and mangroves.
• Underground freshwater ecosystems: An example is underground fresh water which can be found in several areas of the world.
• Open water ecosystem: An example is open water in an unprotected ocean.

Of the five types of aquatic ecosystems, decomposers or decomposers also live in aquatic ecosystems. Most types of decomposers that can live in aquatic ecosystems are bacteria.

Apart from bacteria, there are also several animals known as scavengers that live in aquatic ecosystems such as clams, worms, several types of fish, lobsters to crabs.

Thus the explanation about decomposers are decomposers that are beneficial to the environment. Find out more about decomposers or other organisms that are beneficial to the environment in various books.

Buy original and quality books at sinaumedia.com because sinaumedia is #Friends Without Limits! Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Khansa

Reference :

• https://www.geologinesia.com/2020/02/organism-decomposer.html
• https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decomposer
• https://www.seluncur.id/pengertian-dekomposer/

The declarative sentence is – Humans are social beings who live by relying on each other with a communication system. Where later the communication carried out by humans will be easier and run smoothly because of language.

In a book entitled Unity in Language (2010) by Abdul Chaer, it is explained that language is a symbol of sound that is arbitrary and used by humans as a means of communication and social interaction.

In language there are various kinds of word sequences that eventually become a sentence with meaning and purpose to be conveyed. Then, according to Henry Guntur Tarigan in the book Teaching Syntax (1984) explains if the response type sentence is expected to be divided into several types of sentences. Starting from declarative sentences, interrogative sentences and imperative sentences.

So, in this article, we will explain about declarative sentences in more depth. If you don’t really understand declarative sentences, surely the explanation in this article will be of great help to you.

Definition of Declarative Sentences in General

pixabay

Indonesian is the national language in Indonesia. Of course, the Indonesian language subject is one of the materials that will be taught from elementary school to the community. Apart from that, learning Indonesian also has many topics of discussion.

One of them is the type of sentences as well as examples of sentences that must be understood by students. For example, declarative sentence material is very important to learn.

The existence of declarative sentences is indeed one type of sentence that is often used to communicate between humans. Even though maybe you don’t really know what types of sentences are from sentences that are often used.

However, it is very important for us to know about types of sentences including declarative sentences. One of the goals is for you to be able to communicate better.

Simply put, a declarative sentence is a type of sentence that is based on the message of the discourse. That means a declarative sentence will be seen in terms of the embodied meaning which is based on the response from the reader or listener.

Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, a declarative sentence is a type of statement that is always concise and clear. Where later the existence of a declarative sentence has the aim of telling the listener about something that is known by the source or person who is speaking.

Because it has the purpose of providing information, a declarative sentence also does not require an answer from the listener or the recipient.

Definition of Declarative Sentences According to Various Experts

As previously explained, if a declarative sentence will provide some information to those who receive it. Therefore, it is not uncommon for some people to call declarative sentences as news sentences.

Various kinds of information contained in declarative sentences are actual events that did occur and of course what is conveyed to the general public is an event that actually occurred. In addition, the delivery of declarative sentences will usually contain complete, comprehensive and detailed information.

However, it is not uncommon for declarative sentences to contain the opinions of the speakers. We also encounter declarative sentences more often in everyday conversations, news on TV, radio and electronic media.

Besides being able to explain in general terms, the meaning of declarative sentences is also explained by several experts. So, to better understand how the experts think about the meaning of declarative sentences, you can read the reviews below.

1. In the Indonesian Descriptive Grammar Book: Syntax

According to the book Indonesian Descriptive Grammar: Syntax, a declarative sentence is a type of sentence that is based on the message of the discourse. That means the declarative sentence can be seen from the markup to be realized and the responses from the recipients.

2. Tika Hatika in the Indonesian Ministry of Education and Culture Module Theme 6

Tika Hatikah explained that declarative sentences in the Indonesian Language Ministry of Education and Culture Module Theme 6 are types of sentences that function to provide information or news about something. Therefore, declarative sentences usually do not require responses such as answers from those who are listeners or readers.

3. M. Ramlan

1. Ramlan has an opinion that declarative sentences usually have news intonation and do not have question words like what, who, why, where, and so on. In addition, declarative sentences also do not contain invitation sentences such as the words come on, don’t, come on, please, and so on.

Meanwhile, in terms of the intonation of the sentence, declarative sentences are usually flatter and the writing will also end with a period, so that it seems that there is no intention other than giving news or information.

4. Surono

Surono has an opinion that declarative sentences are terms of news sentences. Where the sentence can be said as a sentence that does not have special markers such as interrogative sentences or imperative sentences.

5. Alvi

According to Alwi, the meaning of a declarative sentence is a sentence which in its written form will end with a full stop and in its spoken form it will be marked with a descending tone. Declarative sentences will usually be used by the speaker or writer to make a question. Therefore, a declarative sentence will also contain news for listeners and readers.

6. Cook

According to Cook, a declarative sentence is a sentence made to convey information without expecting a specific response.

7. Forecast

Ramlan has an opinion about the meaning of a declarative sentence is a sentence that functions to tell something to other people which makes the response of the sentence a concern as reflected in the eyes that show attention.

8. Rahadi

Rahadi explained that a declarative sentence is a sentence that has the objective of providing information such as a certain event to the speech partner, both the reader and the other person who is the listener.

9. Putrayasa

Putrayasa has an opinion if a declarative sentence is a sentence that will end with a full stop and will be pronounced in an accompanying tone at the end of the sentence.

Functions of Declarative Sentences

After you know the meaning of declarative sentences in general and the understanding of experts, of course you can conclude that declarative sentences have a specific function to convey information. Both information in the form of opinions and in the form of facts can indeed be conveyed through declarative sentences.

Therefore, the function of a declarative sentence will be different from other types of sentences in Indonesian. Because, in general, declarative sentences will have functions such as providing news information whose contents are to convey several important things such as facts, statements or opinions.

With the information conveyed, readers and listeners will be able to more easily find information or an event that occurs in accordance with the facts. So, in this case the existence of a declarative sentence can help the person who carries it in the process of providing information more easily and also remains useful.

In addition, conveying information using declarative sentences can make it easier for readers and listeners to understand the information they will receive. This is because declarative sentences have been supported by the existence of a sentence structure that is in accordance with the process of conveying information.

Characteristics of Declarative Sentences

Like other types of sentences, declarative sentences also have certain characteristics. Of course, the characteristics of this declarative sentence can be its characteristics, making it different from other types of sentences.

So, for those of you who don’t know what are the characteristics of declarative sentences, you don’t need to be confused about this because the explanation below can help you understand more.

1. Has an Informative Nature

A declarative sentence is a sentence that has informative properties. Where the informative nature it has can be the most visible characteristic. This is because basically declarative sentences contain information that is conveyed to the general public, both listeners and readers.

The information that will be conveyed in a declarative sentence will be in accordance with the facts which sometimes will also be given additional opinions from the author or speaker who conveys the sentence. In addition, the information conveyed in declarative sentences can also be conveyed directly by actors or other people according to what they see from the delivery of the news.

Even so, conveying information in declarative sentences will be required to write or tell what it is if the information comes from other people or other sources. This will make declarative sentences not have a sensational nature because if this happens, it can be said that the function of the sentence will be lost.

2. The existence of non-coercive nature

The following characteristics of declarative sentences are their non-coercive nature. That means in conveying information through declarative sentences, these sentences cannot be made under coercion to other people. Both for readers and listeners who provide responses and so on, including reactions from recipients of information contained in declarative sentences.

Therefore, the recipients of the information can also express their reactions freely according to what they want. Or it could even not give any reaction to the information conveyed by the source. Because after all, declarative sentences have a function only to provide information without the need for special responses.

3. No Response Required

Previously, it has been explained that if a declarative sentence does not have a coercive nature, then the purpose of having a declarative sentence conveyed by the speaker or writer is only to provide certain information. This will make declarative sentences unnecessary to provide a response, whether in the form of an answer or opinion from the reader or listener.

This can happen because in a declarative sentence there is already information that is conveyed in a clear, straightforward and straightforward manner, so that the owner of the information only needs to convey the information and certainly does not need to demand a response from readers or listeners. Of course, you also know that declarative sentences are also referred to as news sentences which do not have the obligation to receive any response.

4. There is Neutral Information

In addition to the several characteristics described earlier, declarative sentences also have neutral or flat intonation. Although in a declarative sentence it contains information that is straightforward and firm.

However, the intonation of declarative sentences will not be made up and down. Usually, they will use a neutral or flat intonation like people speaking in general.

In the process of compiling sentences, declarative sentences usually only use full stop punctuation at the end and use commas when necessary. In declarative sentences, there are no complex punctuation marks, either question marks or exclamation points.

Thus the use of intonation will also be neutral and flat in the hope that listeners and readers can better understand the information conveyed.

5. Ends With a Period

The last characteristic of a declarative sentence is that it ends with a full stop (.). That means, declarative sentences will have a flat intonation as previously explained.

In addition, the presence of full stop punctuation can also indicate to the reader that it is not necessary to give a response when knowing the information in a declarative sentence.

Examples of Declarative Sentences

After knowing all the information about declarative sentences. Next we will try to study some examples of declarative sentences. Some of the sentences below are examples of declarative sentences quoted from various sources.

1. He is my friend. He didn’t work because he was sick.
2. There are no penguins at the North Pole. Jakarta is the capital city of Indonesia.
3. Youths from Wonorejo Village are holding a soccer league in their village field which will start next week.
4. Today, all students in Malang City go home early because of the thick fog caused by the eruption of Mount Semeru.
5. I will send a letter later by post.
6. Mother has not returned from the market since this morning.
7. Report cards will be distributed on Monday next week.
8. The increase in the price of tofu and tempeh which will start next week has forced tofu and tempeh producers to strike.
9. Maglev trains are the fastest mode of ground transportation in the world.
10. The Aceh tsunami was the biggest tsunami disaster in human history.
11. Mother cooked in the kitchen using a frying pan that I bought yesterday at the supermarket.
12. The Australian box jellyfish has venom that can kill up to 60 adults.
13. The car accident that occurred on the Cipularang toll road section claimed the lives of at least 20 more people.
14. The concert event which took place in Sumatra some time ago was forcibly stopped because it was suspected of violating health rules and protocols.
15. Until now, the BASARNAS team continues to carry out evacuation efforts due to the flood disaster that occurred in West Java.
16. Green tea contains many antioxidants which are good for preventing cancer.
17. Police are investigating the cause of the fire which engulfed the area.
18. Several people helped to lift a tree that had fallen on an arterial road in Yogyakarta due to a tornado a few minutes ago.
19. This morning there was a traffic accident due to thick fog blocking the view. The discovery of antibiotics discovered by Alexander Fleming in 1928 managed to reduce the death rate from infection.
20. Brother forgot to bring his office key even though he left 15 minutes ago.
21. The honey badger has tough but elastic skin, which allows it to easily escape from the lion’s clutches.
22. Wind power plants are the most environmentally friendly source of energy because they do not produce any gas emissions.
23. The Minister of Social Affairs arrived this morning to hand over assistance to MSMEs affected by Covid-19.

Well, those are some summaries of declarative sentence explanations. Starting from the definition of declarative sentences, their functions, characteristics, to examples of declarative sentences, there are complete explanations here. From the discussion above, it can be said that declarative sentences are sentences that contain information and end with a full stop.

If you want to find various kinds of books on grammar, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

Source:

• https://penerbitdeepublish.com/kalimat-deklarative/#Pengertian_Kalimat_Deklaratif_According to_Para_Ahli
• https://www.kompas.com/skola/read/2021/08/20/132831769/pengertian-kalimat-deklarative-dan-exemplary

Debus is – Sinaumed’s, have you ever seen Debus performing arts? The general public usually recognizes debus as a scary and sadistic attraction. This is because the players slashed themselves with machetes, chewed on broken glass or glass, even plunged into fireballs but there was not the slightest wound on their body.

Debus is a traditional art found in Banten Province which displays the attraction of the human body’s immunity from various kinds of sharp objects. The word debus comes from Arabic which means ‘ Sharp Weapon’ .

The Debus attraction does not only display immunity, but also dance and sound arts as well as mystical nuances of magic. However, it turns out that this debus is a medium used by local clerics to spread Islam in ancient times, you know .

Not everyone can do this, of course, Sinaumed’s, to be able to master the science of debus, one must have a commitment and istiqomah attitude in practicing. So, to be able to find out more about debus, you can see the article below.

History of Debus

Debus art began in the 16th century, during the reign of Maulana Hasanuddin from Banten (1532-1570) Debus began to be known by the people of Banten as a way of spreading Islam by Nurrudin Ar-Raniry, who was a Muslim leader from Tarikat al-Rifa ‘iyah by showing strength by self-mutilation while reciting prayers from the Holy Quran in an attempt to plead for salvation. Then during the reign of Sultan Ageng Tirtayasa (1651-1692), debus was used as a medium to pump up the enthusiasm of the people of Banten in the face of Dutch colonialism.

Debus art had disappeared along with the weakening of the Sultanate of Banten, which was under the rule of Sultan Rafiudin. In the 1960s the debus art reappeared and has become a means of entertainment to this day. There are also those who say that Debus comes from the Middle East, namely Al-Madad, which has some similarities. Currently, the members of the Al-Madad art group are indeed not as many as the members of the Debus art group.

The Belief and Strength of the Banten Silat Martial Art

Debus and Silat

If you hear debus, you must be very synonymous with silat, right? This was because the Debus art was revived and developed again at paguron/ hermitage/ silat studios. However, not every paguron/ hermitage/ silat studio works on debus art. Debus is a certain stage in martial arts activities. Every debus player must be a fighter, but not all fighters are debus players.

Every silat hermitage or studio is bound to belong to a particular silat school. Currently, there are at least three silat schools that are quite large in the Banten region, namely cimande, bandrong and reef schools. This style of silat colors the characteristics of the Debus arts owned by silat studios. Usually debus players can recognize the characteristics of cimande debus, bandrong debus or reef debus.

A debus studio is usually led by a professor or sheikh who is in charge of about 20 debus players, including attraction players and nayaga musicians.

Equipment for Debus Performances

To attract the attention of the audience, the person performing the attraction will use several equipments which can also support the attraction. Such as player clothing, art equipment and equipment for the debus action itself.

1. Debus clothing

In performing debus attractions, usually players will use typical debus clothing. Debus player clothing consists of a lomar or headband, shucks clothes, and pangsi pants.

2. Art Equipment

Apart from wearing clothes, debus players also use art equipment. There are two types of art equipment used to accompany Debus performances, namely:

• Drum art equipment https://sinaumedia.com/literasi/ kinds-pembangkit-listrik/ penca that is used to accompany Cimande debus. Consisting of trumpets, kanco or gongs, kemprang drums, gedur drums, and kulanter
• Patingtung art equipment used to accompany the reef debus and bandrong debus. It consists of 1 large drum, 2 small drums, a small gong, a roasted gong (made from a drum filled with water and a long iron with a convex shape at the top), kenuk, angkeb, kecrek, and trumpet. Some are also a combination of drums and tambourines.

3. Equipment Debus

Usually the equipment used is adjusted to the type of debus that will be displayed. Such as broken glass, embers, sharp weapons, wire or needles, hard water, and many others.

Types of Debus Attractions

If you talk about the types of debus attractions, there are a lot of them. However, there are several types of attractions that are commonly shown, such as:

1. Piercing the stomach with a spear or other sharp weapon without getting hurt.
2. Slice part of the body with a knife, machete or other sharp weapon.
3. Eats fireballs.
4. Inserting a needle or wire into the tongue, cheek, or other body part without bleeding.
5. Dousing the limbs with hard water until the clothes worn are destroyed but the skin remains intact.
6. Fry the eggs over the head.
7. Burn the body with fire.
8. Climbing or occupying an arrangement of machetes or sharp weapons
9. Roll over broken glass or glass
10. Chewing on glass or glass shards.
11. Peeling coconut skin with teeth
12. Lick a knife or sharp weapon that is burned
13. Hit the placed brick on the head with a wooden blade.

Debus Art Program Order

Usually debus is performed as a complement to traditional ceremonies or public entertainment. This show is ideally held in an open field so that the players can freely do their attractions. Before starting the show, the sheikh or professor will perform a special ritual that aims to ask God for help so that the debus show can run smoothly.

Then also the players made preparations and checked the equipment and the performance arena. The following is the sequence of Debus art events in general:

1. The Show Begins with the Opening (Bubbles)

Usually, salawat or chanting praises to the Prophet Muhammad will be recited, dhikr to Allah and accompanied by percussion instruments for thirty minutes. The aim is to get safety during the debus performance.

2. Baluk event

The Baluk event is an event with the chanting of the dzikir in a loud, shrill voice, resonating with the accompaniment of percussion. Debus attractions generally begin with the sound of several traditional songs (as the opening song or “bubble”).

3. Pencak Silat Game

After the dzikir and macapat are finished, the next event is carried out with a game of pencak silat which will be demonstrated by one or two players without using sharp weapons. However, it is combined with dance, sound, and mysticism with magical nuances.

4. Debus attractions

After the pencak silat game is finished, then proceed with demonstrating debus attractions according to the wishes of debus players.

5. Closing Ceremony (Gemrung)

After completing the series of attractions, it will end with the game of percussion instruments.

The value of cooperation will emanate from the efforts of Debus players. They come together to work together in order to show the best to the audience. Apart from that, the hard work to be able to play Debus can also be seen from the efforts of those who always practice continuously while carrying out certain conditions and restrictions so that their Debus skills are perfect.

Religious value is reflected in the attractions of Debus, this is due to the prayers said by the players. These prayers are recited with the aim that the debus players are always protected and receive safety from God during the debus attractions.

Martial Arts Book For Beginners

Things to do so that debus players don’t get hurt

When during the attraction of cutting the body using a sharp weapon or stabbing a sharp weapon in the area of ​​the neck, stomach, hands, arms and thighs, a person who performs debus will chant spells so that his body is immune from sharp weapons. One example of the mantra is “It is forbidden for you to touch my skin, it is forbidden for you to drink my blood, it is forbidden for you to eat my flesh, veins, iron bones, steel skin, I came out of my mother’s womb.”

In the stomach stabbing attraction like a player holding a debus, then the sharp end is attached to the stomach of another player. After that, another player holds a wooden bat called a mace and hits the base of the debus many times. If a debus player experiences an “accident” or is injured in his attraction, a sheikh will heal by rubbing the injured body part accompanied by reading a spell, then the wound will heal. it will heal in no time.

In the attraction game of eating glass or glass, the players will say the phrase “la ilaha illahu.” then what will be spit out instead of glass shards but dozens of live bats.

Facts of Mixing Traditions in Debus

In the Debus attractions, there are several mixtures of traditions in Indonesia, both Islamic traditions and local traditions. The readings sung in the series of attractions are Arabic readings originating from Islamic traditions as well as Javanese and Sundanese readings. Here are some traditions that are mixed in Debus art.

1. Islamic tradition

The intention of this Islamic tradition does not directly show that debus art is in accordance with the teachings or values ​​that exist in the Islamic religion, especially if it is assessed theologically and fiqh. However, there are also those who say and argue that debus art is in accordance with the values ​​that exist in Islam.

2. Wirids

Wirid comes from the Arabic word wird. Wirid are short prayers or formulas to praise Allah and/or praise the Prophet Muhammad.

In terms of reading it is done within a certain count and at a predetermined time and is believed to get a miracle or at least psychologically it will bring benefits.

3. Tawasul and Rabithah Shaykh

In performing debus attractions, wasilah is a must. The wasilah that is done in debus is exactly the same as that done in the tarekat tradition.

This wasilah reading aims to show a scientific genealogy, it is also an attempt to ask for help from the previous sheikhs whose intention was to be conveyed to Allah SWT.

4. Local Traditions

Local traditions in the performance of the debus art come from local sources, especially from the beliefs of the people before Islam was embraced by the majority of the people of Banten. Of course, this tradition is not found in Islamic teachings or the traditions of people in other regions.

5. Jangjawokan

Another reading that is practiced by other players is jangjawokan, which is a reading that is believed to have extraordinary power if it is practiced with full sincerity and all its provisions are followed. According to language, jangjawokan is different from wirid which uses Arabic. Janjawokan uses Javanese or Sundanese. That’s what makes it often incomprehensible even by those who practice it.

6. Accompaniment Music

Each Debus art game must be accompanied by the strains of traditional music called waditra. This music has a function as a game attraction. The music that was played was also adjusted to the attractions that were taking place at that time. Music players usually number 5 people or can be adjusted to the musical instruments used in the show. The musical instruments used are usually Banten traditional musical instruments.

Debus Streams

There are 3 streams of debus that can be learned. Here are 3 streams of debus.

1. Debus Al-Madad Stream

This flow can be said to be the heaviest debus flow. Usually the use of debus al-madad is not only shown for performing arts with debus al-madad but is also used for healing and supernatural powers. The meaning of debus al-madad itself is asking for help or help.

One of the characteristics of this debus genre is that the players, who every time they want to perform a debus art action, will ask for help by saying the words al-madad which seem to describe that their actions are based on help from Allah SWT. To be able to perform in this debus category, the group leader must perform a long and arduous practice.

The practice of the debus leader is taken from the rifa’iyah or qodariyah order. Someone who succeeds in becoming the leader of this debus group must have gone through various long journeys in practicing certain prayers and doing fasting and meditation.

2. Surosowan Debus Flow

This debus flow can be said to be not so heavy in its attractions. the players also do not require high abilities. Usually this debus flow can be done by teenagers who have been trained first. In the past, this debus flow was only carried out by men but now there are many women who do it.

As the name implies, which is synonymous with the Sultanate of Banten, the function of this Debus school is indeed only used as a performing arts in the palace.

3. Flow of Sky Dust

This debus flow can be said to be a light debus flow. The debus performance of this flow is a debus whose function is as a performing art and not to gain supernatural powers. In this debus flow, not only teenagers but children can also do it. Of course they had been trained before.

Just like debus in general, children who are targeted by sharp debus equipment will not feel pain and have no injuries after the performance.

After pencak silat was designated as an intangible cultural heritage by the United Nations Educational Scientific and Cultural Organization ( UNESCO ), now Indonesia is trying to make debus also recognized on the international stage. The goal is to unify the shared perception between debus activists.

This is because now there are many debus players who have strayed from their original path. For example, there are many places that only display terrible acts, even though the debus must be followed along with prayers.

Well, Sinaumed’s, that’s an explanation of debus and other facts. Is Sinaumed’s interested in watching Debus live? We need to be active in preserving this Indonesian art because it doesn’t exist anywhere in the world, so Indonesian art doesn’t disappear quickly.

If Sinaumed’s wants to find out more about debus or other Indonesian art books, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithMembaca information .

Author: Christin Devina

Also read:

 

Name Days in English – Sinaumed’s must have received English education when he was still at
school, be it elementary or high school. If Sinaumed’s studies these subjects
seriously, English proficiency will slowly increase.

Especially in elementary school (SD), where we are taught the use of simple English. Some of
the topics taught to elementary school children in this subject include subjects and objects,
tenses , simple vocabulary, and learning to listen and speak .

Day Names in English

Over time, your understanding and experience of the English language will increase. Currently,
we have mastered many of these lessons. However, of course this situation is different when we
learn English in elementary school.

Among a number of topics taught in elementary school, one of them is learning vocabulary in the form of
English day names. Below, are the names of the days in Indonesian, as well as their translation
in English:

• Monday = Monday
• Tuesday = Tuesday
• Wednesday = Wednesday
• Thursday = Thursday
• Friday = Friday
• Saturday = Saturday
• Sunday = Sunday

By now Sinaumed’s should be able to memorize all the English day names by rote. However,
how long did it take to finally be able to memorize the names of those days while still in elementary
school?

The process of learning, memorizing, and remembering all the English day names can take a variety of times
for each child. This can be caused by a number of factors, ranging from the child’s absorption,
teaching methods, to the environment in which children learn English.

Some of you may have been educated in a good and comfortable environment, so that you can absorb and
memorize the names of the days in English quickly. However, there are also those who may
receive less than optimal English teaching, making it difficult to remember and absorb the content of this
lesson.

Regardless of how long it takes to learn the names of the days in English, the most important thing right now is
that we should really be able to understand this topic well, and no longer experience difficulties related to
this discussion.

How to Pronounce Day Names in English

Even so, in practice there are still a number of errors related to the names of the days in English.
In addition to errors in spelling the names of the days, there are also mistakes that can be made
in pronouncing the word .

Pronunciation of words in English does sound trivial, and even considered trivial. Moreover,
as Indonesians, we are quite rarely faced with situations where we have to speak English in our daily
lives.

However, it is quite important for us to learn how to pronounce words in English properly and correctly.
This is because there are quite a number of words in English that have similar pronunciations, so
that if we say it wrong, other people can misinterpret what we say.

In the case of using the name of the day in English, for example, the word ” Tuesday “, has a pronunciation
similar to the word ” Thursday “. If Sinaumed’s just utters
these two words, it will potentially cause confusion to the other person.

Therefore, it is advisable to know how to pronounce the names of the days in English as best you can.
Below, there is an explanation regarding the pronunciation of the names of the days:

Pronunciation of “Monday”

Monday (Can be shortened to “Mon”), pronounced /’mun.dei/. The letter “O” in the
word changes to “U”. The word “Monday” is pronounced similar in both the American (US)
accent and the British (UK) accent.

Pronunciation of “Tuesday”

Tuesday (Can be shortened to “Tue” or “Tues”), pronounced /’tiu:z.dei/ in a UK accent, and
/ˈtuːz.dei/ in a US accent. The spelling of “ue” is replaced by
“iu” in a UK accent, and “u” if you have a US accent. The “T” changes slightly to “
tch ” in both accents.

Pronunciation of “Wednesday”

Wednesday (Can be shortened to “Wed”): Pronounced /’wenz.dei/ . The
spelling of “dnes” is pronounced “enz”. This pronunciation applies to both UK accents and
US accents.

Pronunciation “Thursday”

Thursday (Can be shortened to “Thur” or “Thurs”), pronounced /’thurz.dei/ .
The letter “S” changes to the letter “Z”. This pronunciation is used in both UK
and US accents.

Pronunciation of “Friday”

Friday (Can be shortened to “Fri”), pronounced /’frai.dei/ . The letter
“I” is pronounced as “ai”. The word “Friday” is pronounced similarly in a UK accent as well
as in a US accent.

Pronunciation of “Saturday”

Saturday (Can be shortened to “Sat”), pronounced /’sa.ta.dei/ . The “R”
in this word is omitted. Both the UK accent and the US accent sound similar.

Pronunciation of “Sunday”

Sunday (Can be shortened to “Sun”), pronounced /’sun.dei/ . The
pronunciation of this word is almost similar to the writing. Both the UK accent and the US
accent sound similar to one another.

Many English speakers say that the most tricky pronunciations to mention are the words ”
Tuesday ” and ” Thursday “. For the rest, the pronunciation of
other days is not that difficult. If Sinaumed’s can pronounce the 2 most
difficult words, then of course he will be able to pronounce the names of other days easily.

The key to proficiency in English, particularly in speaking, is mastery of important vocabulary and
confidence. The book ” English For Everyday Speaking,
English for Everyday Conversation, Covering 50 Interesting Topics
” can help Sinaumed’s to learn and gain confidence to
speak English.

The Origin of Name Days in English

Sinaumed’s may have heard that the names of the days in Indonesian are taken from Arabic. Except
for Friday, which has a special name, the names of the days in Indonesian are inspired by the numbers in
Arabic:

• Sunday or Sunday: Wahidun or One
• Monday: Itsnani or Two
• Tuesday: Salasatun or Three
• Wednesday: Arba’atun or Empat
• Thursday: Khamsatun or Lima
• Friday: Congregation or Gathering
• Saturday: Sab’atun or Seven

The naming of the names of these days is due to the history of Indonesia, which was once a stopover for
Arab traders, thus absorbing a lot of culture and traditions from there. In addition to the
names of the days, Indonesians in the past also used Arabic names and adopted a religion from there, namely
Islam.

If we use the same logic, English day names should come from Germanic, especially West Germanic, which is the
root of modern English.

However, in fact, the names of the days in English are inspired by the names of Gods and Goddesses from
ancient Greek mythology and ancient Roman mythology. Not only English, other languages ​​in a
number of countries on the European continent also take inspiration from these mythologies.

More precisely, they use the names of Gods and Goddesses who are also inspired to become planets, stars and
satellites in the solar system. Here is an explanation of the origin of the day’s name in
English:

Sunday (Sunday)

The naming of ” Sunday ” or “Sunday” was inspired by the sun, namely Solis. Dies Solis
can be interpreted roughly as “day of the sun” in Latin and also
“Sunnon-dagaz” in Old Germanic, which, when shortened, becomes
“Sunday”.

Mondays

Similar to ” Sunday “, ” Monday ” or “Monday” inspired by the moon aka Lunae.
Dies Lunae, which is Latin with a rough meaning of “Moon day”, was translated into Old English
as “Mon(an)dæg” , and becomes “ Monday ” in modern
English.

Tuesday (Tuesday)

” Tuesday ” or “Tuesday” is named after the Roman god of war, Mars, so that in Latin it is known as
“dies Martis”. However, the god of war in Germanic is known as “Tiu”. “
Tuesday ”, instead of using the name of a Roman mythological god, is named after this
German god, which was first known as “Tiwsday” , until it became “
Tuesday ” in modern English.

Wednesdays

Like “ Tuesday ”, “ Wednesday ” or “Wednesday” comes from the Germanic equivalent of the
Roman god “Mercury”, namely “Woden”. “ Wednesday ”, which came from the
Latin “dies Mercurii” turned into “Woden’s day” in old Germanic, finally “
Wednesday ” in modern English.

Thursday

Jupiter or Jove in Roman mythology, and Thor in Norse mythology, inspired ” Thursday ” or “Thursday”.
Both have in common, namely having full power over the sky and lightning.
Initially, ” Thursday ” came from the Latin “dies Jovis” or “Jupiter’s
day”, which then changed to “Thor’s day” in old English, and became ”
Thursday “.

Friday

” Thursday ” and ” Friday ” or “Friday” have in common, namely taking inspiration from 2
Goddesses from different mythologies, namely Venus from Greek mythology, and Frigg from Norse mythology,
who is known as the Goddess of Love. Starting from “dies Veneris” or “day of Venus” in
Latin, it eventually changed to “Frije-dagaz”
in Germanic, which was later adapted into modern English, “ Friday ”.

Saturday

“Saturday” or “Saturday” comes from the Roman mythological god Saturn. While in Greek
mythology, Saturn has a name as Cronus. The Latin for “day of Saturn” namely “dies Saturni”
became the inspiration for “Saturday” in modern English.

How to Learn English

Based on a number of explanations regarding the names of the days in English, of course, Sinaumed’s
already has knowledge of the related topic. However, maybe there are still
Sinaumed’s who don’t have confidence in speaking English, so they don’t have the courage to
apply this information in everyday life.

There is a saying “it’s never too late to learn” . For Sinaumed’s who
have never studied or have difficulty understanding English lessons at school, there’s no need to worry that
you won’t be able to speak English.

In fact, now there are many ways to learn English that can be done outside of school. Sinaumed’s only needs to
adapt these methods to the time, tools, and capabilities of each.

Of the many ways to learn English, of course it will take time if we cover all of them in one article.
Therefore, we will only discuss the most effective ways to learn English. Check out
the following discussion:

Read Anything in English

Whether it’s in the form of a novel, article, or news, Sinaumed’s can try to find reading material in
English, and try to read and understand the context of the reading. This will also force us
to study and find out more about English vocabulary.

Hear or Watch Anything in English

Similar to reading, hearing or watching something in English, being able to train Sinaumed’s to be able to
understand someone’s words and utterances in English. Sinaumed’s is also required to think quickly
about the meaning of someone’s words.

Studying the English Dictionary

This method can be said to be quite simple and old fashioned . Even so, this method is
also fairly effective for learning more vocabulary and its meaning. Sinaumed’s can use
a physical dictionary or use an electronic dictionary either from the internet or an application.

Speak English with Others

Sinaumed’s can practice speaking and listening skills at the same time by trying to speak to other people in
English. If possible, you can also look for someone who has English as the other person’s main
language, so that you can speed up your understanding of English.

Copying English from Others

The “observe, imitate and modify” method also applies to learning English. Sinaumed’s can try to learn
someone’s speaking or writing style when using English, and apply and change their style according to their
individual style and wishes.

Living Abroad or Visiting Abroad

This method may only be done by a handful of people, and can’t be done frequently. However,
this way of learning is one of the most effective ways, because like it or not, Sinaumed’s has to
adapt to the language of that country, in this case, English.

In addition to the methods above, conventional methods such as reading English textbooks and doing
English exercises are still quite effective. The book ”
Master English: Practical and Short
Ways ” is one of the books that can help
Sinaumed’s master English.

Conclusion

The names of the days in English that we learned in elementary school have a more important role than we
imagine, and cannot be underestimated. Therefore, it is important for Sinaumed’s to
try to apply this information in the real world.

Of course, this also applies to other subjects in various subjects, be it in elementary, junior high, or
high school. We never know when the knowledge we learn at that time will be useful in the
future, either through direct or indirect application.

We hope that this article can help Sinaumed’s understand topics related to day names in English, both in
terms of writing, pronunciation, and the origins of these names. Do not forget to apply and
find the courage to speak English in everyday life.

Sinaumed’s can find various types of books on the www.sinaumedia.com site to broaden
knowledge in various fields of interest. We, sinaumedia, #Friends Without Limits, always try
to present the best books for the advancement of all Sinaumed’s’ minds.

Types of da’wah – Dakwah is the process of conveying religious teachings and inviting others to accept and practice them. In Islam, da’wah refers to efforts to spread Islamic teachings and invite others to become Muslims. This preaching itself can not only be heard in mosques, but can also be heard on electronic devices.

Apart from that, it would be even better if the preaching that had been conveyed by Islamic religious leaders, we practiced in our daily lives. Talking about da’wah is certainly very broad, even the da’wah itself is divided into several types. Then, do you already know about the meaning and types of da’wah?

So, so that we know what da’wah means, you can refer to this article, Sinaumed’s.

What is Dakwah?

Broadly speaking, the meaning of da’wah in Islam is the process of providing explanations and teaching about Islamic teachings, as well as inviting others to accept and practice these teachings. Da’wah in Islam aims to spread the truth, invite people to know God Almighty, and improve the quality of human life from a spiritual and social perspective. Da’wah is also a form of amar ma’ruf nahi munkar which is an obligation for every Muslim.

In general, the notion of da’wah has something in common, namely as a process of spreading religious teachings and inviting others to accept and practice them. However, the perspectives and approaches used in preaching can vary depending on the disciplines used.

Da’wah in Islam is an attempt to convey Islamic teachings and invite others to accept and practice them. The term da’wah comes from Arabic which means “to call someone to do something” or “to convey something to someone”. In the context of Islam, da’wah refers to the process of conveying Islamic teachings and inviting people to follow them.

Da’wah in Islam is not only carried out by the Prophets and Apostles, but is also expected to be carried out by every Muslim. This is because da’wah is a shared responsibility in disseminating Islamic teachings and enforcing Islamic law.

In general, da’wah is carried out by providing an explanation of Islamic teachings and their benefits, as well as explaining a way of life that is in accordance with Islamic teachings. Da’wah can also be done by being a good role model and establishing good relations with others.

Specifically, da’wah in Islam is an attempt to convey Islamic teachings revealed by Allah SWT to mankind and invite them to accept and practice them. This includes conveying religious messages, explaining religious laws, conveying moral teachings, and inviting people to change their behavior and way of life in accordance with Islamic teachings.

In addition, da’wah is also expected to achieve awareness and understanding of true Islamic teachings and improve the quality of one’s faith. In this case, da’wah must be carried out in a good and right way, namely by being polite, wise, and respecting the differences of opinion and beliefs of others.

Dakwah is also expected to improve one’s quality of life in the spiritual and moral aspects, as well as encourage positive social change. Therefore, da’wah must also be carried out with a holistic approach, namely by paying attention to the social, economic, political and cultural conditions that exist in society.

Types of preaching

As discussed earlier, in this article, we will not only discuss the meaning of da’wah and also the types of da’wah. In the following, the types of Islamic da’wah, which are commonly used.

1. Direct preaching

Direct da’wah is the process of conveying Islamic teachings directly to individuals or community groups, either through personal contact, meetings or lectures.

2. Da’wah through the media

Da’wah through the media is the process of conveying Islamic teachings through mass media such as television, radio, newspapers and the internet.

3. Da’wah through education

Da’wah through education is the process of disseminating Islamic teachings through formal or non-formal education, such as schools, madrasas, courses, and da’wah programs.

4. Da’wah through coaching

Da’wah through coaching is the process of conveying Islamic teachings through fostering and developing the potential of individuals or community groups.

5. Da’wah through amar ma’ruf nahi munkar

Da’wah through amar ma’ruf nahi munkar, namely the process of conveying Islamic teachings through amar ma’ruf nahi munkar, namely by inviting people to do good deeds and prevent bad deeds.

6. Da’wah through social action

Da’wah through social action is the process of conveying Islamic teachings through social action that aims to improve the social welfare of the community.

All of these types of da’wah are forms of da’wah that were introduced in Islam, but basically all of them aim to convey the teachings of Islam and invite others to accept and practice them.

 

Do you understand preaching? No need to worry, through the book Walking the Way of Imam Shamsi Ali’s Dakwah; Islam and Morality , you will know more about da’wah. Imam Shamsi Ali is a figure who has very deep religious knowledge and global insight. He speaks Arabic and English very well. More than that, he understands Western culture, especially America where he developed his preaching. Get this book immediately at sinaumedia.com.

How to Do Da’wah

Sinaumed’s, so that our discussion about da’wah becomes more complete, here, we will discuss about the activity of carrying out da’wah. Basically, in doing da’wah, there are several ways that can be done. Here are some ways to do da’wah that can be used.

1. Be a role model

Before conveying da’wah, one must be a good role model by practicing Islamic teachings in everyday life.

2. Use appropriate language

Use language appropriate to the audience that will be invited to accept Islamic teachings.

3. Convey in a simple way

Convey Islamic teachings in a way that is simple and easy for the audience to understand.

4. Be a good listener

Be a good listener to input and questions raised by the audience.

5. Convey in a positive way

Convey Islamic teachings in a positive way, without discouraging the beliefs of other religions.

6. Show evidence

Show evidence that supports the Islamic teachings conveyed.

7. Deliver with patience

Convey da’wah patiently and not in a hurry, because the da’wah process requires sufficient time to be accepted by the audience.

8. Establish good relations

Establish good relations with the audience before, during and after the da’wah process.

9. Cooperate with others

Cooperate with others in carrying out da’wah, because da’wah is a shared responsibility.

10. Be polite and friendly

Be polite and friendly in conveying Islamic teachings, so that the audience feels comfortable and not intimidated.

All of the methods mentioned above are several ways that can be done in carrying out da’wah, but the best way is in a way that is appropriate to the situation and conditions at hand. So, if you want to convey da’wah, you should read the conditions or circumstances first.

Criteria for Becoming an Ideal Preacher

To become an ideal preacher, there are several conditions that must be met, including:

1. Sufficient knowledge

A preacher must have sufficient knowledge of Islamic teachings in order to convey the teachings properly and correctly.

2. Trust

A preacher must be trustworthy and responsible for the mission he carries out.

3. Be patient

A preacher must be patient in facing challenges and obstacles in the process of preaching.

4. Firm and consistent

A preacher must be firm and consistent in carrying out his da’wah and not be easily influenced by situations and the environment.

5. Do good

A preacher must do good to others and set a positive example.

6. Respect differences

A preacher must respect the differences in religion and beliefs of others.

7. Be polite

A preacher must be polite and not belittle other people in conveying Islamic teachings.

8. Be a role model

A preacher must be a good role model by practicing Islamic teachings in everyday life.

9. Establish good relations

A preacher must be able to establish good relations with others.

10. Be grateful

A preacher must always be grateful and say Alhamdulillah for the blessings received.

All of the conditions mentioned above are some of the conditions that must be met to become an ideal preacher, but basically a preacher must always improve himself and get better from time to time.

 

Do you already understand da’wah? No need to worry, through the book The Clever and Educating Da’wah Interpreter , you will learn more about da’wah. This book is perfect for serving as a guide for those who want to preach. Through this book, readers will find out that while there are many people who feel capable of preaching without learning what are the requirements for being an intelligent preacher and educating the people.

History of Da’wah in Islam

The history of da’wah in Islam begins with the birth of Prophet Muhammad SAW. At the beginning of his preaching, the Prophet Muhammad conveyed Islamic teachings in secret to his family and closest friends. However, after the sixth year of the first revelation, the Prophet Muhammad SAW began to preach publicly and invite people to accept Islamic teachings.

In the 13th year, the Prophet Muhammad and his companions left Makkah and migrated to Medina. In that year, Islamic preaching began to be carried out openly and received support from the Medina community. After migrating, the Prophet Muhammad and his companions carried out da’wah in different ways, such as direct preaching, preaching through peace treaties, preaching by force, preaching through education, and others.

After the death of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, his companions continued the preaching of Islam in the same way as the Prophet Muhammad SAW did. They spread Islamic teachings to various regions in the Middle East and North Africa, such as Egypt, Persia, Byzantium and India.

In the 7th and 8th centuries, the preaching of Islam in southern Spain and areas in Europe was carried out by preachers from Andalusia. At this time, Islamic da’wah was also carried out by preachers from India, China, and other regions in Asia. Da’wah of Islam continues until now and is carried out by various individuals and community groups throughout the world. However, at this time, Islamic da’wah was also expanded through various media and technologies such as the internet, television, radio, and others.

Preacher Figures in Islam

Famous and influential Islamic preachers in history are:

Prophet Muhammad SAW

As the main preacher in Islam, he conveyed Islamic teachings to mankind for 23 years and introduced Islam to the whole world through his preaching.

Abu Bakr As Siddiq

As the first friend and caliph after the Prophet Muhammad, he preached throughout the Arab region and expanded the Islamic realm.

Umar bin Khattab

As the second caliph after the Prophet Muhammad SAW, he carried out preaching and expanded Islamic territory to Egypt, Persia and other areas in the Middle East.

Uthman bin Affan

As the third caliph after the Prophet Muhammad SAW, he preached to areas in North Africa and strengthened his preaching in areas that had been controlled by Islam.

Ali bin Abi Talib

As the fourth caliph after the Prophet Muhammad SAW, he also carried out da’wah and expanded Islamic territory to areas in the Middle East.

Salahuddin Al Ayubi

As the leader of the Crusaders who succeeded in expelling Christian troops from Jerusalem in the 12th century, he also preached to areas controlled by Islam.

Hassan Al Banna

As the founder of the Muslim Brotherhood da’wah organization in Egypt in the 20th century, he carried out da’wah and fought for a comprehensive and thorough understanding of Islam.

Sayyid Qutb

As a Muslim intellectual and preacher in the 20th century, he wrote several books which became references for da’wah and promoted a modern and progressive understanding of Islam.

These figures are examples of influential preachers in the history of Islam, but there are many other figures who contributed to the preaching and expansion

Conclusion

The purpose of da’wah in Islam is to spread Islamic teachings and invite others to accept and practice them. The purpose of da’wah in Islam includes several things, including:

1. Conveying religious messages revealed by Allah SWT and explaining the applicable religious laws.
2. Delivering moral teachings taught in Islam and inviting people to change their behavior and way of life in accordance with Islamic teachings.
3. Achieving awareness and understanding of true Islamic teachings and improving the quality of one’s faith.
4. Improving one’s quality of life in the spiritual and moral aspects, as well as encouraging positive social change in society.
5. Unite Muslims and unify the Muslim community around the world
6. Invites mankind to follow the commands of Allah SWT and leave sinful acts.

Well, Sinaumed’s, our article regarding the meaning and types of da’wah has been completed, after knowing the meaning, types, history of da’wah, I hope all the discussion above will be useful for Sinaumed’s friends.

If sinaumedia friends are interested and want to learn more about da’wah, then sinaumedia.com is ready to accompany and fill your reading with books available at sinaumedia. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: mutual

Reference: 

• https://www.merdeka.com/jabar/pengertian-dakwah-besert-tipe-dan-kaedahnya-dalam-islam-kln.html
• https://www.detik.com/edu/detikpedia/d-5599206/pengertian-dakwah-menurut-language-dan-terms
• https://www.liputan6.com/hot/read/4769793/ kinds of-dakwah-pengertian-dan-elemen-elemennya-dalam-islam
  

Dasa Darma Paramuka – Scout is an extension of Praja Muda Karana which means young people who like to make works. Quoting from the Mandatory Scout Guide book , scouting is defined as an educational process outside the family environment in which there are interesting, directed, and regular activities carried out in the open, in order to shape character, morals, and noble character.

From this understanding, every scouting activity must be carried out in accordance with the basic scouting guidelines.

Every Scout member must understand and also understand the 10 or Dasa Dharma of Scouting, by carrying out the various contents contained in the Dasa Dharma, it is believed that each member can become a human being with noble character.

Scout Basic Principles

In language, dasa darma consists of two words, namely dasa and darma. Dasa means ten, while darma means commendable and noble deeds. In this way, the meaning of dasa dharma are ten commendable or noble actions that must be instilled and used as guidelines by each member of the scouts who act in the daily activities of their members.

Of the ten attitudes that must be possessed by scout members. Which, usually the ten attitudes are owned by a scout level raiser to top level scouts.

Dasa darma contains the moral principles that form the basis of every scout member in carrying out their duties. By practicing this dasa dharma, scout members are able to instill noble values ​​that are beneficial in the way of life.

The History of Dasa Darma Scouting

Do you already know when and who is the creator of the scout darma?

The formation of the basic scout darma was not made by one person alone, but was created based on the ideas and ideas of several people who were put together as one. Dasa Darma Pramuka has a long process and struggle from the figures in its formation. Dasa darma scouts have also changed five times.

The following is the history of the formation of Dasa Darma Scouts. Come on, see.

1. Formulation of Dasa Darma I (1961-1966)

The first Dasa Darma Pramuka was formed based on an attachment contained in Presidential Decree No. 238 of 1961. The first Dasa Darma Pramuka formulation was formed and compiled by Committee V for the Formation of the Scout Movement, then the Dasa Darma Pramuka formulation was used from 1961 to 1966. Results the first scout basic formula is:

1. Scouts can be trusted
2. Scouts are loyal
3. Scouts are polite and officers
4. Scouts are friends of fellow humans and brothers for each scout member
5. Scouts are compassionate fellow creatures
6. Scouts are ready to help and are obligated to serve
7. The Scout can carry out orders without a bridge
8. Scouts are patient and cheerful in all difficulties
9. Scouts are thrifty and careful
10. Scouts are pure in thought, word and deed

2. Formulation of Dasa Darma II (1966-1974)

Then, in 1966, the second dasa darma scout was formed, formed by the Central and Regional Mainstay Working Conference (Muker Anpuda) or what has now changed its name and is known as the National Conference (Munas). This second Dasa darma was used from 1966 to 1974.

The formulation of the results of the second Scout Darma:

1. We Indonesian Scouts, fear God Almighty
2. We are Indonesian Scouts, with the spirit of Pancasila and loyal Indonesian patriots
3. We are Indonesian Scouts, actively carrying out the mandate of the people’s suffering
4. We are Indonesian Scouts, willing to sacrifice for the justice and glory of Indonesia
5. We, Indonesian Scouts, work together to build a Pancasila society
6. We are Indonesian Scouts, trustworthy and virtuous
7. We are Indonesian Scouts, thrifty, careful and unpretentious
8. We are Indonesian Scouts, never give up in overcoming difficulties
9. We are Indonesian Scouts, fighting with a sense of responsibility and joy to be of use
10. We are Indonesian Scouts, with a chivalrous character and act in a disciplined manner

3. Formulation of Dasa Darma III (1974-1978)

Then in 1974, the dasa darma underwent another change which was made by the Bukit Tinggi National Conference, on the basis of the recommendations for changes that had been mandated in the MMP in 1970 and the National Conference in 1974. Then this dasa darma was used from 1974 to 1978.

The following contains the third formulation of Das Dharma Scout:

The Scout Dasa Darma

:

1. Piety to God Almighty
2. Compassion for fellow human beings and love for nature
3. Polite and officer patriot
4. Likes to consult and obey
5. Willing to help and steadfast
6. Diligent, carefree and skilled
7. Thrifty, careful and unpretentious
8. Discipline, loyal and brave
9. Responsible and trustworthy
10. Pure in thought, word and deed

4. Formulation of Dasa Darma IV (1978-2009)

There was a reformulation of the Scout Principles in 1978 which was marked by the issuance of a memorandum by the Scout Movement National Conference in Manado. Then, the formulation was published in the National Kwartir Decree Number 036/KN/79. The formulation of the fourth darma darma was used from 1978 to 2009. The following contains the contents of the fourth darma darma:

1. Piety to God Almighty
2. Love for nature and affection to us fellow human
3. Polite and knightly patriot
4. Compliant and likes to discuss
5. Willing to help and steadfast
6. Diligent, skilled and joyful
7. Thrifty, careful, and unpretentious
8. Discipline, brave and loyal
9. Responsible and trustworthy
10. Pure in thought, word and deed

5. Formulation of Dasa Darma V (2009-present)

Another change occurred and this is the last one as it is still in use today. The composition of the fifth Scout Darma has been compiled and included in the 2009 Scout Movement Bylaws based on the Scout Movement’s National Kwartir Decree Number 203 of 2009.

The composition of the fifth scout darma was also reaffirmed in the Bylaws of the Scout Movement for the 2012 Extraordinary National Conference (Munaslub). The following are the contents of the fifth scout darma which is still in use today:

1. Piety to God Almighty.
2. Love for nature and affection to us fellow human.
3. Polite and chivalrous patriot.
4. Compliant and likes to discuss.
5. Willing to help and steadfast.
6. Diligent, skilled and joyful.
7. Thrifty, careful and unpretentious.
8. Discipline, brave and loyal.
9. Responsible and trustworthy.
10. Pure in thought, word and deed.

Fill in the Dasa Darma of Scouting text

The last dasa darma of scouting, which is used to date, is the result of the formulation of the National Conference which produced the contents of the text of the dasa darma pramuka, namely:

Dasa Dharma, the Scout:

1. Piety to God Almighty
2. Love for nature and affection to us fellow human
3. Polite and chivalrous patriot
4. Compliant and likes to discuss
5. Willing to help and steadfast
6. Diligent skillful and happy
7. Thrifty, careful and unpretentious
8. Discipline, brave and loyal
9. Responsible and trustworthy
10. Pure in thought, word and deed.

The meaning of Dasa Darma Scouting

Every scout member is obliged to pronounce and memorize the contents of the Das Darma Scouts. Not only memorizing, each member must also be able to practice the contents of the basic Scout Dharma in their daily lives.

The cultivation of the noble values ​​of Das Darma Scouts must be present in the soul of every Scout member. The following is the meaning of each Dasa Darma Pramuka sentence.

1. Piety to God Almighty

Every scout member must have the character of piety to God and uphold his dignity as a creature of God. Scout members are also required to always carry out orders and stay away from God’s prohibitions, and can worship according to their individual beliefs. A scout must also have an attitude of tolerance between religions.

2. Love of Nature and Compassion for Fellow Humans

At this point every scout member must have the nature of love and compassion. Love and affection are shown not only to humans, but also to all living things including animals and plants. By having a sense of love and affection, it can also create a safe, comfortable, and serene environment.

3. Polite and Chivalrous Patriot

Scout members must have the characteristics of a patriot and a knight. This indicates that every scout member must have polite and courteous nature, which is a self-reflection of every scout member.

Scout members are also required to participate in maintaining the unity and integrity of the Indonesian state to create a safe and prosperous country.

4. Obedient and like deliberation

Every scout member must have an obedient attitude to every task given. In giving these assignments, members may not refuse and must be prepared to carry out any orders given.

Don’t forget, in making decisions, a scout member must be based on the principle of deliberation in order to reach consensus.

5. Willing to Help and Steadfast

Every scout member is required to have a high sense of humanity to be able to help every living being who is in trouble. In addition, in the face of every disaster or trial, scout members must be steadfast and also not give up easily.

6. Diligent, Skilled, and Happy

Scout members must have a diligent attitude to be able to carry out all their activities in everyday life. A skilled attitude is needed by every scout member which is useful for solving any problems that arise. In addition, in carrying out activities, it must be carried out cheerfully and happily without any burden from each member.

7. Save, Meticulous, and Understated

Every scout member must have a frugal nature. Every scout member also must not have the attitude of wasting everything.

8. Disciplined, Courageous and Loyal

The next Dasa Dharma is that every Scout member must have a disciplined attitude in carrying out various activities in everyday life. Scout members must also have a courageous attitude in facing every challenge and be loyal to uphold their guidelines.

9. Responsible and Trustworthy

The attitude of responsibility must be possessed by every scout member. Every scout member must be able to account for everything he has done. Scout members must also be trustworthy and not betray the trust that has been given.

10. Pure in Thoughts, Words, and Deeds

The last dasa dharma means that every scout member must have good thoughts, words and deeds. Every behavior of scout members is expected to be a role model for the whole community, that way they must keep control of various bad words, actions, and thoughts.

The Application of Dasa Dharma Scouts in Everyday Life

Each point contained in the contents of the Dadha Dharma Scouts has a different meaning and meaning, which each member must apply to their daily lives to make them better individuals.

The application of the 10 Dasa Darma Scouts can be done in various ways, such as:

1. Fear of God Almighty

By:

1. Always remember God in every activity both small and large.
2. Get used to every want to do an action must be started by praying.
3. Always obey and perform worship on time

2. Love of Nature and Compassion for Fellow Humans

By:

1. Maintain good relations with others
2. Help each other if there are difficulties
3. Maintain cleanliness by not littering.
4. Have empathy and sympathy for people.

3. Polite and Chivalrous Patriot

By:

1. Respect for elders
2. Does not differentiate people based on ethnicity, race, religion
3. Diligent in studying
4. Obey the rules

4. Obedient and like deliberation

By:

1. Obedient to parents, teachers, and mentors
2. Consult before making a decision
3. Don’t force your will on others

5. Willing to Help and Steadfast

By:

1. Likes to help parents
2. Care for others
3. Help sincerely

6. Diligent, Skilled, and Happy

By:

1. Study diligently
2. Enthusiasm in carrying out every activity
3. Never skipped school

7. Save, Meticulous, and Understated

By:

1. Think when you want to do something
2. Thorough in doing all tasks
3. Set aside money for savings

8. Disciplined, Courageous and Loyal

By:

1. Can appreciate time
2. Dare to face new challenges
3. Have high solidarity
4. Have a loyal friend

9. Responsible and Trustworthy

By:

1. Be willing to apologize if you make a mistake
2. Carry out tasks with full sense of responsibility
3. Always think before acting
4. Be wise in decision making

10. Pure in Thoughts, Words, and Deeds

By:

1. Don’t lie and always tell the truth
2. Always think positive
3. Always speak kind words.

This is an explanation of the meaning of the Dasa Darma Scouts , the history of the formation of the Dasa Darma Scouts, their meaning and how to apply the ten Dasa Darma Scouts to everyday life. Sinaumed’s can read books related to scouts so you will know #MoreWithReading. You can get these books at sinaumedia.com .

Author: Nurul Ismi Humairoh

Also read:

Dalton’s Law: History, Definition, along with the Problems and Discussion –   Dalton’s Law is one of the branches of chemistry, the study of the elements found in living and non-living things. Laws that are useful to complement existing parts of the theory are Proust’s law of fixed proportions and Lavoisier’s law of conservation of mass.

The law of fixed proportions or Proust’s law says that a compound is a combination of two elements, where the mass ratio of the elements will always be the same. For example CO and CO2 compounds. The mass ratio of both C and O is 1:2.

Meanwhile, the law of conservation of mass or Lavoiser’s law says that the ratio between the masses of substances before and after the reaction is the same. Even though the compound decomposes, it does not disappear but forms new compounds that are likely to bond with other elements.

JOHN DALTON BIOGRAPHY

Dalton’s Law is the third basic law of chemistry after Proust’s Law and Lavoiser’s Law which will be discussed specifically in the following article. Previously, let’s first get to know John Dalton as the discoverer of Dalton’s Law.

John Dalton was a physicist as well as a meteorologist who was born on September 6, 1766 in Eaglesfield, Cumberland, England and died on July 27, 1844 in Manchester, Lancashire, England.

Dalton was not born into a family that has a high social background. Dalton’s father was a weaver who came from a Quaker family (or also known as the Religious Society of Friends which was devoted to Protestants).

Dalton has two siblings, one of whom has an eye defect (color blindness) just like him.

Before discovering Dalton’s law, he worked as a teacher. When he was 12 years old, Dalton already had a job as a teacher at a Quaker School in his hometown to help support the family’s economy. He was also a farmer before returning to teaching at a Quaker school in Kendal.

At this school in Kendal, Dalton managed to get the position of headmaster. Later, Dalton also became a mathematics and philosophy tutor at New College, Manchester in 1793. Dalton also joined the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society, then began his career as a scientist there.

Initially, Dalton was researching atomic weight, then he suddenly got the idea to research compounds.

In 1802, in his book entitled “On the Proportion of the Several Gases in the Atmosphere”, Dalton wrote that “The elements that make up oxygen can be combined with a certain amount of nitrogen gas or double the number of parts, but in the absence of an intermediate quantity.

Well, it is supported by the Law of Conservation of Mass (Lavoisier’s Law) and also the Law of Fixed Comparison (Proust’s Law) which existed before. Dalton became increasingly convinced about the Law of Multiple Comparisons. In 1804, Dalton officially published his ideas about the law.

John Dalton through various studies that he conducted both qualitatively and also quantitatively, Dalton discovered various things that are still relevant today. This was obtained from the results of studying with various experts in their fields. Some of his discoveries, among others;

• Dalton’s atomic theory
• Atomic sign
• Find the cause of the rain
• Pioneer of the science of meteorology or the science of predicting the weather
• The law of double proportions in compounds
• And others

CONTENTS OF DALTON’S LAW

In the theory he put forward, Dalton mentioned several things which later became the basis for studying chemistry. The contents of Dalton’s Law, namely:

1. Sound of Dalton’s Law

“If two elements can compose or form more than one compound, then the ratio of the mass of one element in those compounds is a simple integer when the mass of the other element is kept constant.”

2. Definition of Atoms

Dalton defined that every matter consists of molecules. While the molecule itself, consists of atoms. Atom is the smallest part of matter that can not be divided anymore. If a compound can be broken down and form a new compound, it is not the case with atoms. The combination of atoms can form a molecule or compound, while atoms cannot be broken down at all.

3. Atomic Structure

In addition to making definitions of atoms, Dalton also conducted research on atomic structure. The results of Dalton’s research show that atoms have a solid spherical shape, where the edges tend to be denser when compared to the middle.

This atom consists of three charges namely, positive charge, negative charge, and also a neutral charge. From this research, then other researchers can show how molecules and compounds can be formed. Besides that, in the theory of atomic structure, Dalton also explained that each atom has a different structure from other atoms or can be referred to as “unique”. The H atom has a different structure from the C atom, and the O atom for example. This then allows people to know what is contained in a compound.

4. Compound Formation

As mentioned in the previous explanation, atoms can react with different atoms or with the same atom and form a compound. The formation of these compounds was also described by Dalton.

Dalton’s theory stated that atoms form a compound using simple spherical ratios, if one of the constituent elements is constant. Dalton’s basic law is also called the law of multiple comparisons which in theory contradicts Proust’s law of fixed comparisons.

5. Chemical Reaction

After declaring the law of multiple comparisons, Dalton also explained a chemical reaction. Chemical reactions can occur due to the separation and also the combination of atomic elements contained in a compound. In this reaction each atom is not destroyed, but combines with other atoms.

Dalton also proved that Lavoiser’s theory of conservation of mass, atoms can neither be destroyed nor created. If a new atom is discovered in the world, it does not mean that the new atom was actually just created but an atom that is only known to humans even though it has existed for a long time.

Chemistry is not the same as social sciences or physics and also the nature of biology. All theories in chemistry are indirectly related to everyday life. Therefore, chemical theory tends to be more difficult to understand.

An example of the theory of multiple comparisons, which practically means that the pressure of a mixture of a substance is the sum of the partial pressures of each substance that forms it. At a constant amount of volume, the amount of pressure will increase, so the partial pressure also increases. This also applies to the mixture of nitrogen, oxygen and pure gas used by divers. Thus, the tools used to enter the sea with higher pressure will provide information about how far the maximum depth that can be reached.

6. Dalton’s Law Restrictions

The law of multiple comparisons should be proven using simple compounds. This law does not work for non stoichiometric compounds, oligomers and polymers.

For example, carbon reacts with oxygen to form carbon dioxide (CO2) and carbon monoxide (CO). If the amount of carbon that reacts in each compound is 1 gram, then when observed in the carbon monoxide compound formed it will contain 1.33 grams of oxygen and also 2.67 grams of oxygen in the carbon dioxide compound. The mass ratio of oxygen is close to 2:1, which is a simple integer and obeys the law of multiple proportions.

7. Dalton’s Law Calculation Principles

There are two stages of determining the ratio of the mass of elements according to Dalton’s law.

1. Internal comparison

If there is a compound consisting of element A and element B with different proportions then:

If you want to determine the ratio of the mass of A to that contained in the two compounds, first determine the mass of B for each 1 gram of each compound. The trick is to divide the mass of B by the mass value of B and then divide the mass of A by the mass value of B.

If you are going to determine the mass ratio of B in the two compounds, first determine the mass of A in each 1 gram of each compound. The trick is to divide mass A by the value of mass A and then divide mass of B by the value of mass A.

2. External comparison

Because one of the elements has been made fixed, which means that the mass of one of the elements is made equal to 1 g or 1% or 1 part, the ratio of the masses of other elements can be determined from among their compounds.

The way to get the results of the comparison is to divide it by the GCF (largest common factor) or the number dividing the second mass of the element.

According to the law of multiple comparisons the arithmetic result of the external comparison will always be a simple integer. The meaning of this simple number word is of course not limited to hundreds or even more. If you get a large number, it would be better if you check it again or round it off so that you get a round and simple comparison.

8. Another Example of Applying Dalton’s Law in Counting

1. Carbon and Oxygen

Carbon and Oxygen in chemistry have two types of bonds. The first is to form carbon monoxide or CO compounds. While the second compound forms carbon dioxide or CO ₂  . Substances that are also known in everyday life as a result of the respiratory system by humans and animals.

In CO compounds, C and O have a ratio of 3: 4 and the ratio of C and O in CO ₂ compounds  is 3: 8.

Note that the amount of C in both compounds is the same. According to Dalton’s law, the ratio between the masses of O from the two compounds, namely 4: 8 or 1: 2. This corresponds to the number of O atoms in CO and CO ₂  .

2. Sulfur and Oxygen

Compounds combined between sulfur and oxygen are called sulfates and sulfites. When written in chemical formulas, namely SO ₂  and SO ₃ . The sulfur atoms present in both compounds have the same number of compounds, so that the mass ratio of O present in the two compounds is 2: 3, according to the mass whose coefficient has been shown.

3. Hydrogen and Oxygen

Hydrogen and oxygen also form two compounds that exist in nature, namely H ₂ O and also H ₂ O ₂ . The number of hydrogen atoms in the two compounds is the same so that the hydrogen atoms in both have a fixed ratio, namely 1: 2.

 

QUESTIONS AND DISCUSSION OF DALTON’S LAW

So that we can understand better, here are some examples of problems and discussion of Dalton’s law.

Soal no. 1

Carbon and hydrogen can form methane, the ratio of which is 3:1. What mass of carbon is required to react with 200 grams of H in methane?

Answer :

Comparison of C : H = 3 : 1

So, the mass of C reacting with H is 3/1 x 200 grams = 600 grams.

Soal no. 2

Nitrogen and oxygen can form NO and NO2 compounds. Under certain conditions, 2 grams of nitrogen can react with 2.28 grams of oxygen and under other conditions 2 grams of nitrogen can react with 4.56 grams of nitrogen. Explain the data information using Dalton’s law!

Answer:

In the first condition, the ratio of nitrogen and oxygen is 2 ; 2.28, while in other conditions the ratio is 2: 4.56.

Note that in both compounds, the number of atoms of nitrogen is the same, namely 2 grams. From this, it means that the ratio of oxygen present in the first condition and in the second condition is 2.28 : 4.56 = 1:2.

Soal no. 3

When there is an element of hydrogen and oxygen both of which can react to form water which is in a normal state. However, these two elements can also form hydrogen peroxide when they are in a state of high electrical energy.

Meanwhile, water contains 11.2% hydrogen and 88.8% oxygen. Meanwhile, hydrogen peroxide contains 5.93% hydrogen and 94.07% oxygen.

Answer :

In the water

For in the water alone about 11.2 grams of hydrogen which combines with 88.8 grams of oxygen. If stated according to Dalton’s law, 1.0 grams of hydrogen will combine with approximately 88.8 or 11.2 or expressed as 7.93 grams of oxygen.

Inside Hydrogen Peroxide

About 5.93 of the hydrogen combines with about 94.07 grams of oxygen. In 1.0 grams of hydrogen combined with approximately 94.07 or 5.93 or it can also be expressed with 15.9 grams of oxygen.

In hydrogen peroxide itself, the weight of oxygen for the hydrogen bond is around 15.9, or it can be said to be twice as much as the oxygen weight of the hydrogen bond that is already in the water itself.

So it can be stated that the same weight of hydrogen as the weight of oxygen in the peroxide compound is about twice the weight of oxygen in the water.

 

Sinaumed’s has certainly heard of customer service. Or maybe Sinaumed’s is interested in working as a customer service? To provide a deeper understanding, here is the definition of customer service and the duties of working as a customer service.

Definition of Customer Service

Customer service, also known as CS, is a service offered by companies to customers, either before or after buying a product or service. So, customer service is a division that plays an important role in the defense process of a company that has a direct relationship with the customer.

Even though it is often considered a trivial matter, customer service actually has many functions and roles within the company. There are two main functions for customer service, the first function is to be a leading public relations officer, and the second is to create a positive corporate culture.

Customer service can also be interpreted as direct interaction between consumers who make purchases and staff representing brands or businesses.

The goal of customer service is to provide convenience so that the experience they get in transactions becomes better in the hope of meeting their expectations. Offering good customer service is one of the main factors in the progress of a business.

The form of customer service is also increasingly diverse with the times. If in ancient times customer service was associated with the telephone, today there are many websites that offer customer service by chat. Not only that, customer service can also be done via e-mail , SMS, and even social media.

 

 

Customer Service Duties and Job Descriptions

Customer service duties and job descriptions can vary, depending on the industry and field of work. However, in general, the following are the duties and job descriptions of a customer service:

1. Recruit potential customers by recommending goods or services and explaining how the company’s products can benefit them.
2. Communicating with clients and customers about their experience using the company’s products or services.
3. Answer any questions customers may have about the company’s products and services. Help customers create new accounts and record account information in written or digital form.
4. Place orders for products or services requested by customers.
5. Listen to customer complaints in order to identify the cause of the problem. Provide appropriate responses to customer problems and try to solve them quickly and precisely. Then, submit cases to management if necessary for resolution.
6. Manage and update financial account information regularly using certain software. Anticipating customer needs, following up on previous customer complaints to offer reorders, additional services or other solutions.

The Importance of Customer Service

Here are some understandings of why a business needs customer service, namely:

1. Customer Service Presentation of Brand Image

To create a good brand image, it is not enough to only display it physically, such as packaging or social media content.

A brand or company must have a customer service team to communicate directly with its customers. Of course, the customer service team must really be trained because it has a big responsibility as a representative of the company.

With customer service, the company also knows what is needed by customers and what expectations must be met by a company or a brand.

2. Customer Service as a Sales Media

Sometimes, in some companies, customer service is also responsible for making sales to customers. When a customer calls to ask or complain about something, a customer service can use it to sell the company’s services or products if the problem from the customer has been handled properly.

A customer service generally must be able to perform additional services in selling the company’s products and services after helping customers solve their problems.

3. Customer Service Produces Happy Customers

A happy customer service team can also produce happy customers. So, the company’s main task is actually to make the customer service team happy.

This of course also has an impact on customer satisfaction. The responsibility of the customer service team can be said to be quite heavy, to serve and also to deal with complaints from customers.

By providing training to the customer service team to always be professional, this can be a solution to having a good customer service team. If everything has been achieved, the customer will also feel happy.

4. Customer Service as Public Relations

Most of the customer service division has a role as a medium to build and strengthen the company’s relationship with external parties.

Customer service can also be said to be a representative within a company in the main contact line from external parties. Companies that have good customer service will also have a good image in the eyes of externals.

In fact, if the service provided by customer service is very good, then it can help improve the relationship between the customer and the company.

5. Customer Service as Customer Loyalty

One of the factors that customers will return to purchase is from a good, responsive and solutive customer service team. Customer service can be said to be the bridge between the company and the customer.

With a pleasant experience from the customer service team, there is no reason for customers to look for other brands. Usually, customers also don’t mind a higher price if the service received is very good.

6. Customer Service Becomes a Medium for Useful Feedback for Companies or Brands

The customer service team is fully responsible for knowing all the details of the brand or company where they work. This is so they can provide solutions to customers.

With their work that is always in contact with customers, the customer service team can provide solutions to problems that customers face. Not only that, the customer service team can also provide input for brands based on data collected from customers.

That way, companies or brands can improve themselves to meet market expectations and needs.

Skills that Customer Service Must Have

Being a customer service course must have supporting skills . Here are some skills that a customer service must have:

1. Respect

Respect or respect is the very first thing in being a customer service. You have to make customers feel like someone very important and also provide service sincerely.

In simple terms, respect can also be associated with the choice of words such as: sorry, please, and thank you. Even though all customers are not always right, a customer service must be able to handle it professionally.

Criticisms given by customers can be learning materials to improve in the future.

2. Communication

The ability to communicate well when working with customers is the main skill that must be possessed by customer service. If there is miscommunication, it can make customers disappointed and frustrated with the service you provide.

3. Knowledge of the product

Customer service can be said to be successful if they have deep enough knowledge about the working procedures of a product or service for their company. Without knowing deeply about the company’s products and services, you will certainly have difficulty helping customers who are having problems.

4. Understanding

Customer service must be able to understand, identify, and anticipate needs. That’s what customer service should do. The faster the customer service team can solve problems, the customer will appreciate the customer service team and the company.

Therefore, get to know customers so they can help and provide advice and anticipate their needs. That way, customers will feel valued because companies can understand their needs and end up buying the products offered.

5. Listening

A customer service certainly has to be alert and concentrate on what the customer is saying. Don’t forget to open conversations with customers and identify the answers they make.

Listen to the words of customers, so that the customer service team can provide the best advice. If customer service is online or on a website, then use a text box that can be typed, so that customers can submit complaints, suggestions and criticisms.

6. Time management

Successful customer service must know how to solve customer problems in an efficient manner. Therefore, it requires the ability to manage time well.

When you have this ability, you must be able to recognize when you are unable to help customers so that you can direct customers to other parties who can help.

7. Responsive

The key to good customer service is being responsive with all questions and even complaints that come in. If customer service has to face customers face to face, then don’t forget to show professionalism by speaking good words.

If customer service encounters a complaint about an online product, don’t forget to reply to it a maximum of 30 minutes after the complaint arrives. Give solutions that are solutions and don’t look like robots or templates.

8. Persuasion

Sometimes customer service also has to deal with situations where it has to offer products or services to customers. In this situation good persuasion skills are needed so you can convince customers that your company’s products are worth buying.

9. Serving

Serving may be interpreted by keeping promises. For example, if the customer service team promises to provide a maximum of 60 minutes of news, the customer service team must be able to fulfill it before being billed by the customer.

With the best service from the customer service team, the company or brand will of course move forward and become increasingly known for their good service.

Tips for Providing the Best Customer Service

Working as a customer service team in a company is not alone. The customer service team will work in a team to share tasks. The bigger a company or brand, the more teams it has and the more complaints it receives.

To maximize the work of the team and maintain customer satisfaction, it turns out that the key comes from the work environment. What needs to be done by the customer service team in order to provide the best service, including:

1. Work together in teams
2. Listen and share
3. Be friendly and support each other to build empathy
4. Being honest improves empathy
5. Learn more about the product
6. On time

Customer Service Career Prospects

The following are career prospects for a customer service:

1. Entry level

A customer service will start his career at the entry-level as a customer service representative or associate. Both of them will work on the “front line” to answer questions and also respond to complaints from consumers.

There are also media used when dealing with consumers, which can be via telephone, chatbox, e-mail to social media. Even so, in general, the time needed to advance to the next level varies, depending on the company and skills possessed.

2. Mid-levels

In the mid-level stage of a customer service there are various options that can be considered.

3. Customer Service Specialists

A customer service specialist is a customer service specialist who has expertise in a product or service provided by the company. Of course, if you want to become a specialist, you need to have a good track record in customer service.

A specialist will handle cases that are more complicated or unresolved by representatives. The customer service specialist will become a reference for other team members and also prevent churn from occurring (consumers stop using a service).

4. Product Experts

Product expert is a profession that will handle abnormal cases such as major bugs, glitches, and other fatal product deficiencies that cannot be handled by a customer service representative.

If you are interested in this career choice, of course you must have extensive knowledge of a product or service from the company.

5. Developers

Developer is a career that is more classified as a career in product management.

6. Implementation Specialist

An implementation specialist is tasked with working with consumers and ensuring they get a positive experience with the products offered.

Implementation specialists will assist consumers in the onboarding process when using products and provide solutions on a per-project scale. Like product experts, implementation specialists also need to have in-depth knowledge of the product.

However, this profession needs to promote its products so that they often address consumer expectations.

7. Managerial

At this level, you will assist entire teams or departments, provide training, set goals, and improve operational efficiency. Professions at this level include:

a. Customer Success Manager

A customer success manager will work directly with consumers as partners. You will assist consumers in product onboarding, implementing the tools they have, and creating campaigns for sales and marketing.

As a customer success manager, you will follow up with consumers on a regular basis by checking progress in using the product, and acting as an advisor.

In addition, this profession ensures that consumers can optimally use the company’s products or services.

b. Customer Service Manager

One of the duties of a customer service manager is to lead the customer service team. You will recruit and train new customer service representatives and answer their questions about their jobs.

A manager will set targets for his team in accordance with the company’s vision. In general, this profession will supervise and guide the entire customer service team and will only engage in interactions with consumers when necessary.

c. Customer Service Operations Manager

Customer service operations manager is the profession responsible for the overall operations and efficiency within a company’s customer service department.

Usually, his duties include carrying out workforce management, operational procedures, interviewing and training new employees, and conducting performance reviews.

The customer service operations manager can also be responsible for the budget and be involved in strategic planning in his department.

As for what is included in strategic planning such as analyzing trends, performance, and team processes as well as making forecasts for the exclusive management section.

8. Executive-level

In the customer service career field, the executive level carries out the mission, vision and is also responsible for strategy, communication and experience.

The following are some of the professions at the executive level of customer service:

a. Chief Customer Officer (CCO)

A CCO works closely with other executives and leads the customer team in the company.

His primary responsibility is to understand the customer inside and out and represent the customer’s vision to the company’s executives.

The CCO is also tasked with creating new programs based on data in order to continue to improve the customer experience.

Not only that, CCO also ensures that the company has a customer-centric focus by building a consumer-first corporate culture.

b. Director Of Customer Experience

Director of customer experience is responsible for designing strategy, planning and executing on customer experience.

A director of customer experience must have an in-depth understanding of each team in the company’s customer service team and the customer service journey for each buyer segment.

This is so the director of customer experience can set goals based on the company’s customer experience metrics and find the help all teams need to meet those goals.

Thus the discussion about customer service, ranging from understanding to career prospects. Hopefully all of the discussion above adds to Sinaumed’s’ insight. Then, do you want to be a customer service?

If you want to deepen your knowledge of customer service, you can do it by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com .

As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Customary Norms and Examples of Customary Norms – In an effort to realize the comfort and regularity of life that we live today, society generally makes agreements about what can be done and what can’t be done. Well, what we usually call agreed upon is the norm .

In fact, formal learning about norms has started when you were in elementary school, and when you live in a non-formal society. This time we will review it again and understand more deeply about norms.

As is known, there are various norms that exist in society which are grouped based on the level of sanctions, their binding power and their sources. Of the various norms, we will discuss customary norms that are very closely related to our daily lives.

This article will discuss the meaning, characteristics, examples, functions, benefits and purposes of the existence of customary norms. Let’s start by understanding the meaning of customary norms first.

 

Definition of Norm 

According to Hadi Wiyono Isworo as one of the experts in Indonesia, revealed that norms are rules or life guidelines that are useful in providing guidance on actions that may be done, avoided or even prohibited in a society.

In addition to this understanding, norms can also be interpreted as provisions governing human behavior in becoming members of society. The formation of norms in society is based on the values ​​shared by society.

Existing norms are closely related to values, this is because norms are real forms of values ​​that are still abstract. As already explained, because norms are collective agreements that exist in society, if someone violates the norms, they will be subject to certain sanctions or punishments. The level of sanctions that are obtained by norm violators, whether they are severe or not, depends on the type of norm that is violated.

 

Definition of Customary Norms

Now, after understanding the meaning of norms, it’s time to enter into a discussion regarding one type of norm, namely customary norms. This habitual norm is included in the type of norm based on its binding power.

Based on the ability to bind community members, social norms can be grouped into several types, namely usage norms, folkways, moral norms (mores), and customs norms. In general, customary norms ( folkways ) are interpreted as norms or rules originating from traditions or customs passed down from generation to generation in a society. Habits that are carried out are interpreted as repeated actions, because basically it is done because it has a good purpose.

If you adapt from KBBI ( Big Indonesian Dictionary), customary norms consist of the words “norms” and “habits”. Norms in KBBI are defined as things that bind a member of a group in society in the form of rules or provisions.

Meanwhile, the habit in KBBI is described as a pattern that is carried out repeatedly in a form of response regarding certain situations carried out by individuals for things that are always the same.

For the combined meaning, it is concluded that

Customary norms are binding rules that are formed from a behavior that is carried out continuously and already exists and is approved by members of a community group.

Maybe because the meaning that has been explained above is too long, remember these two keywords, to understand the meaning of customary norms, namely rules and repeated behavior.

The implementation of customary norms greatly impacts daily life, especially in the current era of moral degradation. The resulting impact is clearly a good impact, if we carry out the customary norms. For example, we take an action that is included in the customary norm, say, the habit of respecting and prioritizing older people, this action causes us to be liked by many people, respected again, even loved by many people and labeled as good and moral children. Obviously things like that are highly expected for everyone ( including writers ), implementing the norms that apply at the same time can have a good impact on oneself.

If we don’t carry out these customary norms as they should, instead of getting good effects, we will actually get bad effects, such as criticism from various parties in society and most importantly we will get sanctions or punishments that apply. Understand how to distinguish between good and bad habits through the book 50 Collections of Inspirational Stories Habits of Good Children.

This impact is very bad, yes, so we must avoid it by implementing the applicable norms. This is very clear, that for members of the community who do not carry out these customary norms, they will receive sanctions or punishment.

The sanctions are in the form of criticism, ridicule, and can even be ostracized or alienated from society. Imagine if we were exiled or ostracized from society, it would be terrible, friend .

 

Characteristics of Habit Norms

• First, the action is carried out continuously or repeatedly . It is very clear for this first feature, the name is also a customary norm which means that this is done repeatedly and consciously becomes a habit that is agreed upon by the environment in society.

 

• Second, it is customary, this is usually in accordance with the values ​​that have been agreed upon in society . Norms are formed as a concrete manifestation of the values ​​that have been adopted by the community, these values ​​are usually regional in nature or in accordance with prevailing customs. In this case, norms are also a consensus in society and are usually in accordance with the customary values ​​of the people who agree with them.

 

• Third, the action is carried out in a conscious state and has a good purpose . Customary norms are generally rules that govern how people behave in a society. People who adhere to this norm, obviously consciously do so because they remember the side effects of not following this norm. In addition to keeping it away from sanctions or punishment as a manifestation of the good goals of customary norms, there is also a good goal, namely to make life order more orderly, peaceful and peaceful.

 

• Fourth, like other norms, these customary norms are binding in nature, even though they are not stated in the law . Regarding its binding characteristics, this is due to social sanctions that are ready to wait if we violate it. In addition to the social sanctions that have been waiting, the norms that are adhered to are because there has been an agreement among members of the community group. To be accepted in society, you must carry out the existing norms. This expectation of acceptance in the community environment makes community members willing to carry out existing norms.

 

• Fifth, it is mandatory to obey and if it violates it will be subject to appropriate sanctions or punishments . In fact, the fifth feature of this habitual norm is directly correlated with the fourth feature. If you violate the norms, then as a consequence of this you get sanctions or social punishment. You must have heard of the term “social sanctions are more cruel than legal sanctions”, that term has a point, or it can be said to be very true. Even today, you can get social sanctions for your bad behavior via offline and online. How scary!. So, whether we like it or not, we are required to carry out the norms that have been applied in society.

 

Examples of Habit Norms

1. take a regular bath every day,
2. respect others,
3. greeting others,
4. speak politely and politely to others,
5. Brush your teeth every day to keep your breath fresh
6. love animals and protect nature.

Seeing the example that the author wrote above, it’s very simple, isn’t it behavior that is included in the customary norms? So, don’t forget to apply it.

 Functions of Habit Norms

• First , customary norms have a function to regulate human behavior in the social environment in interacting between one human being and another in accordance with prevailing norms. 

 

• Second , customary norms are also the basis for imposing punishments or sanctions against members of the public who commit deviant behavior or do not comply with what has been agreed upon in society.

 

• Third , customary norms are able to create an orderly and regular social environment.

 

Benefits of Habit Norms in Society

• First , the benefit of customary norms is to create order, harmony, peace and regularity in society.

 

• Second , the existence of these customary norms, makes members of the community limit and control their behavior according to the norms so that they do not deviate and are subject to sanctions or punishments that apply as they should.

 

• Third , these customary norms have the benefit of minimizing disputes in society. This is because the actions they commit are limited by what is already limited by customary norms.

 

• Fourth , or the last benefit of customary norms is to assist in protecting the interests and rights of others.

 

The purpose of the existence of customary norms

Norms basically have good goals for each member who runs them, as well as the goals of customary norms. The aim is for these customary norms to become the basis, guidelines, directions, guides in carrying out daily life for members of the community, especially in their interactions with other members of the community, things like this will minimize conflicts that occur between members of the community and the emergence of a peaceful life.

The purpose of these customary norms correlates with the benefits of customary norms to create an orderly and peaceful society, this is also in terms of regulating the behavior of members of the community and giving directions in distinguishing what is right, and vice versa.

As is the case with human consumptive behavior, which cannot distinguish between wants and needs which can have an impact on the indiscriminate depletion of natural resources. With the norms of habit, humans can be more aware of it. You can read further discussion in the book Ethics and Consumption Norms in Islam.

 

The Essence of Habit Norms

Customary norms, like other norms that apply in society, are important as a reference for our lives to behave. Basically humans live in groups and in this case the group in question is society.

In human society, we need adjustments and adaptations with other humans. This process will lead to two possible endings, accepted or rejected in a society.

Norms as a concrete form of the values ​​adopted by society, become one of the tools to determine whether a human being is accepted or not in a society, including customary norms. Carrying out the customary norms whose values ​​have been mutually agreed upon by the community, will open wide the road to self-acceptance in that environment.

To carry out customary norms, it must also be understood regarding the meaning, characteristics, examples, functions, benefits, and objectives of the norms themselves. Learn how through the Positive Habit Therapy book below.

The essence of customary norms is not just applying them. Its essence is deeper than that, understanding, then applying, then understanding the consequences of all its actions, both in line and in conflict, and even deviating from the prevailing norms.

Understanding it makes us more aware of the obligations that we should have done from the start, without even having to think about the sanctions or punishments we will receive for those actions.

The existence of these customary norms is a reflection of the existence of values ​​that have been embraced by society. To find out how the attitude of members of the community in an environment, it would be better if we understand the pattern of values ​​that are believed by the local community. It is hoped that the understanding of customary norms that you have previously obtained and which has now been discussed again, is expected to make you understand more deeply about customary norms and have an impact on carrying out these customary norms better.

Therefore this in-depth discussion is very good to understand in order to better understand the essence and even the existence of the presence of customary norms that apply in society. This is done in order to create a more calm, orderly, and peaceful community environment, with members of the community who are able to limit all their behavior or words in accordance with existing customary norms.

Books Related to Habit Norms

Good Habits, Bad Habits: How to Form Good Habits to Generate Positive Change

My New Habit: Living Side by Side With Covid 19

Do you already know about the Covid 19 virus? Since the emergence of the virus, our lives must change. We are entering a period of ‘new normal’ or new normality. While waiting for the vaccine, what should we do? Don’t worry about change. As long as it’s good, let’s do it. I did too. Come on, together we live with new, better habits!

The Magic Of Habit: Imitating the Habits of World’s Successful Figures

This book reveals the unique and magical habits of successful world figures which are claimed to boost productivity. Successful figures discussed include warrant buffett, steve jobs, jeff bezoss and others. By reading this book, we can sort and choose which habits we can imitate to drive our creativity so that we can become productive individuals. In addition, this book also motivates you to become a better person so that it is easy to achieve success and happiness.

Definition of Petroleum – As seen, nature provides a variety of useful resources for the
fulfillment of everyday human needs. In human life, each resource has a different role.

The available resources range from water, soil, to fruitful plants for daily food consumption.
Petroleum is one of the mineral resources that is no less important and beneficial for human
life.

This one resource comes from various kinds of remains of marine organisms, such as plants and animals that
settle on the seabed. It takes a very long time for the process of forming petroleum.

Crude oil as an important resource has various benefits, ranging from industrial raw materials, vehicle
fuel, materials for household furniture, to beauty and health product ingredients. Some of the
benefits of which do sound foreign.

Now sinaumedia.com has summarized the origin, process of formation and some of the benefits of petroleum for
human life. Check out the full review below.

The Origin of Petroleum

Almost all activities in the world utilize resources that can be used quickly. This makes the
presence of petroleum irreplaceable. Petroleum is a resource that is needed by humans.

As the name suggests, petroleum comes from various forms of organisms that die in the ground.
A complex mixture of organic compounds consisting of hydrocarbon and non-hydrocarbon compounds from
the remains of microorganisms, plants and animals buried for millions of years is known as petroleum.

Petroleum chemical compounds consist of the elements carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, sulfur, halogenides, and
metals. Crude oil contains 50-98% hydrocarbon and non-hydrocarbon components.

Some of the organisms in question are various algae and plankton that are buried in the soil.
The process of extracting petroleum requires long and complicated stages so that excavation cannot
be done haphazardly.

Extracting petroleum with long and complicated stages requires heavy equipment. If it has been
successfully retrieved, then the next stage is the processing process which produces various forms of
different fuels.

Not all countries have the same natural resources. Some of these countries have natural wealth
that is more like petroleum. Then most countries with natural oil resources become rich and
developed countries because oil is an expensive commodity.

This makes every country struggle to find new oil resources to be utilized. Some of the
largest oil producing countries are the United States, Saudi Arabia, Russia, Canada and China.

One of the largest crude oil producing countries in the world is the United States. The
country is capable of producing 19 million barrels of oil per day, you know, Sinaumed’s.

The United States succeeded in occupying 19% of the total crude oil production in the world with that
amount. In addition, the United States as a superpower is a crude oil importing country with
the largest oil reserves in the world.

Then Saudi Arabia became one of the rich countries producing crude oil with a large enough amount.
This oil country is capable of producing around 11 million barrels of oil every day.
Quite a large number, right?

This amount makes it the second largest oil producing country in the world. This country with
two important coasts relies on petroleum as its main source of income. If crude oil sales
decrease, then the country will shake.

Furthermore, Russia is the third largest oil producing country in the world. In addition,
Russia is one of the largest natural gas producing countries which is exported to various countries.
Currently, Russia is capable of producing 11 million barrels of oil per day.

Then Canada is one of the countries that has large reserves of petroleum. This country, which
is in direct contact with the United States, is capable of producing oil with a capacity of 5 million
barrels per day. This amount is equivalent to 5% of the total oil producer in the world.

China as a country with the largest population in the world has many sources of oil reserves.
This Bamboo Curtain country is capable of producing oil with a capacity of 4 million barrels per
day. This amount is equivalent to 4% of the total oil producer in the world.

Then Indonesia as the Land of a Thousand Islands is rich in natural resources including petroleum.
Locations for oil drilling in Indonesia are located in various regions, such as Cepu, Cirebon,
Wonokromo, Aceh, Riau, Tarakan, Balikpapan and Papua.

Crude Oil Formation Process

Petroleum in liquid form turns out to have a very dark color. Sources of petroleum are usually
found underground to the bottom layer of the sea. Before knowing the benefits of petroleum,
Sinaumed’s needs to know how the process of forming petroleum. The following is the process of
forming petroleum:

1. The process begins when animals or plants are buried in the layers of the earth’s crust hundreds of millions
   of years ago.
2. Animals and plants that die buried will be carried into the layers of the earth’s crust through the movement
   of the layers of the earth’s plates.
3. Then all the remains of animals and plants that have become fossils will react with geothermal energy and
   naturally formed natural gas.
4. The process will turn the fossils into a black liquid called petroleum.

Crude oil processing is divided into two stages. In the first stage, multilevel distillation
will be carried out to separate petroleum fractions based on their boiling point. Components
with higher boiling points will form a liquid and sink to the bottom.

While the components with lower boiling points will evaporate up through the bubble cup. In
the second stage, further processing of the distillation results will occur, such as cracking ,
extraction, crystallization, and cleaning from contamination.

Benefits of Petroleum for Human Life

In human life, oil plays a very important role. Crude oil, which has become the consumption of
people throughout the world, is able to directly affect the level of the economy. Curious what
are the benefits of petroleum for human life? Come on, see the following reviews.

1. Vehicle Fuel

First, the benefits of petroleum for human life is as fuel to propel vehicles. Conventional
engines in vehicles certainly require fuel that comes from and is made from petroleum. Crude
oil must go through several refining processes to get lighter components.

After going through the refining process, petroleum will become residual fuels, such as diesel, gasoline,
benzene, and kerosene. As a fuel for land, sea and air transportation, petroleum plays an
important role for human survival.

2. Construction

Compounds from petroleum processing play an important role in producing various chemical products.
Besides being useful as a vehicle fuel, petroleum is also useful for the construction sector.
It should be noted that petroleum is one of the main ingredients in making roofs, paints, pipes,
asphalt, and so on.

3. Liquid Gas Source

Sinaumed’s can feel the benefits of petroleum which is often found in everyday life. Gas is a
daily product that we use for kitchen needs. Apart from coming from the benefits of natural
gas, liquefied gas or LPG is also obtained through the processing of petroleum. Liquefied gas
is a high-value product from petroleum sources that has been processed by special refining and refining
processes.

4. Production of Fiber Materials

Rayon, polyester, nylon, and synthetic textile materials are several types of fiber materials that use
petroleum components. Petroleum resources that have gone through various stages of processing
will produce fiber products.

The production of these fiber materials can be used for clothing-making materials. Fabrics or
textiles derived from petroleum will keep the wearer warm in winter and cool in hot weather.

5. Household Equipment

In addition to being used as a material for making cloth, petroleum plays a major role as a material for
making household items. Petroleum is needed so that household materials can be formed properly
and perfectly.

The benefits of petroleum in the manufacture of household equipment are rarely realized. Crude
oil is often used as a source of heat to process aluminum, steel and iron. Then cooking tools
as home furnishings are known to use petroleum as one of the ingredients.

Some household items, such as door locks, window locks, door panels, refrigerators and chairs involve
petroleum in their production process. So, the benefits of petroleum are present in everyday
life.

6. Mixed Materials for Medical Purposes

Petroleum turns out to be useful for medical purposes, you know, Sinaumed’s. In this case,
petroleum is often used as an ingredient in cleaning products, medicines, protective equipment, and safety
equipment for medical personnel.

When visiting hospitals, Sinaumed’s often sees medical objects that use petroleum in their production process.
For example, syringes made of plastic also need a mixture of oil to get the shape according to
specifications.

Petroleum can produce one of the basic component compounds in the production of medicines.
Aspirin as one of the production of drugs is known to contain components of petroleum
hydrocarbons.

7. Beauty Products

Crude oil turns out to be useful for making several beauty products, such as perfume, nail polish,
make-up, and hair dye. In addition, petroleum is also used as an ingredient to make
several products, ranging from soap, toothbrushes and shampoo.

Then some cosmetics use processed petroleum as a mixture in it. The use of petroleum in some
cosmetic products can create beautiful shapes and shiny colors to make users look more attractive.
The benefits of petroleum on this one are quite widely used in everyday life.

8. Making Electronic Equipment

The benefits of petroleum in the electronics field are no less important. Some electronic
equipment also requires petroleum in the manufacturing process.

Electronic equipment that is often wrapped in plastic packaging uses a mixture of oil in it.
As a material for making plastic, petroleum is often used for electronic products, such as
televisions, cell phones, computers, and various other electronic products.

9. Agriculture

It turns out that petroleum is also useful in agriculture. Various agricultural needs, such as
fertilizers, pesticides, and insecticides are made using a mixture of petroleum. Some of these
chemicals play an important role for agricultural activities so that the food products produced are of high
quality.

There is an oil content in the pesticide mixture that can make insects afraid. Pesticides are
useful for protecting plants from various pests and insects. Then agricultural fertilizers also
utilize hydrogen compounds from crude oil processing.

10. Power Station

Petroleum has benefits as a source of heat in processing or generating electricity. In
particular, the benefits of petroleum as a power plant will produce power from steam.
Furthermore, the hot steam will help drive the turbine.

Then it will be received by the magnetic coil drive to generate electricity. Crude oil can be
used as a power generator to drive electronic devices that require electricity.

• Non Biological Natural Resources
• Definition of Magnetic Force
• Biological Natural Resources
• Alternative Energy Sources
• Source of Motion Energy
• Source of Heat Energy
• Natural Mineral Resources
• Acid rain
• The process of rain
• Mosquito Life Cycle
• Frog Life Cycle
• Global warming
• The cause of flooding
• Causes of Air Pollution
• Causes of Soil Pollution
• Causes of Water Pollution
• Definition of Energy

Well, Sinaumed’s, that’s a review of the origin of petroleum, its formation process, and its benefits for
human life. Save money so that the use of petroleum as a resource can last for a long
time.

Cross Clearing – The term cross clearing may be familiar to some people. Some have heard directly from people who speak or read on social media.

In general, cross clearing is a check withdrawal by means of clearing when the withdrawing party will receive another bank check deposited through clearing on the same day. However, there are several provisions that state that cross-clearing is prohibited.

In order to understand more about the ins and outs of cross-clearing, see the explanation in the following article, come on!

Definition of Cross Clearing

If you look at the definition of cross clearing from the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), cross clearing can be interpreted as an activity of withdrawing checks through clearing at the cost of funds that are expected to be received through clearing on the same day.

In addition, clearing is also a financial trade settlement procedure in the form of correct and timely transfer of funds to sellers and securities to buyers. The aim is to facilitate transactions and guarantee security in the form of demand deposits.

Cross clearing can also be interpreted as a credit facility for customers in the form of checks or bank giro slips. This generally occurs because when clearing items are deposited, the funds are still not effective. However, the customer has withdrawn funds, causing an overdraft risk .

Purpose of Cross Clearing

In addition, cross-clearing itself has a purpose for several parties, for example, namely to facilitate transactions and guarantee the security of these transactions, thus facilitating transactions in the form of demand deposits.

Another goal is as follows.

• For central banks, cross-clearing can make it easier to find out the financial situation of a bank or transactions that occur in the community.
• For banks, cross-clearing is a form of profitable service, both for the public and for the bank itself.
• For the public, cross-clearing provides a safe and effective payment alternative.

Types of Customers Participating in Cross Clearing

There are 2 types of customers in the cross clearing system, namely:

1. Direct Customer

This type of customer is a customer who has been registered as a clearing participant, so that he or she can calculate the letter or note directly. It can be through Bank Indonesia or PT Trans Warkat as the intermediary.

2. Indirect Customers

Indirect customers are customers who have not been registered as clearing customers. However, these customers can still take part in various clearing activities through registered banks.

Cross Clearing System Applicable in Indonesia

In Indonesia alone, there are 2 clearing systems in effect, namely:

1. Manual System

Clearing using a manual system means that each customer clears manually, both in making clearing balance slips or selecting documents.

2. Semi Automation System

In this system, the implementation has been carried out automatically, such as calculating and making card balances.

What is Clearing?

In Indonesia, the clearing institution is Bank Indonesia (BI) which is officially referred to as the National Clearing Operator (PKN). In areas where there is no BI representative, clearing is carried out by Local Clearing Operators (PKL), namely banks that have obtained approval from BI as clearing operators.

Based on Bank Indonesia Regulation No.7/18/PBI/2005 dated July 22, 2005, clearing is the exchange of electronic financial documents or data between banks on behalf of both the bank and the customer whose calculation results are completed at a certain time.

In the past, resolving interbank accounts payable cases required a lot of money and also took a long time, for example because they were not located in the same area. That’s why the idea emerged to create a clearing house.

A clearing house is an organization whose job is to organize and determine various ways of settling these debts, from the time of the meeting between banks, the place of transaction, the amount of funds needed, and so on. The hope, of course, is for smoother payments and for the economy to move in a positive direction.

Then, what is the meaning of clearing itself? Clearing is a term in the world of banking and finance that refers to various activities that take place from the moment an agreement is made for a transaction until the end of the agreement.

However, the transaction in question is not just any transaction. It is called clearing only if the transaction involves demand deposits.

As BI defines, clearing is “the exchange of electronic financial documents or data (DKE) between clearing participants, both on behalf of the participants and on behalf of the participating customers whose calculations are completed at a certain time.”

Items that can be cleared are giro slips, checks, bank drafts for transfers, transfer receipts, debit notes, and credit notes. While DKE is fund transfer data in electronic format. As for what is meant as a participant is a bank.

Thus, it can also be said that the clearing house was created with the aim of increasing demand deposits and this is reasonable considering the dangers of transactions, especially those with large values, if only by relying on currency (paper and metal).

In simple terms, this clearing can be referred to as a transfer process. However, different from transfers which are usually made through ATM machines, the transfer process through clearing takes a long time, generally within 2-3 days. This is because the sending bank must first deposit funds with Bank Indonesia (BI).

Because clearing is a payment process using a mediator, the bank is required to maintain a number of balances in the form of a checking account with BI. The goal is to accommodate all deposits and withdrawals. Each transaction will result in an increase or decrease in the current account balance.

After that, then BI will send the balance to the receiving bank. However, the existence of this clearing is very important, especially for the world of trade. Krilling provides wider accommodations for customers, both individuals and companies, to be able to make large transactions, even up to IDR 99,999,999 per day.

Types of Clearing

Furthermore, in terms of its type, clearing has three types, namely:

1. General Clearing

This type of clearing is generally used to calculate bank notes. Meanwhile, the regulation of the system or the implementation process is directly supervised by Bank Indonesia, which is the party with the authority.

2. Local Clearing

Local clearing is a tool for calculating paperwork that is carried out between banks, but the provisions are still regulated by the region that has been previously determined.

3. Inter-Branch Clearing

This clearing is a way of transferring money or a means of calculating securities debts that are specifically made for banks which are generally located in a certain area. The method of implementation is to collect all calculations from a branch office.

Clearing System

Meanwhile, the implementation of the Bank Indonesia National Clearing System (SKNBI) consists of 2 types, namely:

1. Debit Clearing

This clearing is used for debit transfer purposes. The debit transfer originates from clearing or debit items, which include:

• Debit notes issued by customers registered in the clearing area.
• Debit items in the form of demand deposits and inter-regional checks.

2, Credit Clearing

Credit clearing is a credit transfer activity carried out nationally with the following conditions:

• Transfers that can be cleared are only credit transfers originating from customers in a clearing area with destinations for other customers throughout Indonesia.
• The credit transfer referred to above is cleared in the form of Credit Electronic Financial Data (DKE) in rupiah.
• Credit clearing calculations are carried out directly nationally by the National Clearing Operator (PKN).

Clearing Example

Well, then what are the examples of this clearing? Here are some of them:

1. Check
2. Transfer form
3. Debit note
4. Credit note
5. Bank money order for transfer (WBUT)
6. Transfer receipt proof letter (SBPT)
7. Other debit documents approved by BI

However, it should be noted that in its regulations, debit notes must be stated in Rupiah. In addition, delivery to Local Clearing Operators (BI work units or work units at bank offices) must be accompanied by clearing documents, the terms and types of which are regulated in a Bank Indonesia Circular Letter.

Clearing Mechanism

Initially, clearing was carried out manually. But of course over time it is considered ineffective and inefficient – ​​and therefore no longer relevant for discussion.

Clearing has now been carried out by utilizing technology, through an infrastructure called the Bank Indonesia National Clearing System (SKNBI), which no longer requires the physical exchange of banknotes. It is through the SKNBI that BI regulates all the main clearing provisions that adapt to changing times.

In this case, the clearing process is as follows:

• Bank B issues a debit note and other administrative evidence and submits it to BI
• BI will check it and forward it to Bank A
• Bank A gives approval and validation of checks
• BI will continue the transaction to Bank B and Bank B will also add to Y’s balance (or it can also be cash due to a check, it’s different from a giro which can only be transferred).
• In the last process, the current account balance of Bank A at BI has decreased, while Bank B has increased.

It should be underlined that clearing is a long process. The five stages in the previous point have been simplified. In practice, this also includes activities to create EFD, provide clearing stamps, submit clearing items to street vendors, and so on.

The same thing also happens when someone sends cash using the clearing method. The clearing process occurs when he fills out a fund transfer form at the bank. The bank will then apply for EFD to the destination bank through BI. Once approved, BI will order the destination bank to add to the balance of the owner of the destination account number.

Clearing Automation

In fact, when viewed from a business perspective, knowing the detailed clearing mechanism is something that is not too urgent. Business people certainly need to know more, for example, how to send large amounts of cash through a bank or how to make demand deposits or checks and record them in the accounting system.

However, at least by studying clearing we know that this system has many weaknesses which gradually become not ideal for business.

One thing that is most obvious is that this clearing system tends to be slow. From the explanation of the previous mechanism, it can be understood that the clearing process takes up to two to three working days. There are too many procedures to go through. Another drawback of clearing is that it is time consuming. Whatever is chosen – script or cash – ultimately requires direct physical contact with the bank.

The solution to overcome all these deadlocks is to utilize payment software technology. In this way, it can be said that the clearing process is automated.

Then about costs. The fee for using clearing is IDR 2,900 per transaction, while others even adjust it according to the amount of funds sent (the more that are sent, the greater the administration fee).

This is a complete explanation of cross-clearing, starting from the meaning, purpose, types of customers, to the cross-clearing system that applies in Indonesia. Hopefully the information in this article can add insight to You !

Definition of Creative – Today, everyone is required to always think creatively, especially in the world of work, so many people have said that in this modern era being creative is like an ability that everyone needs to have. Everyone has this creative ability, but not everyone can maximize this ability. Even though almost all activities in modern times require the ability to think creatively. So, never be lazy to hone these creative abilities.

This creative ability is a source of strength from the birth of innovation. Therefore, creative abilities are often used in the business world. In the business world, creative abilities will be used to create new products so that they remain competitive with competitors and consumers don’t feel bored. In fact, creative in the business field is also used to think about how to promote products. With this creative promotion can increase sales of a product.

Basically, we can see this creative ability in buildings, public facilities, and vehicles. These three things can exist in this world thanks to the existence of a person or group who has creative abilities. It’s inconceivable, if this creative ability didn’t exist long ago, maybe until now we haven’t been able to use a vehicle or can’t see buildings and public facilities.

Creative abilities will continue to keep up with the times. So, you must be able to adapt your creative abilities to the times in order to remain competitive with other individuals. The faster you adapt your creative abilities to the times, the faster you can compete with others.

Then, what exactly is creative? So, so that you know more about creativity and can develop creative abilities, you need to know what creativity is. This article will discuss more about creative, so watch the review until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

Creative Definition

Before discussing more about creative, we will first discuss the meaning of creative. Most people when they hear “creative” always refer to an artist and a writer. In fact, in fact, creative itself has a very broad meaning, so it cannot be aimed at an artist or a writer only. Simply put, creativity is the ability to make something.

In fact, creativity is owned by everyone, so when you see two people drawing a house it won’t always be the same. This is because the creativity possessed by each person is different. In addition, the thing that needs to be underlined from creative abilities is that creative abilities can be developed according to one’s own wishes. So, creative abilities can be acquired self-taught or honed by attending several courses.

Basically, this creative understanding can vary and is usually adapted to a field that is worked on. However, generally creative means an ability or expertise that is already owned by a person or group where they can find various kinds of innovations and can solve problems in new ways.

Therefore, someone whose creative abilities have been well honed, when there is a problem, they will definitely quickly find a solution to the problem, so that the problem can be solved properly and quickly.

Meanwhile, creative abilities related to innovation can be seen in a person or group who always finds new things that are fresher and liked by many people. Therefore, creative abilities are needed in the business world to create new products and are also needed in the creative world, be it on television or social media.

The word “creative” actually comes from English, namely To Create . To Create is an abbreviation of the words combine , reverse, eliminate, alternative, twist, elaborate . Combine is combining or merging of something with other things. Reverse means turning over, what is meant by turning over is turning over some parts.

Eliminate which means to eliminate what is meant to eliminate is to remove some parts. Alternative which means possibility, what is meant by possibility is finding another way to succeed in achieving the goal. Twist which means twisting or you could say twisting something with ties. Elaborate which means detailing or adding something.

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), creative is having creativity or having the ability to create. From the definition of KBBI, you can say that creativity is an ability to make something new. Therefore, some people say that creativity is an ability to find innovation. So, start now to hone the creative abilities that are within you.

Understanding Creative According to Experts

Some experts express the notion of creative, including:

kuper

Kuper said that creativity is a concept or method that is multiple and multidimensional in nature, so it is difficult to interpret operationally. He also said that the manifestation of creativity, such as human action, where creative abilities can create creative products.

Sternberg

Sternberg revealed that creative is someone who is able to think synthetically which means that someone can see every relationship that exists, but other people cannot see it, has the ability to analyze every idea that arises, can evaluate the value or quality of the work that has been made, can translating every theory as well as things that are abstract in nature into creative ideas, so that one person can make others believe about the ideas that have been conveyed.

Supriadi

According to Supriadi, creativity is an ability possessed by someone who is used to create something new, whether in the form of ideas or works that tend to be different from existing works. Creativity is a high-level thinking ability that indicates an escalation in thinking skills which is characterized by succession, discontinuity, differentiation, and integration between stages of development.

Sadiq

Sadiq revealed that creative is a way to bring up a new concept for the sake of progress. He also said that when creative ideas appear in your imagination, you should immediately think about them so that they can be transformed into creative ideas that can be realized.

Semian

According to Semiawan, creativity is an ability that is used to provide every new idea and is applied to solve a problem at hand.

Utami Munandar

According to Utami Munandar, creativity is an ability to create a new combination based on existing information, data, and elements.

Clark Moustakis

Clark Moustakis states that creative is an experience in actualizing and expressing an individual identity in an integrated form between oneself, others, and nature.

Creative Shape

Creativity itself has several forms, namely:

1. Idea

An idea is a creative thought that is unique and has never been thought of before. Apart from that, an idea can also be said as a thought which can produce a solution that can be used to solve the problem that is currently happening.

2. Products

Product is a creative thought that can produce a product that can be used for consumers and the product can meet consumer needs. In this case, the product can be goods or services.

3. Ideas

An idea is a creative idea that appears to solve a problem. This idea can be conveyed to others through writing or in person. Ideas conveyed through writing, such as publications, books, and so on.

Characteristics of Creative People

So, so that you can easily find out whether someone has creative abilities or not, you need to recognize creative traits. The following are characteristics of creative people, namely:

1. Like New Things or Challenges

If you see someone who really likes new things and challenges, does that mean that person has creative abilities or maybe you really like challenges? With a challenge, someone who has creative abilities will be very happy because it can increase the spirit within him.

2. Easily Bored

For someone who is able to think creatively, usually tends to get bored easily because he really likes new things around him. Therefore, creative people will always find fresher creative ideas and can turn them into goods or services.

3. Very happy to imagine

Someone who really likes to imagine has a tendency if he has good creative abilities. This is because imagination can hone creative thinking, even creative thinking can be realized. Usually the right brain of a person who often imagines is more dominant than his left brain. Therefore, someone who likes to imagine is also often known as a dreamer who can make his imagination come true.

4. His Behavior Changes Quickly

Someone who is able to think creatively, his behavior changes very quickly or you could say that the change in behavior is caused by a change in his mood . Therefore, the personality of a creative person will be difficult to predict. In addition, creative people have a fairly high sense of empathy.

5. Easy to Adapt

Someone who is able to think creatively will adapt very quickly, especially in creating ideas or ideas to create new things. In addition, this adaptability can be used to solve a problem quickly and precisely.

How to Develop Creative

It feels like something is missing when discussing the meaning of creative, but not discussing how to develop creative. The following are ways or steps to develop creative abilities.

1. Observing A Things Around

Observing various things around you by using all the senses you have. Observations made with the sensory organs will maximally train yourself in sharpening your memory. Sharpened memory will improve creative abilities, so creative ideas will always emerge.

In this case, the things observed can be anything from things you like to things that are new. The more you make observations with your senses, the more trained your senses will be which will influence the creative ideas that will be realized.

2. Often Imagination

It is common for everyone that imagination is something that can hone thinking skills. Thinking skills that are increasingly honed will bring up more creative ideas. even the importance of imagination was once expressed by Albert Einstein, “imagination is more important than knowledge”.

Basically, this imagination can be obtained from anywhere and at any time depending on each individual. However, generally imagination can arise when someone is imagining, contemplating, and looking for ways to improve a thing or work. So, never stop imagining.

3. Always Use an Out of The Box Mindset

As previously discussed, creativity is the source of innovation. Therefore, in order for creative abilities to develop, you need to use a different mindset in dealing with problems and in creating a product or work.

An out of the box mindset can actually be honed, so it’s up to each individual, whether you want to hone a different mindset in general or keep using a mindset that is already widely used by many people.

4. Always Trying to Do Something New

The next step for creative development is always trying to do something new. Basically it doesn’t always have to be something new, it can also be things that are rarely done by other people. By doing this, you will get used to finding creative ideas that can be realized, be it for yourself or for industry or company needs.

5. Adding Insights

In developing creative abilities, adding insight is very important because the more insight you have, the easier it will be to find creative ideas and the easier it will be to make them happen. In general, adding insight is obtained by reading books. However, over time, adding insight can be done through online articles , social media, exhibitions, going abroad, and so on.

6. Discipline

All steps to develop creative abilities, if not followed by disciplined behavior will be in vain. This is because disciplined behavior will make you accustomed to doing things in an orderly manner. In addition, this disciplined behavior can create new creative ideas, so you won’t worry about running out of creative ideas. Discipline behavior, should have been done since childhood so that when adults are accustomed to implementing disciplinary behavior.

7. Always Try To Take Notes

The last step that needs to be done to develop creative abilities is to always try to take notes. This is best done when realizing creative ideas. Apart from that, taking notes is also useful for evaluating what are the shortcomings of the creative ideas that are realized. These note-taking activities can be done in books, cell phones , and so on.

Creative Example

Basically, examples of creative behavior abound. Below will be given some examples of creative actions, namely:

1. Changing items that are not used (used) into items that can be used. For example, turning plastic bottles into pots.

2. Creating new products that are new or rarely used by many people. For example, building your own business.

3. Make a film scenario, be it a film for television, cinema or streaming media .

4. Turning waste into organic fertilizer.

Conclusion

Creativity is an ability that everyone already has to create new things or products and also use them to find solutions to existing problems. Even though creative abilities have existed since childhood, not everyone wants to hone those skills. Therefore, so that creative abilities never run out, one must have a strong desire to hone these abilities.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source: From various sources

Coulomb’s Law – Has Sinaumed’s ever seen a phenomenon when we bring the ends of a battery closer but cannot attach the two ends?

If so, Sinaumed’s is directly observing the phenomena of electrostatics. This phenomenon can occur because the tip of the battery has a positive (+) and negative (-) electric charge. When we bring the end that has a positive charge closer to the end that also has a positive charge, the two batteries seem to refuse to stick. However, if the end that has a positive charge is brought close to the end that has a negative charge, it will easily stick together.

This electrostatic phenomenon will then be discussed in more depth through a law called Coulomb’s law.

History of Coulomb’s Law

Coulomb’s law was first put forward by a French physicist, namely Charles Augustin de Coulomb in the 1780s. At first the development of this law actually started in 600 BC. It all started with the discovery of the theory of static electricity. Then, the theory continues to be developed by other scientists.

In 1600, a British scientist named William Gilbert conducted a study on static electricity which was used to distinguish it from the effects of magnetic stones. From William Gilbert’s research, the word electric was found   in electricity terms.

Then in the 18th century, two scientists from Italy, namely Daniel Bernoulli and Alessandro Volta conducted an experiment to measure the force between the plates of a capacitor to find out whether the electric force decreases with distance and is affected by the force of gravity. Besides that, Franz Aepinus also discovered the inverse square law in 1758.

After that there were also experiments conducted by scientists from England, namely Joseph Priestley. Joseph Priestley conducted experiments on balls that had an electric charge. He proposed that the electric force followed an inverse square law, but he did not go into detail and simply assumed that the force between charges varies as the inverse square of the distance.

Then, the climax was research conducted by Charles Augustin de Coulomb in 1785. In this research, Coulomb conducted experiments using a torsion balance which is useful for knowing the magnitude of the force acting on two objects that have an electric charge.

As a result, Coulomb got the result, namely the theory of static electricity which was eventually named Coulomb’s Law. Apart from being enshrined as a legal name, the name Coulomb is also enshrined as a unit of electric charge, namely Coulomb (C).

Definition of Coulomb’s Law

Coulomb’s law is basically a law that explains the relationships that exist in electric charges. As is well known, that electric charge is divided into two types, namely positive charge and negative charge.

This law describes the condition when two electric charges with a certain distance interact with each other and exert an attractive or repulsive force. One of the factors that influence the magnitude of the Coulomb’s law force itself is the magnitude of the object’s electric charge.

An attractive force will occur when dissimilar electric charges (+-) meet, while a repulsive force will occur when similar electric charges (++/–) meet each other.

Coulomb’s law actually has similarities with the leading law of gravity that has been put forward by Isaac Newton. The equation lies in the inverse square ratio. While the difference is the force produced, where the gravitational force only occurs attraction, while the electric force is not only an attractive force but also a repulsive force.

Coulomb’s law sounds

Based on research conducted by Charles Auguste de Coulomb. So the conclusion appears that the sound of Coulomb’s Law is:

“If there are two electrically charged objects it will cause a force between them, namely attraction or repulsion, the magnitude will be directly proportional to the product of the values ​​of the two charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the two objects.”

As previously explained, when two similar charges are brought closer they will cause mutual repulsion, whereas if there are two different charges if they are brought closer they will cause mutual attraction and can stick. These two forces are called electrostatic forces.

Application in Everyday Life

A simple example that Sinaumed’s can see in everyday life is the effect that occurs when two ends of a magnet are brought closer to each other. If the side of the magnet that has a negative charge is brought close to the side of another magnet that has a positive charge, or iron which has a positive charge, then the magnet will stick, and vice versa if the side of the magnet that is negatively charged is brought close to the side of the magnet which is also negatively charged, rejection will occur. .

Another example is the application of lightning rods which are usually in various homes. The workings of lightning rods generally have a positive charge. So that when there is lightning that has a negative charge, the lightning rod will catch the lightning and then flow it to the ground using a conductor cable and make the lightning flow not enter into the electricity that is in the house.

Coulomb’s Law Formula

From the statement expressed by Charles Auguste de Coulomb, the mathematical formula used to determine the magnitude of the Coulomb force appears, which is as follows:

Information:

F : Gaya Coulomb (N)

K : Coulomb constant ( 9×109 Nm2/C2)

q1 : Mass of object 1 (C)

q2 : Amount of charge of object 2 (C)

r : Distance between charges (m)

Coulomb (C) unit size

1 micro coulomb (µC) = 1×10-6 C

1 nano coulomb (nC) = 1×10-9 C

1 coulomb = 1 coulomb (C)

From this formula it can be concluded that the coulomb constant value will depend on the unit selected.

Thus, it can be interpreted that the farther the distance between the two charges will cause the electric force that is also smaller. Conversely, if the distance between the two charges is close, it will cause the electric force to become even greater.

Problems example 

Example question number 1

It is known that two magnets each have an electric charge of 4 C and 2 C and the two magnets are 3 meters apart. Then determine how many coulomb forces occur from the two charges!

Answer:

Is known:

F : ?

K : 9×109 Nm2/C2

q1 : 4 C

q2 : 2 C

r : 3 meter

Then the coulomb force resulting from the two electric charges is 8 × 109 N.

Two pieces of iron each have an electric charge of 4 × 10-6 C and 6 × 10-6 C and have a distance of 2 cm. Determine how many coulomb forces are generated by the two irons!

Answer:

F : ?

K : 9×109 Nm2/C2

q1 : 4×10-6 C

q2 : 6×10-6 C

r : 2 cm = 0,02 m

109

So the coulomb force found on the two objects is 540 N.

Example question number 2

Two pieces of iron have electric charges of 10 micro coulombs (µC) and 50 micro coulombs (µC) respectively. When the distance between the two charged irons is 10 cm. How much coulomb force arises from the two electrically charged irons?

Answer:

F : ?

K : 9×109 Nm2/C2

q1 : 10 µC = 10×10-6 C

q2 : 50 µç = 50×10-6 C

r : 10 cm = 0,1 m

Then the coulomb force generated from the two irons is 450 N.

Example question number 3

Two objects have charges of 3×10 ^-6  C and 6 x 10 ^-6 C. The distance between them is 3 cm. How big is the electric force on each charge?

Is known

Q₁ =  3×10^-6 C

Q₂ =  6 x 10^-6C

r = 3 cm = 3 x 10^-2 m

k = 9 x 10⁹ Nm²/C²

Solution

F_c =  k(q₁q₂/r²)

F_c = 9 x 10⁹ (3×10^-6 C x 6 x 10^-6C)/9 x 10^-4

F_c = 9 x 10⁹ ( 18 x 10^-12)/ 9 x 10^-4

F_c = 1,8 x 10² N

Example question number 4

When 2 like charges have a charge size of 5 x 10 ^-4 C and 5 x10 ^-4 C. The 2 charges are separated by a distance of 5 cm. then how big is the coulomb force generated? (k = 9 x 10 ⁹ Nm ² /C ² )

Is known

Q₁ =  5 x 10^-4C

Q₂ =  5 x 10^-4C

r = 5 cm = 5 x 10^-2 m

k = 9 x 10⁹ Nm²/C²

Solution

F_c =  k(q₁q₂/r²)

F_c = 9 x 10⁹ (5 x 10^-4C x 5 x 10^-4C)/25 x 10^-4

F_c = 9 x 10⁹ (25 x 110^-8)/ 25 x 10^-4

F_c = 9 x 10⁵ N

Example question number 5

Look at the picture below. The magnitude of the electric force acting on the charge is 27 Newton. If it is known that the charge at B is +6 micro Coulomb, calculate how many micro Coulomb the charge is at point C.( k = 9 x 109N m2/C2 and 1 micro Coulomb = 10−6 C)?

Discussion

Is known:

q1= Charge at Point B = +6 µC = +6×10−6 Coulomb

k = 9 x 109N m2/C2

r = 10  cm = 0,1 m

F=27 Newtons

Asked:

q2= Charge at Point C

Answer:

For:

27 = (9🗙 109 ) 🗙 (6×10−6) 🗙 (q2 🗙10−6 )

______________________________

(0,1)²

(q2) =27 🗙 (0,1)²

__________

(9 🗙109) 🗙 (6🗙10-12)

(q2 )=Charge at Point C= – 5 micro Coulomb

The charge at Point C is – 5 micro Coulombs

Example question number 6

The charge on object A is +8 micro Coulomb and the charge on object B is -10 micro Coulomb. The magnitude of the electric force acting on the two charges is 18 Newton if it is known that 9 x 109N m2/C2 and 1 micro Coulomb = 10−6 C, calculate the distance between the charges!

Discussion

Is known:

q1= Charge at Point A = +8 µC = +8×10−6 Coulomb

q2= Charge at Point B = -10 µC = -10×10−6 Coulomb

k = 9 x 109N m2/C2

F= 18 Newtons

Asked:

Distance between loads (r) ?

Answer:

18=  (9 🗙 109 ) 🗙 (8🗙10−6 ) 🗙 (10🗙10−6 )

______________________________

r²

r²=(9 🗙 109 ) 🗙 (8🗙10−6 ) 🗙 (10🗙10−6 )

______________________________

18

r²=0,04

r= 0,2 m= 20 cm

So, the distance between the charges is 20 cm

Example question number 7

It is known that two fruits have an electric charge A = +15 micro Coulomb and an electric charge B = +10 micro coloumb separated by a distance as shown below. Determine the magnitude of the coloumb force acting on the two charges?( k = 9 x 109N m2/C2 and 1 micro Coulomb = 10−6 C)

Discussion

Is known:

q1= Charge at Point A = +15 µC = +15×10−6 Coulomb

q2= Charge at Point B = +10 µC = +10×10−6 Coulomb

k = 9 x 109N m2/C2

r = 10  cm = 0,1 m

Asked:

The magnitude of the electric force (F) acting on the charge

Answer:

F=  (9 🗙 109) 🗙 (15🗙10−6 ) 🗙 (10🗙10−6 )

______________________________

0,1²

F= 135 Newtons

The magnitude of the electric force (F) acting on the charge is 135 Newton

Example question number 8

It is known that two electric charges E = -10 micro Coulomb and an electric charge F = -15 micro coloumb are separated by a distance as shown below. Determine the magnitude of the coloumb force acting on the two charges (k = 9 x 109N m2/C2 and 1 micro Coulomb = 10−6 C)

Discussion

Is known:

q1= Charge at Point E = -10 µC = +10×10−6 Coulomb

q2= Charge at Point F = -15 µC = -15×10−6 Coulomb

k = 9 x 109N m2/C2

r = 10  cm = 0,1 m

Asked:

The magnitude of the electric force (F) acting on the charge

Answer:

F=  (9 🗙 109 ) 🗙 (10🗙10−6 ) 🗙 (15🗙10−6 )

______________________________

0,1²

F= 135 Newtons

The magnitude of the electric force (F) acting on the charge is 135 Newton

Example question number 9

It is known that there are three electric charges placed separately as shown! The magnitude of the charge P is = -4 micro Coulomb, the magnitude of the charge Q is = +10 micro Coulomb and the charge R = -12 micro Coulomb. Determine the magnitude and direction of the electric force on the charge Q when ( k = 9 x 109N m2/C2 and 1 micro Coulomb = 10−6 C) ?

Discussion

Is known:

qP= Charge at Point P = -4 µC = -4× 10−6 Coulomb

qQ= Charge at Point Q = +10 µC = +10× 10−6 Coulomb

qR= Charge at Point R = -12 µC = -12× 10−6 Coulomb

k = 9 x 109N m2/C2

rPQ = 6 cm = 0,06 m

rQR = 4 cm = 0,04 m

Asked:

magnitude and direction of the electric force on the charge Q

Answer:

It should be remembered that the electric force on the charge Q is the resultant electric force between the charges P and Q with the electric force between the charges Q and R

The magnitude of the electric force (FPQ) of the P and Q charges:

F=  (9 🗙 109 ) 🗙 (4🗙10−6 ) 🗙 (10🗙10−6 )

______________________________

0,06²

F= 100 Newtons

(The direction of charge goes out from + and in to -)

So, the charge P is negative and the charge Q is positive so that the direction of the Coulomb force is towards the charge P and away from the charge Q (to the left).

The magnitude of the electric force (FQR) of the charges Q and R:

F=  (9 🗙 109 ) 🗙 (10🗙10−6 ) 🗙 (12🗙10−6 )

______________________________

0,04²

F= 675 Newtons

(The direction of charge goes out from + and in to -)

The charge Q is positive and the charge R is negative so that the direction of the Coulomb force is towards the charge R and away from the charge Q (to the right).

The resultant electric force on the charge Q :

The FPQ direction is to the left and the FQR direction is to the right.

FQ= FQR– FPQ = 675 N – 100 N = 575 Newtons.

The direction of the resultant electric force on the charge Q (FQ) = the direction of the electric force FQR, namely towards the charge R (to the right) with a value of 575 Newton

•  

Corporate Agent – Corporate agent alias corporate agent is a bank that provides services in the form of an agent role to companies and/or government agencies. Meanwhile, this service can be in the form of paying dividends or interest, clearing, redemption and registration of shares, to tax collection. The bank will charge a fee for the services that have been provided. For more details, this article will discuss further about corporate agents.

Definition of Corporate Agent

A type of corporate trust that acts on behalf of some form of government or corporate entity is a corporate agency. These agents provide a wide range of banking services to their corporate clients, from clearing checks, paying interest and dividends, to purchasing and redemption of shares. In addition, they can also collect taxes on behalf of the government agency, Sinaumed’s.

Government agencies or companies that use the services of this bank will later pay a fee. Usually, the bank has set its own price for being a corporate agent.

When taken from the word, corporate agent consists of two words: agent and corporative. The meaning of both is continuous, here is the full explanation:

According to economic terms, an agent is a business entity or someone who is trusted to represent or can act on behalf of another body or someone who has a good relationship with the person being represented. In some activities, the bank can also act as a corporate agent, such as a trustee or custodian.

On the other hand, KBBI states that corporate is cooperative. Thus, a corporate agent is a bank that acts or is appointed on its behalf to provide services, serve and assist or manage government finances.

Moreover, a corporate agency can be said to be a type of trust company. They act on behalf of government agencies or some companies.

A trust company is itself a legal entity that acts as an agent, fiduciary, or trustee on behalf of another body or person. Usually, corporations use corporatist agents to facilitate things. For example, asset management, guardianship and plantation, banking needs as a whole, to the transfer of shares.

It is possible for companies to outsource certain tasks by having a corporate agent. So, they are free to utilize internal resources related to the core business efficiently.

Meanwhile, corporate agents are also in the form of most of the banks that have a special function of the company to manage and run. There is no free will for a corporate agent to make all the decisions alone.

Corporate Agent Services

As before, corporate agents have service functions, including:

1. clearing
2. Payment of dividends or interest
3. Stock redemption and registration
4. Collection of taxes on behalf of the government

Advantages of Using Corporate Agent Services

There are far more advantages in corporate agents than just commercial banks. This is because corporate agents are also banks that are integrated with the government.

One of the advantages of using this service is that banks have more stable interest rates on loans. Often times, other banks provide interest according to fluctuations in the business cycle.

The Role of Corporate Agents

There is an important role for corporate agents in companies or governments, especially in the efficient management of resources. With this agency, governments or companies can spend time managing business rather than administrative tasks.

Not only that, company or government costs can also be more economical with corporate agents because they use professional human resources from banks to handle certain administrative tasks. The government or companies also do not need to pay more salaries for it.

Responsibilities of Corporate Agents

Implicitly, it has been explained that a corporate agent is a trusted company which is a legal entity that acts as an agent, trustee, or fiduciary on behalf of another body or person. These services include custodianship for trust and estate , share transfer facilities, asset management, registration of beneficial ownership , and other related arrangements. Therefore, to become a corporate agent, one must be responsible for all of these services.

Unlike trust companies which often support individuals (who are generally of high net worth) in managing personal assets, corporate agents will instead work closely with companies. Banks can act as agents to generate additional income.

This will diversify government or corporate revenue streams away from just the retail banking sector, as well as provide them with a more stable income base. Most of the services provided by corporate agents are non-credit. That is, the service does not involve extending credit.

In the contract, the relationship between the corporate agent and the business is predetermined. In many cases, there will not be complete free will for the corporate agent to execute all business decisions, but only in certain areas.

The corporate agent must confirm with the company before taking any action in the “gray area”.

 

 

Banks with Corporate Agent Services

Sinaumed’s, after getting to know more about corporate agents, here is a list of 15 banks that provide corporate credit services!

1. PT Bank Central Asia
2. PT Bank Danamon Indonesia
3. PT Bank DBS Indonesia
4. PT Bank HSBC Indonesia
5. PT Bank ICBC Indonesia
6. PT Bank Maybank Indonesia
7. PT Bank Resona Perdania
8. Standard Chartered Bank
9. PT Bank UOB Indonesia
10. PT Bank Mandiri
11. PT Bank Negara Indonesia
12. PT Bank Rakyat Indonesia
13. State Savings Bank PT
14. DKI bank
15. MUFG Ltd Bank.

Examples of How Corporate Agents Work

In order to make it easier for us to understand the workings of a corporate agent more deeply, here’s an example of how it works in a story illustration. Let’s see together!

Corporate, fiduciary, depository, deposit, tender and exchange services, up to escrow are provided by the Agency and Trust Bank A Division. More than 3,000 clients served by this corporate agency, including financial, corporate, and government institutions.

The corporate agency division manages up to trillions of assets because it has a market share that continues to grow and advance. Opportunities were also seen by Bank A and the corporate division in making their bank a solution for various capital market transactions.

The nation’s capital and major cities on the island of Java, to developed countries are their main office locations. Bank A also has expertise both globally and locally due to its network of specialists and technical workers.

Governments or companies that use the services of Bank A’s corporate agents can request access to the latest technology on the market, such as programs for analysis to administrative reporting.

More specifically, Bank A’s corporate agents also perform structured financial services. That is, finances that are involved with each other such as debt repayment obligations. This is generally requested by companies whose financing is complex.

The task of managing various types of financial transactions according to the basic function of a bank is the duty of the bank to act as a corporate agent on behalf of the government or company.

Companies or governments can save money or time with the services of this agent. The reason is, they don’t need to recruit new people to carry out the tasks performed by corporate agents.

Example 1

Fiduciary, agency, safekeeping, safekeeping, tendering and exchange services are provided by Citibank’s Agency and Trust Division. Over 2,700 clients are served by City Agencies and Trusts, including financial institutions, corporates and public sector entities. This division also manages assets of more than USD 6 trillion as it operates in developed and developing markets.

It is not surprising that this division within the company sees itself as a single solution for various capital market transactions. Its main offices are also located in New York, London, California, São Paulo, Mexico City, Dubai, Moscow, Hong Kong and Seoul. Globally, Citi’s network of technical specialists and service professionals has expertise in country and jurisdictional local markets.

The clients of this corporate agency can receive access to the latest technology. Online management of Agency and Trust City investor reporting systems also gives clients direct access to detailed transaction information, along with customization around specific portfolios and automatic email updates.

Example 2

One of the trusted banks, Bank Z, offers a variety of financial services to its customers, from receiving, depositing, to borrowing funds. There are more than 10,000 Bank Z customers, both individuals and companies to government agencies.

PT ZZZ, one of his clients, has a clearing account managed by Bank Z. In fact, the registration of shares is also the same. This is what makes Bank Z can be called a corporate agent.

 

 

Corporate Agency According to Enterslice

A corporate agent is usually an organization or company that represents the interests of insurance companies. Therefore, corporate agents act in the best interests of insurance companies.

There are several guidelines that must be adhered to and followed by corporate agents. Corporate agents not only represent insurance company interests, but also sell insurance company policies.

To operate on behalf of an insurance company, a corporate agent requires a corporate agency license. A corporate agency license is required for an organization to act as a corporate agent. When a company sells auto insurance on behalf of an insurance organization, it is the corporate agent for that insurance organization.

Companies, as well as banks, can obtain a corporate agency Licence. Therefore, when a bank obtains this license, it will represent the interests of the insurance organization. This agreement is referred to as a bancassurance or partnership.

Financial institutions offer insurance plans to customers based on their needs. So, a corporate agent might represent one life insurance company, one non-life insurance company, and one health insurance company.

Corporate Agent Category

The following are several categories of corporate agents according to Enterslice :

• Life insurance corporate agent
• General insurance corporate agent
• Health insurance corporate agent
• Composite insurance corporate agent

Corporate Agency Scope

Corporate agents are companies that solicit, procure and provide services for various forms of insurance business. Once a corporate agent is licensed, they can service life insurance businesses, non-life insurance businesses, and health insurance businesses.

A corporate agent for a life insurance business may have agreements with as few as three life insurance companies to advertise, solicit, and purchase different insurance products.

A corporate agent for a general insurance business may have agreements with as few as three general insurance companies to solicit, advertise, and purchase various types of insurance products on behalf of the business.

Corporate agents for health insurance can only have agreements with three health insurance companies to advertise, purchase, and service their products.

Meanwhile, a corporate agent for composite insurance can have an agreement with a composite insurance provider for three years.

Why is a Corporate Agent License Required?

• To ensure that the corporate agent acts on behalf of the insurance business.
• To request products on behalf of an insurance business.
• Acting in the best interests of the life insurance, non-life insurance, and general insurance businesses.
• This license is necessary for adequate regulation to exist in the insurance business.

About Agent

Sinaumed’s, it’s time for us to know more about the term “agent” itself. Let’s listen carefully!

Agent Characteristics

The characteristics of the agent are as follows:

• Generally, the number of goods sold by agents is smaller than distributors
• The marketing area is not that wide
• Buying goods in large quantities to be resold to resellers
• The system for purchasing goods or services from distributors can be done by buying out or using a commission system
• Generally, agents do not serve direct purchases by consumers
• Can open opportunities for other parties to become resellers
• Only sell products from one manufacturer and may not sell products from competitors.
• Not always and does not have to be in the form of a business entity or have a business entity permit.

Agent Types

Below are the types of agents in general:

1. Supporting Agent

Supporting agents are a group of agents formed specifically for activities in several aspects of moving goods or services. The division includes wholesale transportation agents or bulk transportation agents , storage agents or storage agents , special transportation agents or specialty shippers , as well as sales and purchasing agents and sales agents .

These support agents carry out activities in the form of assisting the transfer of goods in such a way as to establish a direct relationship between the seller and the buyer. In other words, the function of a support agent is to serve the needs of each group simultaneously.

2. Complementary Agents

The next type is complementary agents, namely a group of agents whose function is to carry out various additional services in the distribution of goods. The goal is to correct existing deficiencies.

Complementary agents will replace related work related to the distribution of goods if the agency or trader cannot do the job

There are several services performed by complementary agents, including election services, financial services, information services, and special services.

It doesn’t just stop there, complementary services can also be distinguished based on the offers they make, which are divided into agents in the financial sector, agents who help make decisions such as advertising agencies, doctors, to institutions, agents in providing information such as television, newspapers, and radio, to other special agents who are not included in these groups.

 

 

Closing

That is the explanation regarding corporate agents which seem to have various functions and benefits for companies, especially the government. As we know, companies sometimes have too much focus, so they need separate assistance services to manage their finances or assets. This is why corporate agencies can be so useful and profitable.

Hopefully all of the discussion above can provide benefits as well as add to Sinaumed’s’ insight regarding corporate agents.

You can find various books related to finance, assets, and so on by browsing the sinaumedia.com website . As the largest online bookstore in Indonesia, we are always committed to providing complete and updated books .

In digital marketing, we often hear the term copywriting . The role of copywriting is vital. Copywriting is the spearhead in digital marketing. However, what is copywriting ?

Maybe you often realize that articles or writings in the form of solicitations in advertisements for the sale of goods or services are not made haphazardly. These solicitation letters are written by those who work specifically in marketing writing. They are copywriters or often the authors are called copywriters . The task of copywriting is to become a liaison between sellers or advertisers and buyers or consumers through written, audio, image, video, or other types of content.

Definition of Copywriting

Copywriting (Indonesian: advertising script) is a script written by an advertising copywriter and distributed for commercial purposes. For example, scripts for television advertisements, radio, magazines, newspapers, billboards, banners, and so on. Advertising copywriters are commonly called copywriters , while the script or text is called copy or copywriting. Copywriting can also mean writing activities.

In practice, advertising scripts are not only in the form of conventional advertisements or in the above the line category (such as television, radio or print media advertisements), but any promotional scripts required by the industry. For example, website text, calendars, brochures, company or product slogans ( taglines ), sales letters ( sales letters ), press releases ( press releases ), direct mail , newsletters ( newsletters ), and many more.

An ad script writer is required to be able to write text creatively and based on research. He is also required to master writing techniques in many media, such as print, websites, audio and audiovisual.

Quoted from the American Writers and Artist Institute (AWAI) page, copywriting is the process of writing persuasive marketing and promotional materials that motivate people to take some form of action, such as making a purchase, clicking on a link, donating, inviting, to influencing people to contact the sales department.

Copywriting materials can include written promotions published in print or online. They can also include spoken material, such as scripts used for videos or advertisements. You may not realize it, but copywriting is actually everywhere, even if you’re just starting out by looking at your inbox (e-mail), you’ll find some clear examples of copywriting .

Promotions for local restaurants, catalogs, fundraising letters from charitable organizations, or sales letters for various products and services are all forms of copywriting . A copywriting writer is called a copywriter.

Copywriting example

Copywriting is a method of making material, usually in the form of writing, to persuade potential customers to buy or use the goods or services being advertised. The content of the article can be in the form of solicitations, product explanations, subscription information, solicitations to contact sales, promo information, and so on.

At first, copywriting was only used in making articles such as advertorials, sales letters, billboards , and also marketing media in other forms of writing. That’s why this marketing technique is called copywriting . However, in this era of digital and online technology, copywriting is considered an important matter in marketing.

Apart from being able to put it in written form, the current copywriting method can also be applied in making a video or podcast script . In addition, copywriting skills can also be applied to various marketing media, such as text on landing pages , blog articles, social media posts, headlines and meta descriptions , paid ads on Google or social media, titles to YouTube video descriptions . Television commercials, product reviews on YouTube , and short videos on how to use a product are all examples of spoken copywriting .

Types of Copywriting

1. Direct Response Copywriting

Direct response copywriting is a form of written content that directs people to click on pages on a website.

2. Marketing Copywriting

Marketing copywriting is a form of content that conveys sales information to convince consumers in the form of an explanation of product functions and benefits.

3. Brand Copywriting

Brand copywriting is a type of copywriting that focuses on conveying the image and identity of a brand.

4. SEO Copywriting

SEO copywriting is copywriting that focuses on appearing in search engines, that is, when potential customers often have to open a search engine to find out information before buying a product.

5. Technical Copywriting

This type of copywriting focuses more on providing in-depth knowledge about how a product or service works. Generally, this type of copywriting is used for beauty products, technology, or health products.

Who Uses Copywriting?

Copywriting is at the core of almost every business. Without copywriters , businesses or companies will not be able to share their message with potential customers to expand their market. All companies, government agencies, manufacturers, retailers, to non-profit organizations. They all need and use copywriters and their copywriting products .

Take Apple Inc. as an example. If you browse their website, you will find descriptions of their products, like this one for the new MacBook Air. Copywriters are advertisements that are easy to find in newspapers. The product description as published on Apple’s official website was written by a copywriter , you can also see there is a link to the product video.

Guess who wrote the script for that video? You guessed it, a copywriter . And if you scroll down the page, you will see this description for the special security chip that comes with the laptop. It is also made by copywriters .

Copywriting as we know it today has been studied and recognized as an important part of marketing for decades. However, the history of copywriting goes much further back. Undoubtedly, merchants on the streets of ancient Rome needed to use persuasion when they bartered with potential customers.

Steps to Make Interesting Copywriting!

Now surely you want to know how to make interesting copywriting , right? Easy, here are six steps that you must master when learning copywriting :

1. Study your product or service.
2. Understand audience needs.
3. Choose a catchy headline .
4. Support headlines with compelling leads .
5. Write quality copy .
6. End with persuasion.

Let’s see the detailed explanation!

1. Study Your Product or Service

Without recognizing the product, service or content being offered, you will not be able to market it properly. This is why product understanding is an important part of learning copywriting . This doesn’t just apply to copywriters working for a company. Even for those of you promoting your personal business, this is an important thing to remember. Unless you create the merchandise.

So, after learning about what you’re selling, it’s a good idea if you write down the information you get in the form of a description. This is done so that later you will have a reference in the writing process. To make it easier for you to create product descriptions, try asking yourself these three things:

• What’s unique about this product?
• What are the features?
• What benefits do consumers get from this feature?

Now, we will explain what you need to write based on the three questions above.

a. What’s Unique about the Product?

Ideally, every product (and service) has a unique selling point or USP. That is, the product has a uniqueness that is not found in its competitors. For example, you want to market herbal facial soap. Even though there are many other herbal facial soap manufacturers, your product is 100% free from animal elements. These are elements that you can use as USP.

b. What are the Features?

Apart from being unique, your product or service certainly has several features, right? While not all of them need to be mentioned in the copywriting text , it’s a good idea to write down these features in a list so they’re easy to remember when needed.

From the example of herbal facial soap, you can mention the special ingredients as features. For example, the soap is made from lemongrass leaf extract.

c. What Benefits Do Consumers Get From These Features?

If you only mention the features of a product, your audience may not necessarily understand the benefits. Therefore, you also need to explain the advantages of the existing features. For example, mention that the lemongrass leaf extract contained in your soap products not only gives you a natural fragrance, but also prevents acne breakouts.

2. Understand Audience Needs

Knowing your audience is no less important than understanding your own product. Why? Because the essence of copywriting is not about your profit, but the benefits they get when using the goods you sell.

Imagine if someone offered you a car perfume sample, even though you only have a motorbike. Of course, you refuse the offer because it’s useless, right? Apart from that, you also need to understand your audience so you can create marketing text that really sounds personal, aka right on target. If you can do that, it’s guaranteed that many people will be interested in buying from you.

Well, the first step that needs to be taken to study the audience is to give surveys to existing consumers. This can be done easily if you already have their email address beforehand. That way, all you have to do is send an email whose contents invite consumers to fill out a survey.

In the survey, there are several questions that must be included so that you can understand consumers as fully as possible, including:

• “What attracted you to our product?”
• “Have you ever used a similar product?”
• “How was your experience using it?”

Depending on what you’re selling, you can also ask more personal questions like the following:

• “Tell me about yourself (age, place of residence, amount of income)”
• “What is your profession?” or “What business do you run?”
• “What everyday challenges can our products solve? What’s unsolved?”
• “What would you like to be able to achieve in your job or business?”

With the answers to the questions above, you can create a picture of your target audience called a buyer persona . Like the product description, this image is also used as a reference.

3. Define Captivating Headlines

Eight out of ten audiences will only read your title or headline . That means you have to be able to create a title that really grabs attention. High creativity is needed to make strong headlines. However, the practice is not as difficult as many people think. The following three tricks are proven to be able to turn ordinary-sounding titles into interesting ones:

• Describe the benefits you offer.
• Make readers want to buy immediately.
• Enter the percentage.

a. Mention the Benefits You Offer

You certainly don’t want to lose potential customers, do you? One of the reasons is the unclear title. For example “Easy Ways to Save Work Time”. The headline is brief, but the reader will not immediately know what he will get from reading the entire text.

Try changing the title to “Finish Work 2 Hours Early with These 7 Tricks”. This title is not that short, but the reader can immediately understand its benefits. This method can also be applied to headlines on landing pages . One such example is what The Hustle did . With that message, people who access the page will immediately understand that The Hustle offers business and technology news that can be listened to quickly.

b. Make Readers Want to Buy Immediately

Generally, consumers don’t want to turn down profits. Discounts, for example. However, just listing the discount in the headline is not enough. To create maximum effect, you can indicate that the discount is not valid forever. An example is the one used on the main page of the Niagahoster website.

Apart from websites, you can also use this type of headline in social media ads or Google searches. For example, “Only 7 Days! 35% Discount For All Accessories”. With a headline format like that, it’s guaranteed that more people will be interested in your ad. However, the time limit for your offer must really exist. Otherwise, the audience will lose their trust in you.

c. Enter Percentage

Apart from benefits and limited offers, another element that is no less powerful for capturing attention is percentage. Especially if the number is odd.

Why is that? With a percentage in your headline , readers will be more interested because there are specific results that can be obtained from you. For example this title: “11 Tips to Increase Website Traffic by 37.5%”. If the headline is simply “Tips to Increase Website Traffic”, the number of people who are interested in clicking on your articles, ads, or landing pages will not be many.

4. Support Headlines with Compelling Leads

As the one in the front row, the headline or title must of course be able to attract the audience. However, people are not necessarily interested in listening to your article, newsletter or landing page further after clicking on the title.

For this reason, an interesting headline needs to be supported by an interesting lead or opening paragraph. Here are some ways you can create leads that readers can’t resist:

• Show empathy.
• Start with facts.
• Make the audience curious.

a. Show Empathy

As we mentioned earlier, copywriting is all about your audience. Therefore, this concept also needs to be used in leads . The trick is to empathize with the reader. Open your lead with these three sample phrases to build a connection with your audience from the start:

• “Have you experienced this? [continues with a short story about the audience problem]”
• “You know how [the X problem] can be very disruptive to activities. Fortunately, [product X] can overcome it with [solution X]”
• “We understand that [problem X] can interfere with your activities. Therefore, you need [solution X]”

b. Start with Facts

As with any type of writing, data, facts, or a quote from a trusted source can be used as a lead opener . You can sample the following phrases so that the lead sounds credible and captures the audience’s attention:

• “This year’s [company X] research shows that….”
• “[technique X] has been shown to increase revenue by X%, according to [company X] studies.”
• “It has been proven that [the X platform] is still the number one solution for….”

c. Create a Curious Audience

Of course, the audience must be curious so they want to read your text to the end. This can be done with a simple invitation at the end of the opening paragraph, such as “Intrigued by how? Check out this article!”

In addition, you can also make your audience curious in the beginning by providing surprising facts. For example: “It cannot be denied that [element X] is beneficial to the body. However, did you know that [the X element] has a negative impact?”

5. Write Quality Copy

Even though headlines and leads are important parts of copywriting techniques , you shouldn’t forget the main part of the writing. In copywriting , this section is called copy. There are several formulas you can use to write quality copy , including:

• Use simple words and sentences.
• Write for one person only.
• Explain the benefits to the audience.
• Take advantage of subheadings .

• 8 Advertising Purposes, Their Characteristics and Definitions According to Experts
• 10 Types of Service Business. Who knows it suits you!
• Definition of Advertising: Types, Functions, Benefits, and Tips
• Definition of Entrepreneurship: Concept, Purpose, Nature, and Types of Entrepreneurship
• Advertising Purpose: Definition, Characteristics, Types, and Conditions

The convention is – Indonesia is a country that has laws in it, so every Indonesian must comply with applicable laws. The existing law in Indonesia has two forms, namely basic written law and unwritten basic law.

The 1945 Constitution is one part of the written basic law in Indonesia which is used to regulate the running of the state government properly and correctly. Meanwhile, unwritten laws are often referred to as conventions.

Conventions themselves are simply rules that can exist and be maintained in constitutional practice. However, it is also necessary to know that a convention cannot be justified when it conflicts with the 1945 Constitution. Usually a convention is a rule that can exist because it comes from a practice of administering state administration.

There are still many important things related to conventions such as definitions and examples. For those of you who want to understand more about conventions, then you can read all the explanations about conventions in this article.

Definition of Law

Before discussing conventions, it would be better if we also know in advance what law is. This is because the convention itself is included in the type of unwritten law.

Laws are laws made and enforced through social or government institutions that are used to regulate people’s behavior. Existing laws in a country can be made by a group legislature or by a single legislator who will later produce laws by the executive through decisions and regulations or determined by judges through the President.

One can enter into a legally binding contract including an arbitration agreement that adopts alternative ways of settling existing disputes by standard court litigation.

Law creation can be influenced by written or tacit constitutions and the rights encoded in them. The existence of law can also shape politics, economics, history and society in various ways and serves as a mediator in human relations.

The legal system that exists in each country always varies, so they cannot be equated. In civil law jurisdictions, the legislature or other central body will codify as well as consolidate the law. If viewed historically, religious law is able to influence secular matters and is still used in some religious communities.

For example, sharia law, which has basic Islamic principles, continues to be used as the primary legal system in several countries, including Iran and Saudi Arabia.

Definition of Convention

After understanding a brief explanation of the law. We will enter into the main topic of discussion, namely about conventions. The first thing we will learn together is about the meaning of convention.

In general, a convention is an unwritten basic law in which there are constitutional customs in a country. Basic unwritten laws such as conventions have the nature of complementing, perfecting and enlivening the rules of statutory law.

Even though the explanation contains the word custom, convention is actually different from custom. This is because basic unwritten laws such as conventions will not experience repetition. Conventions are also part of the constitution which cannot be enforced through the courts.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, a convention is an agreement or agreement, especially regarding customs, traditions and so on. Conventions can also be interpreted as basic rules that can arise and be maintained if carried out continuously and repeatedly.

In practice, conventions may not conflict with the 1945 Constitution and supplement or fill in the gaps arising from state administration practices.

Definition of Convention According to Experts

After knowing about the definition of convention in general. Next is still about the definition of convention, but according to experts. Below is the definition of convention according to experts which you can read in full.

1. Endra Yuda

According to Endra Yuda, a convention is a basic rule that can emerge and be maintained in the practice of administering the state, but the nature of this basic rule is unwritten.

2. Sukma Yudha

According to Sukma Yudha, a convention is a set of norms that are accepted by society and the government in general.

That is an explanation of the meaning of the convention according to experts. Meanwhile, according to the book Basics of Political Science by Miriam Budiarjo, it is explained that conventions are rules of state behavior that are not based on laws, but are based on constitutional habits.

Conventions are also included in the constitutional system and can be used as a guide when formal rules are unclear or inadequate. Thus, the existence of conventions can fill the void in codified law.

In addition, the convention can also be based on a judge’s decision. The existence of conventions allows the Constitution to be able to adapt to changes and developments of the times.

Convention Features

Maybe you don’t really understand how it differs from conventions and other customs. At least there are several characteristics of the convention that can provide a fundamental difference with other regulations. The following are the characteristics possessed by the convention.

1. The content and practice of the convention will run parallel to and not conflict with the 1945 Constitution.
2. Conventions can exist because of habits that are carried out repeatedly in the administration of the state.
3. Conventions can be used as a complement to the 1945 Constitution. This is because they can be applied in accordance with the times.
4. Conventions are unwritten and cannot be tried. Because of this, the violations committed cannot be tried for these violations.
5. Even though it has an unwritten nature, the people still accept the convention and see it as a rule in the administration of the state and must still be obeyed.

Types of Conventions

When viewed by type, conventions can be divided into two groups. Following are the types of conventions.

1. National Convention

National conventions are a type of unwritten rules that exist within a country. Where the parties involved are citizens and governments in the country.

2. International Conventions

International conventions are a type of unwritten rules which involve the citizens and governments of each country that co-signs a convention. The number of countries participating in signing an international convention may increase from time to time.

Nature of the Convention

Conventions will be more easily recognized if seen by their nature. In Indonesia itself, the convention has several characteristics in it. To make it easier for you to find out about conventions, here are some of the characteristics possessed by conventions in Indonesia.

1. Running Parallel to the 1945 Constitution

One of the characteristics of existing conventions in Indonesia is that they run in accordance with or parallel to the 1945 Constitution. That means that the content or practice of a convention in Indonesia may not conflict with the articles contained in the 1945 Constitution.

This is none other than because the 1945 Constitution is a source of all legal sources in the State of Indonesia. Therefore, other rules must be in accordance with the value of the basic law. Be it in the form of conventions, laws or presidential decrees or presidential decrees or something else.

2. Supplement to the 1945 Constitution

Judging from its history, the Basic Law during the course of the Indonesian government had experienced a change in the legal basis, namely the 1945 Constitution to become the 1950 Constitution. However, since the Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959, the 1950 RI UUDS changed to the 1945 Constitution.

Then, when the government bore fruit from the Old Order to the New Order, where during the New Order, a commitment was made to be able to implement the 1945 Constitution purely and accept all the consequences that came with it.

In order to maintain the purity of the 1945 Constitution, the contents of the articles cannot be changed and even if they have to be changed they have to go through a referendum. Preserving the 1945 Constitution can be done by having a convention.

This is done so that the basic rules can be applied in accordance with the current developments. That way, it can be concluded that if there is a convention it can be a complement to the 1945 Constitution.

3. Habits

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, constitutional freedom is a basic law that can arise and be maintained in state administration practices and is obeyed by state administrators as a moral and ethical obligation.

This constitutional custom can also be referred to as a convention. Therefore, it can be concluded that one of the characteristics of the existing conventions in Indonesia is in the form of activities that are carried out repeatedly so that they can become a habit.

4. Unwritten And Cannot Be Tried

Convention is a habit, so the convention has an unwritten nature. However, the rules in the convention still uphold the applicable legal norms. In addition, it is because of this that if a convention is violated by the government, then the government cannot be prosecuted for the violation of the convention it has committed.

However, so far the implementation of the convention can continue to grow and be respected by the Indonesian people if the convention is still appropriate to be implemented.

5. Accepted by the People

As previously explained, conventions do have an unwritten nature. Even though it is not written, the convention remains a rule in which the rule will be accepted by the community.

If indeed from the beginning a convention could not be accepted, then such a convention could not become a habit in administering state administration. People can accept a convention if the convention respects existing ethical values ​​and norms. In addition, the existence of a convention can also foster a spirit of nationalism and patriotism in society.

Example of a Convention

In Indonesia itself there are many examples of conventions that have been carried out to date. In fact, you’ve probably already done it. However, because there may be a lack of information about conventions, you may not know if you have applied a convention yourself.

So that Sinaumed’s also knows more about examples of conventions. Here is a full explanation of the convention example.

1. Flag Raising Ceremony

Who would have thought that the implementation of the flag-raising ceremony which is held every Monday and on the Republic of Indonesia’s Independence Day is a form of national convention. There are several explanations related to this, namely:

• The implementation of the Indonesian flag-raising ceremony has been made a habit since ancient times, namely every Monday and every Independence Day of the Republic of Indonesia. Previously, it has also been explained that the existence of a convention is due to a habit.
• The implementation of the flag-raising ceremony was also in accordance with the 1945 Constitution. Where the red and white flag used to be raised was accompanied by the Indonesia Raya anthem.
• The existence of a flag ceremony can also be considered as a complement to the 1945 Constitution. This is because it does not explain the procedures and rules in the process of carrying out a flag ceremony.
• The order to carry out the flag ceremony is not written and no court will judge if you do not participate in carrying out the flag-raising ceremony.
• The flag ceremony can be accepted by all Indonesian people and this is an example of the attitude of patriotism and nationalism in the Indonesian nation and respecting the heroes who have fought for Indonesian independence.

2. Selection of Ministers by the President and Vice President

In order to be able to assist the duties of the President and Vice President, after the inauguration process the two of them will select a number of people to be able to occupy the ministerial chair. It turns out that the ministerial selection process is also included in the example of a national convention. This is because there are certain reasons as explained below.

• The election of ministers will be carried out by the President and Vice President as a form of custom.
• The process of choosing ministers carried out by the President and Vice President does not conflict with the 1945 Constitution. Article 17 states that ministers can be appointed and dismissed by the President.
• The convention on procedures for selecting ministers can be used as a complement to the 1945 Constitution. Because basically there is no article explaining these procedures.
• The ministerial selection process conducted by the President and Vice President is acceptable to the public. This is because ministers are people who will help the President and Vice President work while they are in office. If ministers don’t share the same vision and mission with the President or Vice President, it will certainly have harmful effects.
• There are no written rules on how a President should elect ministers. Therefore, if there really is a condition that compels the President to choose ministers on an arbitrary basis, then the President’s actions cannot be prosecuted.

3. Explanation of the RAPBN by the President

Explanation of the RAPBN or the State Revenue and Expenditure Budget Plan carried out by the President in front of the DPR or the People’s Representative Council can also be an example of the form of a convention.

This can happen because of several explanations below.

• The elucidation of the RAPBN by the President in front of the DPR is a custom in which the reading of the RAPBN will be read at the beginning of each year or in January.
• Explanation of the RAPBN made by the President in front of the DPR does not conflict with the 1945 Constitution. This is because there is no article which prohibits the explanation of the RAPBN made by the President.
• Explanation of the RAPBN made by the President in front of the DPR can also be used as a complement to the 1945 Constitution. This is because Article 23 paragraph 1 of the 1945 Constitution has a sound that the President is only required to propose the RAPBN to the DPR every year.
• There is no written rule if the President has to explain the RAPBN in front of the DPR. Therefore, if there are conditions that make the President not to take these actions, then the President cannot be tried. However, this can become a mental burden for the President because of his position as head of government and head of state.
• Explanation of the RAPBN made by the President in front of the DPR can be accepted by all Indonesian people. This is because the President carried out financial transparency during his tenure. That way, the community can also actively participate in protecting the government so that they can minimize the causes of existing acts of abuse of authority.

That’s a summary of conventions, I hope the explanation explained above can be useful for Sinaumed’s. You can also get various kinds of books at sinaumedia.com and get information #MoreWithReading with sinaumedia.

sinaumedia Literacy – Biotechnology has been known by humans since thousands of years ago. For example, in the field of food technology are brewing, bread and cheese which have been known since the 19th century, plant breeding to produce new varieties in agriculture, as well as animal breeding and reproduction. Check out a more complete explanation about Biotechnology below, Sinaumed’s:

With the advent of science and the improvement of biological tools, techniques were developed for increasing human living standards. One of the most important techniques is biotechnology.

Biotechnology itself is a branch of science that studies the use of living things (bacteria, fungi, viruses, etc.) as well as products from living things (enzymes, alcohol) in the production process to produce goods and services.

In other words, biotechnology is the science that deals with the application of biological systems and organisms to technical and industrial processes for human well-being.

Biotechnology has been used for more than 6000 years to produce desired products using microorganisms, such as bread, beer, cheese and others. Until now, the use of biotechnology has penetrated into almost various aspects of life which are fully explained in the Biotechnology book.

In the medical field, the application of this branch of science in the past was proven by the discovery of vaccines, antibiotics and insulin, although they were still in limited quantities due to imperfect fermentation processes. Significant changes occurred after the invention of the bioreactor by Louis Pasteur. With this tool, mass production of antibiotics and vaccines can be carried out.

Definition of Biotechnology

Biotechnology is a branch of science that studies the use of living things (bacteria, fungi, viruses, etc.) as well as products from living things (enzymes, alcohol) in the production process to produce goods and services.

Today, the development of biotechnology is not only based on biology alone, but also on other applied and pure sciences, such as biochemistry, computers, molecular biology, microbiology, genetics, chemistry, mathematics, and so on. In other words, biotechnology is an applied science that combines various branches of knowledge in the process of producing goods and services.

In the medical field, the application of biotechnology in the past was proven, among others, by the discovery of vaccines, antibiotics and insulin, although these were still in limited quantities due to imperfect fermentation processes. Significant changes occurred after the invention of the bioreactor by Louis Pasteur.

With this tool, mass production of antibiotics and vaccines can be carried out. At this time, biotechnology is developing very rapidly, especially in developed countries. This progress was marked by the discovery of various technologies such as genetic engineering, tissue culture, recombinant DNA, stem cell breeding, cloning, and others.

At this time, biotechnology is developing very rapidly, especially in developed countries. This progress was marked by the discovery of various technologies such as genetic engineering, tissue culture, recombinant DNA, stem cell breeding, cloning, and others. This technology allows us to obtain cures for genetic and chronic diseases that cannot be cured, such as cancer or AIDS.

Research in the field of stem cell development also allows stroke sufferers or other diseases that result in loss or damage to body tissues to recover as before. In the food sector, using genetic engineering technology, tissue culture and recombinant DNA, it is possible to produce plants with superior characteristics and products because they contain more nutrients than ordinary plants, and are also more resistant to pests and environmental pressures.

Its application at this time can also be found in environmental preservation from pollution. For example, in the decomposition of petroleum spilled into the sea by bacteria, and the decomposition of toxic substances (poisons) in rivers or seas using new types of bacteria. However, progress in the field of biotechnology is inseparable from various controversies that surround its technological development. For example, cloning technology and genetic engineering of food crops have come under fire from various groups.

 

History of Biotechnology

Biotechnology is a branch of science that studies the use of living things (bacteria, fungi, viruses, etc.) as well as products from living things (enzymes, alcohol) in the production process to produce goods and services. In other words, biotechnology is the science that deals with the application of biological systems and organisms to technical and industrial processes for human well-being. The following is the history of biotechnology development from time to time, Sinaumed’s:

• 8000 BC: Collection of seeds for replanting. Evidence that the Babylonians, Egyptians and Romans practiced selective breeding (artificial selection) to improve the quality of livestock.
• 6000 BC: Brewing, fermenting wine, making bread, making tempeh with the help of yeast. 4000 BC The Chinese made yogurt and cheese with lactic acid bacteria.
• 1500: The collection of plants around the world.
• 1665: Discovery of cells by Robert Hooke (England) through a microscope.
• 1800: Nikolai I. Vavilov creates comprehensive research on animal breeding.
• 1880: Microorganisms discovered.
• 1856: Gregor Mendel begins recombinant plant genetics.
• 1865: Gregor Mendel discovers the laws of passing traits from parents to offspring.
• 1919: Karl Ereky, Hungarian engineer, first used the word biotechnology.
• 1970: Researchers in the US managed to find a limiting enzyme that is used to cut genes.
• 1975: Method of production of monoclonal antibodies developed by Kohler and Milstein.
• 1978: Researchers in the US succeeded in making insulin using bacteria found in the large intestine.
• 1980: Modern biotechnology is characterized by recombinant DNA technology. His prokaryotic model, E. coli, is used to produce insulin and other drugs, in human form. About 5% of people with diabetes are allergic to previously available animal insulin).
• 1992: The FDA approves Calgene’s first GM food: “flavor saver” tomato (Flavr Savr).
• 2003: Completion of the Human Genome Project

 

Conventional Biotechnology

Conventional biotechnology is very limited in scope to the role of microorganisms using small-scale fermentation techniques. In the manufacturing process often uses simple equipment. Discussion on the role of microorganisms in biotechnology can also be read in the book Biotechnology Utilization of Microorganisms.

Examples of Conventional Biotechnology

1. making tempeh,
2. tape,
3. bread,
4. cheese,
5. yogurt,
6. soy sauce.

 

Modern Biotechnology

We are familiar with modern biotechnology with techniques that involve further genetic engineering to produce recombinant DNA and transgenic organisms that can be utilized to produce the desired product. Also find various practicums related to the basic principles of simple and modern biotechnology through the Biotechnology Practicum Guide book.

Examples of Modern Biotechnology

1. DNA profile.
2. DNA cloning.
3. Genome analysis.
4. transgenesis.
5. Xenotransplant.
6. Stem cells and tissue engineering.
7. Test-tube baby
8. Antibiotics
9. Vaccine

Utilization of Biotechnology Technology

Biotechnology technology enables solutions to cure genetic and chronic diseases such as cancer or AIDS. Research in the field of stem cell development also allows stroke sufferers or other diseases that result in loss or damage to body tissues to recover as before.

In the food sector, using genetic engineering technology, tissue culture and recombinant DNA, it is possible to produce plants with superior characteristics and products because they contain more nutrients than ordinary plants, and are also more resistant to pests and environmental pressures. The application of biotechnology at this time can also be found in environmental preservation from pollution.

For example, in the decomposition of petroleum spilled into the sea by bacteria, and the decomposition of toxic substances (poisons) in rivers or seas using new types of bacteria. Advances in the field of biotechnology cannot be separated from the various controversies that surround its technological development. For example, cloning technology and genetic engineering of food crops have come under fire from various groups.

Biotechnology in general means improving the quality of an organism through the application of technology. The application of these technologies can modify the biological function of an organism by adding genes from other organisms or modifying the genes of that organism. Changes in biological properties through genetic engineering cause the “birth of new organisms” of biotechnology products with beneficial properties for humans. Biotechnology products, among others:

• Insect-resistant corn. Insect-resistant cotton
• Papaya is virus resistant
• Enzymes that increase milk production in cows
• Rice contains vitamin A
• Bananas contain hepatitis vaccine

Examples of conventional biotechnology products, for example in the food sector are the manufacture of beer, bread and cheese which have been known since the 19th century, plant breeding to produce new varieties in agriculture, as well as animal breeding and reproduction. in the medical field, including the discovery of vaccines, antibiotics, and insulin, although these are still in limited quantities due to imperfect fermentation processes. Significant changes occurred after the discovery of the bioreactor by Louis Pasteur. With this tool, mass production of antibiotics and vaccines can be carried out.

Types of Biotechnology

Biotechnology has been used for more than 6000 years to produce desired products using microorganisms, such as bread, beer, cheese and others. In the medical field, the application of this branch of science in the past was proven by the discovery of vaccines, antibiotics and insulin, although they were still in limited quantities due to imperfect fermentation processes. Significant changes occurred after the invention of the bioreactor by Louis Pasteur.

With this tool, mass production of antibiotics and vaccines can be carried out. Broadly speaking, this branch of science is divided into two types, namely conventional and modern. As the name suggests, conventional biotechnology still uses simple processes and equipment. Usually, conventional types utilize microorganisms, for example in the fermentation process. Examples of these biotechnology products can be seen in the following examples.

Tempeh Ingredients: Soybeans Microorganisms: Rhizopus oligosporus Soy sauce Ingredients: Soybeans Microorganisms: Aspergilus soyae and Aspergilus wentii Tauco Ingredients: Soybeans Microorganisms: Aspergilus oryzae Yoghurt Ingredients: milk Microorganisms: Streptococcus, thermophilus, Lactobacillus bulgaricus Cheese Ingredients: Milk Microorganisms: Lactobacillus lactis, Lactobaccilus vulgaris Butter Ingredients: Milk Microorganisms: Streptococcus lactis Nata de coco Ingredients: Coconut juice Microorganisms: Acetobacter xylinum Meanwhile, modern biotechnology has used processes and equipment that are far more sophisticated. Typically, modern biotechnology involves genetic engineering or manipulation of genetic material.

This type of biotechnology is capable of creating transgenic plants and animals. In addition, modern biotechnology can be used for gene development, IVF testing, developing DNA vaccines, and repairing defective genes. Biotechnology has several types or branches of science, some of which are:

Red Biotechnology (Red Biotechnology)

Red Biotechnology (Red Biotechnology) is a branch of biotechnology that studies biotechnology applications in the medical field. Its scope covers the entire spectrum of human medicine, starting from the stages of prevention, diagnosis and treatment.

Examples of its application are the use of organisms to produce drugs and vaccines, the use of stem cells for regenerative medicine, and gene therapy to treat genetic diseases by inserting or replacing abnormal genes with normal genes. Further discussion can also be found in the Pharmaceutical Biotechnology book below.

Since red biotechnology has both pure research as well as practical medical applications, it is often based on the laboratory production of basic biological materials. Proteins, gene expression, and antibodies are studied as vectors that can be used to make genetically engineered cells or whole organisms, such as yeast or bacteria, that can be engineered to produce drugs and insulin to treat diabetic patients. The protein has also been altered to promote the production of enzymes in hamster cells that can be used in treating human heart disease.

Increasingly, such drug development, as in the field of cancer treatment, is highly toxic in normal-sized doses and must be administered in small, carefully controlled quantities to be an effective medical treatment. This makes the field of nanotechnology research for drug delivery an important aspect of red biotechnology as well. The red field of biotechnology involves creating new forms of drugs or cellular treatments for age-old diseases such as tuberculosis and resistant strains of malaria or viruses that do not respond to traditional antibiotics.

This is a field that includes research involving the basic science of biological processes, diagnostic methods for detecting disease, and treatment in either conventional forms, such as medicine, or sophisticated forms, such as genetic manipulation. Red biotechnology uses this tiered approach to try to tackle some of humanity’s most widespread diseases, from hepatitis and AIDS to suppressing resistant strains of the influenza virus.

More in-depth discussions starting from the process of cell death, sarcopenia, muscle atrophy, and many more can also be found in the book Aging Biotechnology, The Role of Food in Skin Rejuvenation.

White or Gray Biotechnology

White/Grey biotechnology is biotechnology applied in industries such as the development and production of new compounds and the manufacture of renewable energy sources. By manipulating microorganisms such as bacteria and yeast, better enzymes and organisms have been created to facilitate the production and treatment of industrial waste.

Leaching (bleaching) oil and minerals from the ground to increase mining efficiency, and brewing with yeast. Bioremediation is a way to restore previously polluted environmental conditions so as to reach a certain reference biologically which can be combined physically and chemically, without causing damage and reducing waste permanently. The process of bioremediation of contaminated soil based on the processing location can be carried out in-situ (treatment where the polluted soil is located) and ex-situ (processing elsewhere). Some of the technologies used in bioremediation, namely:

• Biostimulation: the use of nutrients (such as phosphorus and nitrogen) to trigger microbial biodegradation that occurs naturally.
• Bioaugmentation: increasing biodegradation through the addition of microbes or enzymes in polluted environments.
• Biofilter: separates organic gases by passing air through a carrier which can be compost or soil, containing microbes to degrade the materials passed.
• Boreactor: handlers of contaminants in large tanks containing microbes or enzymes.
• Bioslurry: treatment of soil contaminated with hydrocarbons using bacteria. This process is carried out in a pond that functions as a bioreactor.
• Bioventing: carried out by spraying oxygen through the soil to stimulate microbial growth, used in soils contaminated with petroleum.
• Composting: this technique is carried out by mixing contaminated material with compost, then incubating it at a relatively high temperature.
• Landfarming: this method relies on biodegradation by using soil as a source of microbial inoculum. The use of this technique to promote microbial growth by spreading polluted soil in open fields, is used to clean up large amounts of oil spills in soil.

Green Biotechnology

Green biotechnology studies the application of biotechnology in agriculture and animal husbandry. In agriculture, biotechnology has played a role in producing pest-resistant crops, foodstuffs with higher nutritional content and plants that produce drugs or useful compounds.

Meanwhile, in the livestock sector, animals have been used as “bioreactors” to produce important products, for example, goats, cows, sheep and chickens have been used as producers of antibodies-protective proteins that help the body’s cells recognize and fight foreign compounds (antigens). Meanwhile, in the field of animal husbandry, animals have been used as “bioreactors” to produce important products, for example, goats, cows, sheep, and chickens have been used as producers of antibodies-protective proteins that help the body’s cells recognize and fight foreign compounds (antigens).

The purpose of artificial insemination in livestock is to improve the genetic quality of livestock, not to require superior males to be brought to the place needed so as to reduce costs, to optimize the use of superior male seeds more widely in the long term and to increase birth rates quickly and regularly, to prevent transmission or spread of sexually transmitted diseases.

Blue Biotechnology

Blue biotechnology or blue biotechnology is also called aquatic biotechnology or waters that control the processes that occur in the aquatic environment. One of the oldest examples is aquaculture, growing finfish or shellfish under controlled conditions as a food source, (an estimated 30% of fish consumed worldwide comes from aquaculture).

Developments in aquatic biotechnology include genetic engineering to produce disease-resistant oysters and vaccines against viruses that attack salmon and other fish. Another example is transgenic salmon that have excessive growth hormone resulting in very high growth rates in a short time. Genetic Engineering Genetic engineering is a basic procedure in producing a biotechnology product.

In general, genetic engineering modifies living things by transferring genes from one organism to another. Genetic engineering procedures in general include isolating genes, modifying genes so that their biological functions are better, transferring these genes to new organisms and forming products of transgenic organisms. There are 4 procedures for forming transgenic organisms, namely through the gene introduction process.

• Form the desired gene sequence marked with a specific marker
• Transforming the tagged gene sequence to the network
• Cultivating tissue that already contains the transformed gene
• Test the culture in the field. Through the process of mutation genesis Modifying the genes in these organisms by changing the sequence of nitrogen bases in the existing DNA to be replaced with other nitrogen bases resulting in a change in the nature of the organism. For example, plants that are not resistant to pests become pest resistant. · Human Genome Project The Human Genome Project is an international effort to identify all the genes present in the DNA in human cells and map their locations on each of the 24 human chromosomes. This project has unlimited potential for developments in diagnostic approaches to disease detection and molecular approaches to cure human genetic diseases. Applications in the medical field Aspects of medical biotechnology have been around for a long time,

Recommended Books & Articles Related to Biotechnology

Contrasting Sentences – When composing sentences in a paragraph or paragraphs, does Sinaumed’s often pay attention to the cohesiveness between the sentences? If so, then Sinaumed’s has acted correctly, especially in the paragraph preparation process. Yep, it’s true that when compiling a paragraph consisting of these sentences, you have to pay attention to the cohesiveness and relationship between one sentence and another. This is done so that the reader understands the text.

Unfortunately, many people underestimate the cohesiveness between these sentences when composing paragraphs. As a result, in the paragraph there will be many discordant sentences. Then, what is the discordant sentence? What are the characteristics of discordant sentences contained in a paragraph? How do you arrange correct sentences so that there are no discordant sentences? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands this, let’s look at the following review!

Definition of Contributing Sentences in a Paragraph

Basically, discordant sentences are sentences that have nothing to do with the main idea, alias outgoing, but the topic of conversation in the paragraph. This discordant sentence can also be called a sentence that contradicts the main sentence. For example, the main idea in a paragraph is about outer space. But suddenly, there is a sentence that discusses the Day of Judgment. Of course, this sentence can be considered as a discordant sentence, because it is far from the topic of conversation, aka the main idea.

Discordant sentences in a paragraph become sentences that are not coherent. Even from the existence of this discordant sentence, it will actually lead to misunderstandings for the reader to understand the context of the writing because the sentence seems unclear. Discordant sentences are usually deliberately included in the questions to “trick” students and cause their answers to be confused. This was deliberately done so that students really focused and understood the contents of the writing as a whole. But if these discordant sentences are included in scientific writing, of course it is not allowed because it can make the writing inconsistent.

Characteristics of Contributing Sentences in a Paragraph

As with other types of sentences, this discordant sentence also has characteristics, you know! Well, here is a description of what are the characteristics of discordant sentences contained in a paragraph.

• The sentence contradicts the main idea.
• The sentence is not related to the previous sentences.
• The sentence seems to stand alone and is not related to the whole sentence in the paragraph.

How to Find Contributing Sentences in a Paragraph

Usually, these discordant sentences are deliberately given by the teacher in the questions so that students can focus again when they are answering questions. In fact, not infrequently, the existence of discordant sentences will be used as a question. Then, how do you find discordant sentences in a paragraph? Well, here is the description!

1. Read the entire paragraph provided. After that, determine what the main idea of ​​the paragraph is.
2. Re-read each sentence in the paragraph while checking one by one whether the sentences are related to the main idea or not.
3. If you find a sentence or two that talks about things out of context or the main idea, then that’s the off-key sentence!
4. After finding a discordant sentence, try to understand it further. Is the sentence intentionally written by the author to obscure the reader’s focus or an unintentional error. If it’s not on purpose, you can provide feedback to the author.
5. Mark with a pencil or pen the discordant sentences.

Example Sentence Contribute

Example 1

(1) One day, Sabda went for a trip to Mount Bromo with his friends. (2) Sabda did not forget to bring food and snacks for snacks during the trip. (3) Apart from that, Sabda also brought a change of clothes which he put in his bag. (4) Sabda likes to cook fried rice with cheese. (5) During the trip, Sabda always joked and laughed with his friends. 

So, from the paragraph contained in Example 1, it can be seen that the discordant sentence is in number (4). This is because the main idea in the paragraph is about Sabda traveling to Mount Bromo, but sentence number (4) suddenly discusses Sabda’s hobby. Of course these sentences are considered as discordant sentences and out of topic of discussion.

Example 2

(1) Through language, humans can convey whatever is in their thoughts and feelings to fellow human beings. (2) Also through language, humans can pass on all their experiences and knowledge to their children and grandchildren. (3) Indonesian is the forerunner of Malay. (4) Imagine if humans didn’t speak, then this world would be very quiet. (5) Therefore, language plays an important role in human life. 

So, from Example 2 it can be seen that the discordant sentence is in number 3. This is due to the general idea of ​​the entire paragraph regarding the importance of the existence of language for human survival. But suddenly, sentence number 3 discusses that the forerunner of Indonesian is from Malay, which of course has nothing to do with the previous sentences. So, it can be concluded that sentence number 3 is a discordant sentence.

Example 3

(1) Sprouts are sprouts that come from seeds, namely green beans with a white part three centimeters long. (2) The shape of bean sprouts is relatively small compared to other types of vegetables. (3) Even so, bean sprouts also have many beneficial ingredients for human health. (4) Sprouts are rarely red, unlike hot peppers. (5) Sprouts of any kind contain a lot of phytochemical compounds that are efficacious for nourishing the body. 

So, from Example 3 it can be seen that the discordant sentence is at number 4. This is because the general idea in the entire paragraph is a description of bean sprouts and their benefits for the health of the human body. But suddenly, sentence number 4 discusses the color of bean sprouts which are not red like chili. This, of course, has nothing to do with the general idea. Therefore, it can be concluded that sentence number 4 is a discordant sentence.

Example 4

(1) It will rain. (2) The wind was blowing hard and the dust was flying. (3) The black cloud moved swiftly. (4) The birds were singing merrily . (5) Street vendors are busy packing their wares. 

So, from Example 4, it can be seen that sentence number 4 is a non-coherent sentence, aka discordant sentence. This is because the main idea in the whole paragraph describes the atmosphere when the weather is cloudy. While sentence number 4, suddenly discusses about

The Concept of Cohesion and Coherence in Discourse

The existence of discordant sentences in a paragraph will still be related to cohesion and coherence in a discourse. Sinaumed’s needs to know that discourse is the most complete unit of language realized in the form of a complete essay or report, usually in the form of a novel, book, article, speech, or sermon.

Well, cohesion is the harmony of the relationship between one element and another in a discourse so that a neat or coherent paragraph is created. In this cohesion, it will continue to use rules based on conveying old and new information. These rules can be in the form of reference rules, substitution rules, aborting rules, and conjunction rules.

How to Form Cohesion in Discourse

According to Moeliono et al (in the book Indonesian Standard Grammar ), states that cohesion in a discourse can be formed in the following ways.

1. Use of the Relationships of the Elements

The relationship of these elements must state the following.

1. Contradiction, namely by using conjunctions in the form of: but or however.
2. The advantages, namely by using conjunctions in the form of: instead or even.
3. Exception, namely by using a conjunction in the form of: except.
4. Concessive, namely by using conjunctions in the form of: even though or increasingly.
5. Purpose, namely by using a connecting word in the form of: in order or so that.

2. Repetition of Words or Phrases

Namely the repetition of words or phrases contained in the discourse, with the aim that the context is clearer and the reader understands it well. However, the repetition of this word or phrase does not necessarily make it a discordant sentence or an ineffective sentence, because repetition is necessary. Example:

Karina bought Wendy a new novel . That’s because Karina knows that Wendy likes to read novels . 

3. Use of words that have different meanings but can be replaced by the same reference. 

Namely by replacing the word contained in the next sentence using another word whose meaning and reference are still the same. This is so as not to seem “boring” and varied. Example:

Andrea Hirata was once educated at the Sorbonne University, France. The writer of the novel Laskar Pelangi is now working at PT. TelkomBandung. 

So, in this example of discourse, the phrase Andrea Hirata and the phrase the author of the novel Laskar Pelangi both have the same reference.

4. Substitution of Forms with Different References, But to the Same Group. 

Namely by replacing the word contained in the next sentence using a reference that is not the same. Although the reference is not the same, but still in the same category. Example:

Yuna walks in the middle of a rose garden . Arriving near the exit, he plucked a flower and pinned it on his clothes. 

So, in the example of the discourse, the words rose and a flower both have the same reference, namely in the category of flowers. After all, between a rose (flower) and a flower is the same grammatical relationship.

5. Replacement Through Metaphor

Namely in the form of a replacement that has a certain context and when you want to express it with a metaphor, you have to pay attention to the relationship between the two. Example:

Not surprisingly, Laura grew up to be a beautiful girl , with blue eyes and reddish skin. This is because the flower has a Dutch father, Diego. 

So, in this example, the word flower will usually have a metaphor with a beautiful girl. The relationship between the two is a metaphorical relationship and coherence will still occur in both.

6. There is a Lexical Relationship

Namely in the form of the use of words that have lexical relations, whether in the form of antonyms, synonyms, homonyms, hyponyms, or polysemy. Here’s an example:

Since Annesia left for the Netherlands, the flowers that usually bloomed in front of Nyai Ontosoroh’s house were no longer visible. Only the moon orchid still looks beautiful because of its resistance to heat. 

So, in this example, the words flower and orchid have a hyponymic relationship. Moon orchid as a specific word, while flower is a flower word.

7. By Demonstrating “Part-Whole” Relationships

Example:

The southern starfish has been embraced by the ocean. The skipper started the main engine and in the stern I saw a surge of foam bubbling up as three giant propellers crashed into the water. I was ambushed amidst the sound of roars and I held tightly to the steel bow rail when the ship began to be rocked by the waves of the west season, my head could not stop remembering one word: Ciputat.

In the example discourse, the word Bintang Laut Selatan and the ship are considered as a certain entity that has its parts. These parts can be the main engine, stern, and bow rail iron. Well, that means that in the discourse there is a part-whole relationship that makes it cohesive as well as coherent.

Requirements for Forming Unified Paragraphs

It should be noted, Sinaumed’s, that paragraph is part of a chapter contained in an essay and contains one main idea by writing it starting with a new line. The term paragraph is the same as paragraph. In a paragraph, there must be at least two to three sentences that clearly convey what the main idea is. When Sinaumed’s wants to write an essay, he must know what are the requirements for forming a coherent paragraph, so that the reader understands what the main idea of ​​the writing is. Well, here are some of the conditions for its formation.

1. Unity

All sentences contained in the paragraph together must unite to support the main idea. Therefore, a paragraph will be called a paragraph that is coherent and contains unity, if there are no discordant sentences that deviate from the main idea.

2. Coherence

Namely the cohesiveness or cohesiveness of the relationship between one sentence and the other sentences in the paragraph. The cohesiveness of this sentence can be established by the existence of relationship markers, both those related explicitly and implicitly.

a) Explicit Relationship Marker

• Words reapeting

Example:

All contents of this nature are God’s creatures . God’s most perfect and noblest creation is human . Humans are permitted by God to take advantage of all the contents of nature in an effort to meet their needs. However, it is not permissible to hurt, torture, and waste nature’s contents . 

• Pronouns

Example:

Giselle is Mr. Kangta’s daughter. Now, he has been sitting in class X high school. Every morning, his friends always approached him to leave. Likewise when they go home, they will go home together. 

• Connecting words

Example:

All night, Johnny watched the Premier League football match on television. Therefore , he woke up late. As a result , he was late into the office. 

3. Development

The point is through the development of ideas or ideas by using supporting sentences.

4. Effective

That is, by compiling it using effective sentences, so that ideas or ideas can be conveyed appropriately.

Source:

Aflahah. (2012). Cohesion and Coherence in Discourse. OKARA, Vol 1, (7). 

 

Contravention is – In social life there are three forms of dissociative social interaction ranging from competition, convention, and conflict. Consider the meaning of these three forms of dissociative interaction along with the following examples in the social life of the community.

Contravention is a Form of Dissociative Social Interaction

Dissociative social interaction, also known as disintegrative or disjunctive interaction. Dissociative interaction itself is a social process which then leads to conflict and division. Either between individuals or between groups.

Not only conflict, there are several forms of dissociative social interaction which are also marked by physical contact, such as violence. This dissociative social interaction is further divided into three forms, namely competition, convention, and conflict. Below is a more complete explanation.

1. Forms of Dissociative Social Interaction Competition (Competition)

In general, competition as a process to achieve a victory or profit which is then carried out openly and closed without any elements of threats or elements of violence.

Meanwhile, with more significance in sociology, Soerjono Soekanto later revealed that competition is part of a social process. Which is carried out by individuals or groups and is characterized by seeking profit to become the center of attention. With procedures to sharpen social prejudice and without elements of threats and violence.

An example in the social life of society is competition in the industrial world by fast food companies, such as between KFC and MCd which are fiercely competitive.

Another example is the actions taken by political figures who compete in an area to then be able to sit in government offices in various ways in order to defeat their opponents.

2. Forms of Conflict Dissociative Social Interaction

Conflict is a social process that is usually carried out by individuals or groups which is also characterized by unequal mindsets and interests, which then lead to conflict and conflict.

This difference generally occurs because of a very fast social change. Conflict itself comes from the word “configure” which means hitting. So in the context of dissociative social interaction this is generally accompanied by violence, intimidation, rebellion, and various other forms of physical contact that occur between groups and individuals.

An easy example is in the school environment such as when going to a cultural parade. Of course from the many committees and the various opinions of each. For example, there are two camps, camp A which wants to raise the theme of the Province of Bali, while camp B wants Betawi Culture to be the parade this year.

Because they both defended their opinions, the two of them then fought each other using violence. Another example of conflict is the cultural conflict between the Dani and Moni tribes in Papua.

The disputes that have occurred repeatedly are themselves caused by the struggle for territory for the Trans Nabire road. In this conflict, each tribe then carried out a district war carrying arrows and bows that were ready to be fired at their opponents.

Another example of conflict is political conflict, namely during the 2017 meeting of DPR members to discuss the KPK’s inquiry rights. After the deputy chairman of the DPR, who at that time was Fahri Hamza, decided on the results of the plenary session, the Gerindra Party factions rushed to leave the room because they considered their decision to violate the rules.

3. Contravention Dissociative Social Interaction Forms

Contravention is a form of dissociative social interaction which is indicated by an attitude of rejection, dissatisfaction, distrust, and denial in society. Which then on the basis of this they carry out actions that cause divisions such as rebellion.

A real example in the social life of the community is the regent campaign period which is of course the dream of many people, not infrequently the election will then lead to tough competition. So that it justifies many ways, including convention.

Contraventions that are carried out by themselves can be by bringing down opponents by inciting the surrounding community, then providing incorrect information about opponents which is usually synonymous with negative news, as well as various other bad news.

Another, simpler example is that Nina often wins overall at school, but with this achievement her friends feel jealous and don’t believe that this achievement is actually the result of Nina’s learning. Based on this, Nino then intervened with his friends by spreading false information regarding Nina.

Types and Forms of Contraventions

1. Type of Contravention

Types of Contravention have various types, so to be able to know what these types are usually then closely related to a generation that exists in society.

This itself occurs on a rapid scale of change, for example in children with parents. With the increasing age of the child, the social environment is increasingly widespread, causing parents to worry that the child will then make various deviations from tradition.

In addition there are also types related to sex. This type itself concerns the relationship between husband and wife and also their role in society, the last is the parliamentary type which is a contradiction that concerns the relationship between the majority and also the minority.

2. Form of Contravention

Contravention can be in the form of social interaction and is characterized by the lack of certainty about a person’s self and feelings of dislike that he has until then hidden.

Contravention is a part of social interaction, contravention is included in a form of social process that exists between competition and conflict.

Meanwhile, contravention has various symptoms with uncertainty about a person’s self or plans and feelings of dislike which are then hidden, as well as hatred and doubt about a person’s personality.

Contravention can also refer to a view, belief, thought, and also a plan that has been put forward by a group or person.

Leopold von Wiese and Howard Becker, as one of the social figures then described that in essence there are five forms of contradiction in social life.

The forms and examples of these conventions include the following.

• Intensive, is a form that is carried out steadily or continuously and in practice this intensive intervention will then have a psychological impact on a social life.
• Secrecy, is a form of implementation carried out secretly or clandestinely in a society’s life.
• Tactical, is a form with a pattern of rules in its implementation so that in general this feature of convention is very difficult to get rid of.
• General, is a form that is done in general in a social life. The general conventions here provide more of a focus point on the impacts and the intensity of their occurrence.
• Simple is a form that is carried out within the scope of a small community. This convention itself does not have a broad impact because it is carried out between individuals or between groups in society

Contravention Impact

There are various impacts that are then produced in this convention, which include positive impacts and also negative impacts. The following is an explanation of the consequences caused by the convention.

1. Positive Impact

The result or positive impact of the existence of a convention, in general, is to encourage the occurrence of a social order in the social order.

For example, in scientific discussions and seminars on a particular problem, this difference of opinion is usually expected to see the weaknesses in an opinion so that choices are found in the course of a scientific process.

The positive impact of other conventions is as follows.

• Providing strong unity or solidarity, this condition will then occur in convention if there is a group of conventions.
• Be the driving effect of social change, with conventions that will directly change the policies and directives of conflicting parties.
• Giving a sense of belonging, this itself is due to the presence of behavioral contradictions in an individual or group which indirectly shows their love for culture and conditions in society.

2. Negative Impact

The consequences or negative impacts that occur due to this convention include the following;

• Encouraging the occurrence of social conflict, or the second negative impact of the presence of contradictions or encouraging the occurrence of other forms of social conflict which ultimately with this condition causes conflict in a social life.
• Obstructing the mobility process in the community, the mobilization process in the community itself will be hampered by the occurrence of contradictions, this process becomes so important in efforts to encourage progress to become part of social life
• Giving a sense of distrust in society, a sense of distrust in social life itself often occurs because of the conventions that are carried out in this social life. This in itself happens because the convention will give a sense of suspicion among the public.

Examples of Contraventions in Community Life

Examples of contravention in society, for example, in an event carried out through a demonstration by workers at a factory, this demonstration itself was carried out in an effort to straighten out government policies that were not in line with the expectations of the workers.

The cause of this contradiction is more driven by policy, so that it is easier to accommodate the number of masses. The following are other examples of conventions.

1. School Environment

An example of an event that is included in a convention at school is at an educational institution. For example, with differences of opinion among students who carry out discussion assignments.

The implementation of this discussion is generally carried out by these students which in general will provide quite fierce differences, even though the scope of this convention is classified as a positive contradiction, because it stimulates self-confidence in the students themselves.

2. Religion

Another example is the contradiction in religion. For example, regarding the event of establishing Eid Al-Fitr, there are many differences in the month of Shawwal that also occur among fellow Muslims, this condition itself can be said to be an example of contradiction in religion.

3. Politics

Examples of contravention in political institutions, for example, when there is a dispute that is usually carried out by members of the DPR in the MPR or DPR building. This conflict can be based on differences in party coalitions and different views to achieve various goals.

4. Everyday Life

Consciously or not, in essence, in everyday life, there are often contraventions, for example, neighbors who socialize provide untrue news (slander), slander in this condition is then called intensive contravention.

From the explanation above, it can be said that the cause of contradiction is the difference in stance between a certain group and other groups in a society, or it could also be between the stance of one society and another.

What is certain is that in a convention, if good directions are not given, it will encourage conflict in a community’s life. That’s all the info about conventions, hopefully useful.

Related Books

1. Social Process and Social Interaction in Education

Humans from birth in this world need the help of others. The assistance is in the form of visible activities that are visible to the five senses, as well as invisible assistance, or that is not visible to the five senses.

Both forms of assistance are continuously received by humans until the end of their lives, and the process of receiving this assistance is called the Social Process. When receiving help from other people, humans are linked through an activity, namely social interaction.

In this activity the position of the actors can be top-down, parallel, or other, ; This position change really depends on the situation that is being built at that time. One form of social building was in Education.

This book tries to explore related to the journey of Social Processes through the Social Interaction experienced by humans, especially in the corridor of Education. In order to get an overall picture, our insights are opened with the wilderness of theory so that we don’t get lost in understanding it.

Then in the final discussion of this book, it tries to relate it to contemporary problems in the world of education as a vehicle for social interaction for educators.

Reading this book is not everything, but at least it is an entry point to understanding humans with all kinds of dimensions, one of which is through education.

For this reason, in order to complete understanding and ground this macro theory, it is recommended for readers to also identify field problems at the practical level.

2. Sociology of Law

Laws are made to create peace and order in society. However, it often happens that many laws are not complied with properly by the people themselves. Why do people not comply with legal rules made for their own benefit?

To answer this question, experience in the sociology of law is absolutely necessary. Legal sociology is a branch of science that studies the reciprocal relationship between law and other social phenomena in society through empirical analysis.

By studying the sociology of law, it is possible to display and analyze as much as possible the actual conditions in society so that the law can be enforced effectively.

This book examines at length the basic and important principles contained in the study of the sociology of law. Everything is stated in a complete, coherent, and clear manner in 7 large chapters. In addition to theoretical descriptions, the discussion is accompanied by case examples, historical facts related to legal compliance in society, and case examples of the application of legal rules.

Everything is stated broadly and cohesively to illustrate the extent to which legal sociology has played a role in changing people’s attitudes to uphold positive legal rules in the country.

This quality book should be used as a handbook (reference) for law students, both at the undergraduate and graduate levels, law enforcement officials, legal practitioners and policy makers in the country.

Continental Shelf – Sinaumed’s must have known that on this planet Earth, 70% of its surface is water area. But even so, not all countries in the world have territorial waters in the form of seas. Meanwhile, countries that have territorial waters or seas can be categorized as coastal countries, namely a country whose land area is bordered by the sea. This coastal country can also be called an archipelagic country. Well, in this case, Indonesia is clearly included in the category of a coastal country, aka an archipelagic country, right ?

Since Indonesia has land and water areas that are both connected to many countries, of course there is an international law of the sea. The existence of the international law of the sea is not merely an ordinary law, you know, but is also expected to be able to regulate the country concerned with other countries regarding the maritime boundaries they have. Just a little trivia , it turns out that it took almost 30 years to discuss provisions relating to the international law of the sea! Well, in international law of the sea there is the term Continental Shelf. Then, what is the definition of the Continental Shelf? What is the history of the formation of rules regarding the Continental Shelf? Let’s look at the following reviews, so that Sinaumed’sunderstand these things!

What is the Continental Shelf?

Basically, the Continental Shelf is included in UNCLOS (United Nations Convention on The Law of The Sea) 1982, which has also been adopted into Law No. 17 of 1985 concerning Ratification of UNCLOS. So, in UNCLOS 1982, it states that the total sea area owned by the Indonesian state is around 5.9 million km², with an estimated area of ​​3.2 million km² of territorial waters and 2.7 million km² of waters in the Exclusive Economic Zone. This area does not include the area of ​​the Continental Shelf . Therefore, UNCLOS 1982 also stated that our country, Indonesia, is the largest archipelagic country in the world.

The geographical definition of the Continental Shelf is a gentle slope covered by shallow water that flows from the shoreline of a collection of land masses before dropping sharply into the ocean waters. There is another definition of the Continental Shelf according to geology, namely (that part of the ocean floor (oceans) that is connected to the coast of a continent and which is covered by shallow waters, which is less than 80-100 fathoms (490-600 feet, or 145-100 meters). 

Meanwhile, the definition of the Continental Shelf according to UNCLOS 1982 lies in Article 76, which states that the Continental Shelf of a coastal country (archipelago country) includes the seabed and the land beneath it, from areas under sea waters that lie outside the territorial sea area, which is a natural extension or continuation of its land territory to the edge of the sea on the edge of the continent or up to a distance of 200 nautical miles from the baseline where the width of the territorial sea of ​​a coastal state is measured, and the outer edge of the edge of the continent may not exceed that distance. 

So, if you look back at the 1982 UNCLOS which discussed the Continental Shelf, there will definitely be provisions regarding the limits of the Continental Shelf in each country, namely in the form of:

1. The seabed and subsoil outside the territorial sea to a depth of 200 meters, if it is used for the purpose of exploring and exploiting its natural resources.
2. The seabed and subsoil beyond the depth limit of 200 meters to where technological capabilities can explore and exploit its natural resources.

Methods of Determining the Continental Shelf According to UNCLOS III 1982

The determination of the outer limits of the Continental Shelf stated in UNCLOS 1982 is in the form of:

1. Based on the outermost fixed point, where the thickness of the sedimentary rock is at least 1% of the shortest distance between that point and the foot of the continental slope.
2. 60 nautical miles from the foot of the continental slope.
3. The outer limits of the Continental Shelf shall not exceed 350 nautical miles from the baselines from which the territorial limits are measured.
4. The outer limit of the Continental Shelf does not exceed 100 nautical miles from the 2500 m depth line.

Well, geophysically, the seabed that borders the coast generally consists of 3 separate parts, namely the ” continental shelf “, ” continental slope “, and ” continental rise “. A little extra, how to measure the area of ​​the Continental Shelf depends on the continental configuration found in coastal countries (archipelago countries). Therefore, the coastal state may set the outer limits of the Continental Shelf differently around its territory.

Continental Shelf Limits

Determination of Continental Shelf Limits

In determining the limit of the Continental Shelf, three conditions must be considered, namely:

1. Determination of the limit of the Continental Shelf is less than 200 nautical miles. The outer limit of the Continental Shelf is 200 nautical miles or squeezed by the Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ). This concept is called the Co-extensive Principle .
2. Delimitation of the Continental Shelf of more than 200 nautical miles. The outermost boundary of the Continental Shelf refers to the 4 terms of the outer edge of the continental margin.
3. Determination of the boundaries of the Continental Shelf which borders other coastal countries (archipelagic countries). The outer limits of the Continental Shelf refer to agreements between interested countries. This occurs when the distance between countries is less than 400 nautical miles. In order to determine the boundaries of the continental shelf in accordance with UNCLOS 1982, it is necessary to further understand the baselines, the toes of the continental slopes, the outer edges of the continental margins, and ridges .

Given these restrictions, a bathymetric measurement is required to obtain a depth line of 2,500 meters. After getting the depth line, compare it with the boundary 350 nautical miles from the base line, then choose the farthest limit of the Continental Shelf. In this case, each country is allowed to choose between these two criteria in order to get the maximum limit of the Continental Shelf.

a) Base Line

Based on UNCLOS 1982, the baseline is a starting line that connects the outermost points which are measured at the position of the low water line , where seaward boundaries such as the territorial sea and other marine jurisdictional areas can be measured. This area of ​​maritime jurisdiction can include the contiguous zone, the continental shelf, and the Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ).

Thus, the baselines can be used as a reference in drawing the outer boundaries of these territorial waters. The baseline consists of several types, namely:

• Normal baseline ( normal baseline )
• Straight baseline ( straight baseline )
• Baseline closing ( closing line )
• Archipelagic baseline _

b) Continental Slope Leg

If you look at the physical appearance of the foot of the continental slope, you will definitely see the following characteristics:

• A fold line ( joint line ) between two slopes or different surfaces.
• A connecting line between two distinct crustal structures.
• The upper surface represents the original structure of the continental margin crust.
• The subsurface represents the sedimentary structure of the corresponding continental margin crust.
• The top surface has a greater gradient than the lower surface.
• Surface deposits (subsurface) are located near basins on the seafloor.
• If there are more folds, then the deepest fold has the greatest probability as the foot of the intended continental slope.
• The gradient change of the slopes can vary.

c) Determination of the outer margins of the continental margins

To determine the outer edge of the continental margin, it can be done using the sedimentary rock approach or commonly referred to as geological/geomorphological criteria and depth distance criteria. However, there are also restrictions regarding the outer edge of the coast of a coastal state (archipelagic country), which may not exceed 350 nautical miles from the baselines, or around 100 nautical miles from a depth line of 2,500 m.

Indonesian Continental Shelf

Previously, it was briefly described that our country is the largest archipelagic country in the world. Yep, Indonesia even has maritime boundaries with 10 neighboring countries, namely Australia, Timor Leste, Papua New Guinea, Palau, the Philippines, Vietnam, Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore and India. In arranging maritime boundaries with the 10 neighboring countries, according to the 1982 Convention on the Law of the Sea alias UNCLOS, Indonesia has the right to determine the outer boundaries of its various maritime zones. In setting the maximum limits, it can be calculated from the baseline which is then determined as follows:

• Territorial sea ( territorial sea ), namely the zone part of the territory of the country as far as 12 nautical miles measured from the baselines.
• Additional zone ( contiguous zone ) , where the state has special jurisdiction as far as 24 nautical miles from the baselines .
• The Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ), namely a zone where the state has sovereign rights to exploit its natural resources above the seabed to sea level and on the seabed and the land below, a distance of 200 nautical miles measured from baselines .
• Continental Shelf, namely a zone where the state has sovereign rights to exploit natural resources on the seabed and the land beneath it: between 200 – 350 nautical miles (nautical mile ) or up to 100 nautical miles from a depth of 2,500 meters .

Well, in Indonesia, these boundaries will usually be given in the form of a list of geodetic coordinates in the form of a circle line and longitude.

Principles of Setting the Indonesian Continental Shelf

In terms of the Continental Shelf, Indonesia also has principles that must be considered. This principle is found in the Drafting of Academic Papers for the Draft Amendment/Replacement of Law Number 1 of 1973 concerning the Indonesian Continental Shelf, which includes:

1. Principle of Archipelagic State

Since Indonesia is considered the largest archipelagic country in the world, our country also has principles based on the Archipelago Concept. This conception describes the perspective of the Indonesian people in seeing their own country which consists of thousands of islands and is surrounded by vast waters located around and between them.

In the Conception of Archipelagic Insight, sees the sea as a unifying island that is scattered from Sabang to Merauke by following the equator. Therefore, both land and sea as a territorial unit do not have different status from a legal perspective, even though in reality they are indeed different and separate.

Thus, the Archipelagic Insight Principle sees the Indonesian Archipelago as a unified territorial unit. This also includes all legal implications for parts of the ocean space located around the Indonesian Archipelago, starting from the water column, the seabed and the subsoil, as well as the natural wealth contained therein.

2. The Principle of Optimizing Natural Resource Management

Sinaumed’s needs to know that the relatively large potential of marine resources has not been fully explored and exploited, especially on the Continental Shelf, so it is still very likely to be utilized. Now, with international recognition of sovereign rights over the Continental Shelf, the Republic of Indonesia needs to establish policies for managing its natural resources on a broader scale.

After all, this principle also emphasizes obtaining economic benefits rather than emphasizing the amount of physical production ( physical yield ), as long as it implements optimal policies.

3. Principles of Sustainable Development

Although on the Continental Shelf it is permissible to explore and exploit existing resources, it still has to pay attention to the principle of sustainable development ( sustainable development ). Why so? So that the potential of existing resources can be utilized for the benefit of present and future generations.

Therefore, in order to explore and exploit the Continental Shelf, environmental sustainability must be considered, including through efforts to prevent pollution of the marine environment. So, to apply this principle, all the parties concerned also remind each other. The effective way is that if there are parties that cause marine pollution, they must be subject to administrative sanctions in the form of fines, criminal sanctions, and compensation for the costs of recovery.

4. The Principle of Respect for the Rights of Other Countries

The existence of the Continental Shelf in Indonesia is definitely bordered by other countries, therefore Indonesia itself must also guarantee the rights and freedoms of other countries guaranteed under the High Seas legal regime. In the event that the Indonesian Continental Shelf faces or adjoins the Continental Shelf of other countries, the boundaries are determined based on an agreement through negotiations.

5. Principle of Legal Certainty

Through the existence of this Continental Shelf regulation, it is hoped that it will be able to create legal certainty, especially in terms of the utilization of the Continental Shelf itself. Even the existence of the law can also invite private investors, both foreign and domestic.

6. Principles of Participation, Transparency and Accountability

Arrangements for the utilization of the Continental Shelf must be able to accommodate the participation of all interested parties in a transparent and accountable manner. Therefore, any data and information regarding the Continental Shelf should be open for public access, except for data and information related to state secrets and security.

7. Principle of National Interest

The utilization of potential natural resources on the Continental Shelf is solely intended to protect national interests, including the strategic interests of national defense and security. Licensing will only be granted if it is beneficial to national interests and does not endanger the safety and security of the State. The results obtained must also benefit the national economy, support development for the welfare of the entire Indonesian nation and open up the possibility of technology transfer.

So, that’s a review of the Continental Shelf in coastal countries, including Indonesia. Is Sinaumed’s interested in studying Indonesian Maritime Law?

Source:

https://bphn.go.id/

Palupi, F. (2019). The existence of the continental shelf boundary line between Indonesia and Malaysia in Gosong Niger is viewed from international maritime law.

TAPAWIRA, W. (2014). METHODS OF DETERMINING THE CONTINENT SHIFT ACCORDING TO THE UNITED NATION CONVENTION ON THE LAW OF THE SEA 1982 (UNCLOS 1982) IN THE SOUTH CHINA SEA AGAINST CHINA, TAIWAN, THE PHILIPPINES, MALAYSIA, BRUNEI DARUSSALAM, INDONESIA AND VIETNAM. Journal of Law Science , 1-16.

Also Read!

• 5 Facts about the Mariana Trench
• Definition and Functions of the Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ)
• Geographical and Astronomical Location of Indonesia 
• Definition and History of Precipitation Process
• Definition, Process, and Classification of the Rock Cycle
• The 7 Largest Continents on Earth’s Surface, What Are They?
• Characteristics of Developed and Developing Countries
• Definition of Reforestation and Preparation for Movement
• 7 Causes of High Rainfall in Indonesia
• Definition and Process of the Occurrence of River Flow Patterns
• Get to know the 3 divisions of time in Indonesia

Contents of the agreement Roem Royen – The struggle of the Indonesian nation in the early days of independence was not easy. Since the reading of the text of the proclamation by Ir. Soekarno, who later became Indonesia’s first president, the people still had to work hard so that this independence would be recognized by foreign countries and freed from the clutches of the Dutch.

Even the nation’s leaders are still struggling with all their might so that the Netherlands can free its influence on Indonesia through diplomacy. One of the ways taken by national figures was to enter into an agreement with the Dutch. Of the many agreements created after democracy, the Roem Royen agreement became one of Indonesia’s forms of struggle.

Have you ever heard of the Roem Royen agreement? Do you know the contents of the Roem Royen agreement?

The Roem Royen Agreement became one of the many series of agreements and negotiations conducted between Indonesia and the Netherlands in post-independence history in 1945. Previously, Indonesia had actually taken this path of diplomacy twice through the Linggarjati Agreement which occurred in 1946 and the Renville Agreement in 1946. in 1948. However, betraying the agreement and often causing new losses for the Indonesian nation.

The Roem Royen negotiations were one of the negotiations that took a long time to formulate. These negotiations began on April 14 1949 and were only completed and agreed upon and signed on May 7 1949. This agreement was carried out at the Des Indes Hotel, Jakarta.

The name of the Roem Royen agreement was taken from the names of two figures who were the leaders of the delegations of the two parties, namely Indonesia and the Netherlands. At that time, Indonesia was represented by Mohamad Roem as the head of the delegation, while the Netherlands sent Herman van Roijen as a delegate for the negotiations.

The purpose of carrying out these negotiations and agreements is to resolve several issues regarding Indonesian independence diplomatically prior to the implementation of the Round Table Conference in the same year in The Hague. Negotiations proceeded with a lot. In fact, they had to present Mohammad Hatta and Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX.

At that time, Mohammad Hatta was in exile in Bangka and Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX was in Yogyakarta, he had to attend the agreement that took place in Jakarta. The presence of Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX was intended to reinforce his authority over the Government of the Republic of Indonesia in Yogyakarta. At that time Sri Sultan said, ‘Jogjakarta is de Republiek Indonesie’ or which means Yogyakarta is part of the Republic of Indonesia.

After that, finally Indonesia was able to return to running the wheels of its government which had previously been stopped due to the Dutch Military Aggression II. Government leaders who were held captive by the Dutch were finally released and returned to Yogyakarta.

At that time, Yogyakarta became the temporary capital of the government of the Republic of Indonesia. The Roem Royen Agreement also opened opportunities for Indonesia to hold the Round Table Conference (KMB) as one of the efforts to acknowledge Indonesian sovereignty from the Netherlands.

Then, what is the contents of the Roem Royen agreement? Does this benefit Indonesia? Or is it the other way around?

To answer the curiosity and questions above, let’s take a look at the explanation below regarding the contents of the Roem Royen agreement, background, characters, and after the agreement. Read on, ok!

Background to the Roem Royen Agreement

Even though they had proclaimed their independence on August 17, 1945, Indonesia’s situation at that time was still not safe. This is because the allied forces that are in one alliance, the Allied Forces Netherlands East Indies or AFNEI, under the leadership of Sir Philip Christisson came shortly after independence was proclaimed.

One of the aims of the arrival of the allies was to disarm the Japanese army and uphold and maintain a state of peace before handing over government to a civilian government. But apparently, the allied troops were piggybacked by the Netherlands using the name Netherlands Indies Civil Administration or NICA.

The Dutch government’s participation in the allied army had other intentions. The Dutch wanted to return to control of Indonesia which they had long controlled before the Second World War against Japan.

After this event, there were various struggles of the Indonesian people to maintain independence, including carrying out a series of negotiations or agreements with the Dutch which were violated several times.

One of the first agreements after the arrival of the Dutch back to Indonesia was the Linggajati agreement. The agreement and negotiations lasted a long time, carried out on November 15 1946, finally the agreement was ratified and signed by both parties on March 25 1947. However, the agreement did not last long, because the Netherlands violated the contents of the agreement by carrying out Dutch Military Aggression I on July 20, 1947.

The international world also condemned the Dutch action for violating the ceasefire sponsored by the UN Security Council and the Three Nations Commission (Belgium, the United States and Australia). America finally urged Indonesia and the Netherlands to hold serious negotiations.

After that, the Renville negotiations were finally held on December 8, 1947. Dutch Military Aggression I stopped. However, the Netherlands again violated the agreement. This time the Dutch Military Aggression II was carried out on December 19, 1948. The main target of the attack this time was the city of Yogyakarta, which at that time was the temporary capital of the Republic of Indonesia.

During the Dutch Military Aggression II, high-ranking Indonesian government officials were exiled outside Java. The high-ranking officials who were detained by the Dutch included the President of Indonesia, Soekarno, Vice President of Indonesia, Mohammad Hatta, along with several ministers.

However, Indonesia is not finished yet. Government control was temporarily transferred to the Emergency Government of the Republic of Indonesia or PDRI, which at that time was based in Bukittinggi, West Sumatra.

On the other hand, on March 1, 1949, there was a massive general attack by the Indonesian military against the Dutch. The city of Yogyakarta, which had previously been occupied by the Dutch, was finally able to be retaken by the Indonesian military. The city of Yogyakarta was also able to be defended for 6 hours as one of the proofs of Indonesia’s existence.

Dutch Military Aggression II which was then replied with a General Offensive on March 1, 1949 certainly harmed the name and position of the Netherlands in the eyes of international politics. The United Nations (UN), including many other countries, condemned the Dutch action.

Based on historical records which are also written on the official website of the Indonesian Ministry of Education and Culture, the background to the Roem Royen agreement was when the Dutch began to realize that their Military Aggression had no benefits whatsoever. This actually happened in reverse, because the Dutch military attack only made the resistance of the Indonesian people stronger and wider.

Apart from that, the international community also carried out and put pressure on the Netherlands for its attack on Indonesia which had proclaimed its independence. Thus, the Dutch also had no other choice but to follow the recommendations and directions of the United Nations or the United Nations to return to making agreements at the negotiating table.

Finally, negotiations were carried out by the Indonesian side and the Dutch side. The negotiations led by Merle Cochran were also held at the Des Indes Hotel, Jakarta. As the head of the delegation, the government of the Republic of Indonesia sent Mr. Mohammad Roem as his representative and the Netherlands sent Dr. Herman van Roijen as his delegate.

On May 7, 1949, the negotiations between the two countries finally ended. From the meeting, the content of Roem Royen’s agreement was that the government of the Republic of Indonesia, including the leaders who were detained, would be returned to Yogyakarta. In addition, the two parties also agreed to resume negotiations by holding the Round Table Conference or KMB in The Hague, Netherlands in the same year.

The decision regarding the participation of the government of the Republic of Indonesia in subsequent negotiations is certainly not without reasons and conditions. Because, the Indonesian government demanded that the Dutch troops who were around the Yogyakarta area withdraw and leave Yogyakarta free from all Dutch Military Aggression II attacks. After negotiations, the Dutch finally agreed and accepted these terms.

One month after the Roem Royen agreement was signed, on June 2, 1949 to be exact, the Yogyakarta area was evacuated from the Dutch army. This discharge is carried out under the supervision of the United Nations Commissioner for Indonesia or UNCI. The city of Yogyakarta was chosen as the location for the evacuation and release of prisoners because at that time Yogyakarta served as the temporary capital of Indonesia.

Figures in the Contents of the Roem Royen Agreement

After the Netherlands launched its Second Military Aggression against Indonesia, the UN Security Council finally again urged the Netherlands to return to negotiations and a ceasefire agreement with Indonesia. In the end the Dutch complied and the Roem Royen negotiations were held. These negotiations were held from 14 April 1949 to 7 May 1949 at the Des Indes Hotel, Jakarta.

Because at that time Indonesian officials were being exiled by the Dutch outside the island of Java, Indonesia finally sent Mohamad Roem as the leader of the delegation. Meanwhile, the Dutch sent Dr. J. Herman van Roijen (Royen) as the leader of the delegation. The negotiations were finally carried out on the initiative of the United Nations Commission for Indonesia (UNCI) or the UN Commission for Indonesia.

Apart from Mohamad Roem who was involved in the negotiations, several national figures also participated in the negotiations at the Des Indes Hotel, Jakarta. National figures as Indonesian delegates at the meeting included Ali Sastroamidjojo, Supomo, AK Pringgodigdo, Johannes Latuharhary, Ir. Juanda, and Johannes Leimena. Apart from that, Mohammad Hatta and Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX from Yogyakarta were suddenly presented.

Meanwhile on the Dutch side, they sent a delegation consisting of Dr. J. Herman van Roijen, dr. Van, Bloom, dr. Gede, Jacob, Dr. PJ Koets, Dr. Dieben, and van Hoogstraten Dan. On the other hand, UNCI was led by Merle Cochran who came from the United States and was assisted by Herremans from Belgium and Critchley from Australia as part of the Three Nations Commission.

During the meeting, UNCI recommended that exchange of statements be carried out from each party. This exchange of statements later became known as the Roem Roijen agreement or van Roijen-Roem Statements . The word Roem Royen itself is taken from the name of each country’s delegation leader.

The contents of the Roem Royen agreement were to discuss the handover of the Indonesian capital, Yogyakarta, to the Government of the Republic of Indonesia. As is known, previously Yogyakarta was controlled by the Dutch through Dutch Military Aggression II.

Contents of the Roem Royen Agreement

The Roem Royen negotiations lasted for almost a month. With quite a long time, there were various tough debates from both sides in defending their statement. However, the final contents of the Roem Royen agreement were successfully agreed upon and signed on May 7, 2949.

The contents of the Roem Royen agreement are about the agreement between the two parties, namely Indonesia and the Netherlands, to reach peace. The contents of the Roem Royen agreement are as follows.

1. Contents of the Roem Royen Agreement from the Indonesian Delegation

– The Indonesian government will order its armed forces and armed forces to stop all forms of guerrilla warfare activities.

– The Indonesian government requests that the Dutch government also attend the Round Table Conference in The Hague, Netherlands.

– The Government of Indonesia and the Government of the Netherlands will cooperate to restore security, order and maintain peace in each country.

2. Contents of the Roem Royen Agreement from the Dutch Delegation

– The Dutch government will agree to the Indonesian government’s request to return to Yogyakarta as the temporary capital.

– The Dutch government will release all Indonesian political prisoners without any conditions.

– The Dutch government will also agree on the matter of the Republic of Indonesia which is part of the United States of Indonesia.

– The Dutch government also agreed regarding the holding of the Round Table Conference which must be held as soon as possible after the government of the Republic of Indonesia returns to Yogyakarta.

3. Contents of the Roem Royen Agreement Agreed on by Both Parties

– The Netherlands will stop all activities and military activities and release all Indonesian political and war prisoners unconditionally.

– The Netherlands will hand over the sovereignty of the government of the Republic of Indonesia completely and unconditionally.

– The Government of the Netherlands and the Government of Indonesia will jointly establish an alliance on the basis of equal rights and voluntarily.

– The Netherlands will agree to the existence of the Republic of Indonesia as part of the United States of Indonesia.

– The Netherlands will return the activities of the government of the Republic of Indonesia to the city of Yogyakarta as the temporary national capital.

– The Armed Forces and Armed Forces of the Republic of Indonesia will stop all activities of guerrilla warfare.

– Indonesia and the Netherlands agreed to attend the next negotiations, namely the Round Table Conference which will be held in The Hague, Netherlands.

After the Events of the Roem Royen Agreement

Dutch Military Aggression II gave international pressure which had a serious impact on the Dutch government at that time. Evidently, finally the Netherlands agreed to new negotiations and resulted in the Roem Royen agreement. Apart from that, the Netherlands finally kept all the promises and agreements it had made with the Indonesian government.

In the end, the government of the Republic of Indonesia was returned to Yogyakarta on June 24, 1949. After that, the Dutch troops that had previously occupied Yogyakarta withdrew on July 1, 1949. Discussions regarding the cessation of hostilities between the two parties were discussed after the return of the Indonesian government to the temporary capital, Yogyakarta.

On July 6, 1949, President Soekarno and Mohammad Hatta were finally returned to Yogyakarta after being exiled outside Java. Whereas previously, Mohammad Hatta had appointed Sjafruddin Prawiranegara as President of the Emergency Government of the Republic of Indonesia (PDRI) on December 22, 1948.

After that, on August 3, 1949, a ceasefire between the Netherlands and Indonesia started from Java and Sumatra. Then, the Round Table Conference reached all agreements at the meeting, except for the Papua-Netherlands issue.

Conclusion

The Roem Royen Agreement was one of the results of a series of negotiations conducted between Indonesia and the Netherlands after the proclamation of independence on August 17, 1945. These negotiations were carried out as the aftermath of the Second Dutch Military Aggression attack against Indonesia in Yogyakarta.

Executed on April 14, 1949 and agreed on May 7, 1949, the contents of the Roem Royen agreement were regarding the cessation of war activities between Indonesia and the Netherlands and the complete transfer of sovereignty from the Dutch government to Indonesia. In addition, the contents of the Roem Royen agreement also stated that the Netherlands must release war and political prisoners, establish a joint alliance, and also attend the Round Table Conference in The Hague.

So, that’s a summary of the explanation regarding the contents of the Roem Royen agreement, background, characters, and after the agreement. Hope this is useful and helps #FriendsWithoutLimits to understand the contents of the Roem Royen agreement, ok!

If you want to find books about Indonesian history, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author Name: Raden Putri

Reference:

• h ttps://regional.kompas.com/read/2022/02/02/153355978/perjanjanan-roem-royen-latar-back-isi-dan-dampak?page=all
• https://www.detik.com/edu/detikpedia/d-5697724/isi-perundingan-roem-royen-dan-pernyataan-indonesia-belanda
• https://www.cnnindonesia.com/nasional/20210609163400-31-652298/History-perjantan-roem-royen-dan-figures-delegation
• https://adjar.grid.id/read/543452324/isi-dan-juang-dalam-perjanan-roem-royen?page=all
• https://tirto.id/History-perundingan-roem-royen-latar-back-isi-figures-delegasi-gauy

Presidential Decree 5 July – Presidential Decree 5 July 1959 is the contents of the first presidential decree in the history of the Republic of Indonesia. The decree was issued by President Soekarno in order to solve the problems that existed at that time. Presidential decrees need to be issued when a problem does not find a solution or is difficult to overcome.

Far decades later, namely after the 1998 Reformation that ended the New Order government, precisely on July 23, 2001, the 4th President of the Republic of Indonesia, Abdurrahman Wahid or who is also more familiar with the name Gus Dur, also issued a decree even though it was expressly rejected by the Assembly. People’s Consultative Assembly (MPR) at that time.

PRESIDENTIAL DECREE OF JULY 5, 1959

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), decrees or edicts are decisions (decree) or orders issued by heads of state, courts, and so on. The first decree in the history of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia was the Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959.

The contents of the 5 July 1959 Presidential Decree constituted an important point in the history of the Indonesian nation, especially in the government and political sectors. Then, what were the contents, reasons, background, objectives, and the impact of the decree issued by President Soekarno at that time?

History, Background, and Reasons for the 1959 Presidential Decree

The Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959 was the first decree issued by Indonesia’s first president, namely Ir. Sukarno. The background to the issuance of this decree was the failure of the Constituent Assembly in establishing a new constitution as a replacement for the 1950 Provisional Constitution (UUDS).

One of the reasons the 1950 Constitution needed to be replaced was because at that time there were frequent cabinet changes, which caused instability in the political field. On November 10, 1956, members of the constituent assembly began conducting trials to establish a new constitution. However, two years later, the UUD that is desired as a substitute has not yet been formulated.

Looking at the conditions at that time, President Soekarno delivered his address to the Constituent Assembly on April 22, 1959. The contents of the address were, Ir. Soekarno suggested reusing the 1945 Constitution. On May 30, 1959, the constituents voted. The result was that 269 votes voted in favor of the re-establishment of the 1945 Constitution and 199 votes voted against.

Even though many votes chose to agree, voting was carried out again because the number of votes did not meet the number of quorums or the minimum number of members who must be present at meetings, sessions, and so on. The second voting was held on 1 and 2 June 1959, which ultimately ended in failure. The constituent assembly was deemed unable to carry out its duties properly, so President Soekarno, with various considerations, decided to issue a presidential decree.

President Soekarno’s proposal to reuse the 1945 Constitution had reaped various pros and cons. There were those who accepted it but some who did not agree. The two major parties at that time, namely the PKI and PNI, accepted and agreed to Ir. Sukarno, but the Masyumi party refused. Those from the Masyumi party who refused were worried that if the 1945 Constitution was re-enacted, then Guided Democracy would also be implemented.

After going through lengthy negotiations, finally President Soekarno decided to issue a Presidential Decree on Sunday, July 5, 1959, at 17.00. Since the issuance of the Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959, the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia has used the Guided Democracy system of government.

Purpose and Content of Presidential Decree 5 July 1959

The failure of the Constituent Assembly to formulate a new Constitution was actually caused by the many interests of each group which gave rise to various upheavals in many areas. Thus, the situation in the country at that time was not conducive and quite chaotic because of these various upheavals.

Taking into account these poor conditions, President Sukarno finally decided to announce the Contents of the 1959 Presidential Decree on the basis of a national security law. So, the purpose of issuing the 1959 Presidential Decree was to save the country in accordance with staatsnoodrecht or the law of a state of danger to the state.

With the announcement of the contents of the 1959 Presidential Decree, the period of Liberal or Parliamentary Democracy in Indonesia officially ended, followed by the Guided Democracy period.

Quoting from the book History of Indonesian Law (2021) written by Sutan Remy Sjahdeini, the contents of the 1959 Presidential Decree are briefly as follows:

• Dissolving the Constituent Assembly.
• Re-enactment of the 1945 Constitution.
• The 1950 Constitution is no longer valid.
• The Provisional People’s Consultative Assembly (MPRS) and the Provisional Supreme Advisory Council (DPAS) were formed.

The contents of the 1959 Presidential Decree in its original format are as follows:

PRESIDENTIAL DECREE

With the grace of God Almighty,

WE ARE THE PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA/COMMANDER OF THE ARMY

Hereby solemnly declare:

Whereas the recommendation of the President and the Government to return to the 1945 Constitution which was conveyed to all Indonesian people by the President’s mandate on 22 April 1959 did not obtain a decision from the Constituent Assembly as stipulated in the Provisional Constitution;

Whereas in connection with the statement that most of the members of the Constitutional Assembly did not attend the trial any longer. It is no longer possible for the Constituent Assembly to complete the tasks entrusted to it by the people;

That such a thing creates constitutional conditions which jeopardize the unity and safety of the State, the nation and the Nation, as well as hinder overall development in order to achieve a just and prosperous society;

That with the support of the majority of the Indonesian people and driven by our own convictions, we were forced to take the only way to save the Proclamation State;

That we believe that the Djakarta Charter dated 22 June 1945 animates the 1945 Constitution and is an integral part of that Constitution,

So on the basis of the above,

WE ARE THE PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA/COMMANDER OF THE ARMY SUPREME DECIDES the dissolution of the Constituent Assembly;

To stipulate that the 1945 Constitution is again valid for the entire Indonesian nation and for all of Indonesia’s bloodshed as of the date of the stipulation of this decree and the Provisional Constitution is no longer valid.

The establishment of a Provisional People’s Deliberative Assembly, consisting of members of the People’s Representative Council plus delegates from the regions and groups and the formation of a Provisional Supreme Advisory Council will be convened in the shortest possible time.

Stipulated in Djakarta on 5 July 1959

On behalf of the Indonesian people

President of the Republic of Indonesia/Supreme Commander of the Armed Forces

SOEKARNO

Impact of Presidential Decree 5 July 1959

The 1959 Presidential Decree had a fairly broad impact on changes to the constitutional system and the political map of Indonesia. Adapted from the SMA Learning Module: Indonesian History (2020) compiled by Mariana, the impact of the 1959 Presidential Decree is as follows:

1. The Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959 ended the duties of the cabinet, parliament and the period of the parliamentary system itself.
2. The Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959 ended the period of Parliamentary Democracy in Indonesia and at the same time resulted in a period of government by political parties.
3. The end of the period of government by political parties with the Presidential Decree of 5 July 1959 made the role of parliament slowly held directly by President Soekarno which gave birth to a system of government, namely Guided Democracy.

PRESIDENTIAL DECREE 23 JULY 2001

On July 23, 2001, an event occurred which has now become history in the course of politics and government in Indonesia. The 4th President of the Republic of Indonesia, namely Abdurrahman Wahid or also known as Gus Dur, issued a presidential decree or decree on July 23, 2001.

Then, what is the chronology, content, purpose, and impact of the decree?

The edict issued by President Gus Dur on 23 July 2001 or the post-reform era is the second decree in the history of government in the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. Much earlier, on July 5, 1959, Ir. Soekarno, who was the first President of the Republic of Indonesia, also did the same thing as explained in detail in the previous discussion.

History, Background, and Reasons for Presidential Decree 23 July 2001

KH Abdurrahman Wahid has served as the 4th President of the Republic of Indonesia since October 20, 1999, replacing BJ Habibie who was previously appointed as president after the fall of Suharto as a result of the 1998 Reformation movement which also ended the power of the New Order regime.

Apart from being known as a smart person, Gus Dur was also a unique figure and often sparked controversy, including when he was president. Many of the policies issued by Gus Dur were considered unpopular, so they often faced opposition from various parties, including the Republic of Indonesia’s House of Representatives (DPR).

Gus Dur’s initial policy that sparked a polemic was the policy of disbanding the Ministry of Information and the Ministry of Social Affairs. According to President Gus Dur, the two departments caused more losses because in practice it was considered that more bad things were done instead of bringing benefits to the Indonesian people.

Greg Barton in Gus Dur’s Biography (2010) writes that the closure of the two departments was considered controversial and caused President Gus Dur to lose popularity in certain circles. The DPR issued a strong reaction because it felt that Gus Dur had not consulted before issuing this policy.

As a result, the DPR issued interpellation rights which were used to ask President Gus Dur for information. On November 18, 1999, in front of members of the DPR, Gus Dur was adamant that he would not retract what he had decided. In fact, Gus Dur called the House of Representatives “Kindergartens”.

Quoted from the Cabinets of the Republic of Indonesia from the Beginning of Independence to Reformation (2003) by PNH Simanjuntak, the remarks made by Gus Dur were considered to have insulted the image of the DPR. Since that incident, the feud between the president and parliament has intensified.

Many subsequent series of incidents also contributed to exacerbating relations between Gus Dur and the DPR so that the People’s Consultative Assembly (MPR), which at that time was led by Amien Rais, decided to hold a Special Session (SI) to revoke the presidential mandate.

Purpose and Content of Presidential Decree 23 July 2001

The plan to remove Gus Dur was met with resistance from various parties, especially from the Nahdliyin circle, because the DPR and MPR were deemed unable to prove Gus Dur’s guilt in a constitutional way, including the Buloggate and Bruneigate issues.

In essence, President Gus Dur’s goal in issuing the edict a few hours before the SI MPR was to maintain the country’s stability at a time when the political situation was getting worse. Gus Dur did not want turmoil and the potential for civil war to arise by holding back hundreds of thousands of his supporters from going to Jakarta.

Past midnight, on Monday 23 July 2001 at exactly 01.05 WIB in the morning, President Gus Dur issued a statement at the Merdeka Palace, Jakarta. In his speech, President Gus Dur stated that he would implement the presidential decree.

Even though this was not a pleasant action, as president, Gus Dur had to take action for the safety of the country. Quoted from Gus Dur’s Last Days at the People’s Palace (2009) written by Andreas Harsono and friends, President Gus Dur requested that the TNI together with the Police secure the implementation of the decree.

The full contents of the July 23, 2001 Presidential Decree read by Yahya C. Staquf who is one of the Spokesmen for President Gus Dur read:

• Freezing the MPR and DPR.
• Returning sovereignty to the hands of the people and taking action as well as setting up the bodies needed to hold elections within one year.
• Saving the total reform movement from various obstacles from the New Order elements by freezing the Golkar Party while waiting for a decision from the Supreme Court.

The contents of the 1959 Presidential Decree in its original format are as follows:

Declaration of the President of the Republic of Indonesia

After observing and paying close attention to the political developments which have led to a political deadlock due to the protracted constitutional crisis which has exacerbated the economic crisis and hindered efforts to uphold the law and eradicate corruption caused by power-politic disputes which no longer heed the rules of law.

If this is not prevented, it will soon destroy the establishment of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia, then with confidence and responsibility to save the country and nation and based on the wishes of the majority of the Indonesian people, we as the Head of State of the Republic of Indonesia are forced to take extraordinary steps by announcing:

1. Freezing the People’s Consultative Assembly of the Republic of Indonesia and the People’s Representative Council of the Republic of Indonesia.
2. Returning sovereignty to the people and taking action and setting up a body to hold general elections within one year.
3. Saving the total reform movement from being hampered by New Order elements, by freezing the Golkar Party while waiting for the decision of the Supreme Court.

For this reason, we order all ranks of the TNI and Polri to secure steps to save the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia and call on all Indonesian people to remain calm and carry out their socio-economic life as usual. May God Almighty bless the country and people of Indonesia.

Jakarta, 22 July 2001

President of the Republic of Indonesia/Supreme Commander of the Armed Forces

KH Abdurrahman Wahid

Impact of Presidential Decree 23 July 2001

Shortly after the announcement was issued, the chairman of the MPR, who at that time was Amien Rais, firmly rejected the presidential decree. Based on the proposal from the DPR, the MPR accelerated the time for holding the special session. This became the culmination of the fall of KH Abdurrahman Wahid from the presidency.

During the Special Session, the MPR stated that President Abdurrahman Wahid had violated the MPR Decree No. VII/MPR/2000, by appointing Komjen (Pol.) Chairuddin Ismail as interim caretaker for the position of National Police Chief.

Furthermore, in the MPR Special Session on 23 July 2001 the MPR chose Megawati Soekarnoputri as president to replace President Abdurrahman Wahid based on the MPR Decree Number III of 2001. The next day Hamzah Haz, general chairman of PPP was elected vice president of Indonesia. With the election of Megawati Soekarnoputri as president and Hamzah Haz as vice president, President Gus Dur’s power ended.

Also read:

• Definition of Presidential Government System
• Main Duties of the President: Terms and Powers
• Duties and Authorities of the President According to the 1945 Constitution
• Suharto Biography: The 2nd President of Indonesia
• The Rengasdengklok Event: Its Impacts and Benefits

Contents and History of the Formulation of the Jakarta Charter – Pancasila which until now has been used as the ideology and basis of the Indonesian state and as we know that the values ​​of Pancasila consist of 5 precepts made by Ir. Soekarno to be precise on June 1, 1945 through his spontaneous speech in front of BPUPKI members.

However, precisely in mid-1945 national figures such as Moh Yamin, Soepomo, and Soekarno formulated the basic version of their respective countries which in the end also agreed on a formula known as the Jakarta Charter. However, in its development the Jakarta Charter is no longer used. This is because the Jakarta Charter has caused historical controversy to this day.

What is the Jakarta Charter? And what is the history of its formation, formulation, background, and contents of the Jakarta Charter? Check out the following information

Definition of the Jakarta Charter

The Jakarta Charter is a form of historical document which was the result of a cross-compromise between Islamic parties and nationalist or nationalist parties that was formed within the BPUPKI or the Investigative Agency for the Preparatory Work for Indonesian Independence and was used to become a bridge for differences in religion and the existing state .

The Jakarta Charter is also often referred to as the Jakarta Charter, this is because the Jakarta Charter is a charter or a text drawn up at a Committee meeting of nine or 9 Indonesian figures to be precise on June 22, 1945.

The Committee of Nine which was formed on 1 Jun 1045. It was formed from nine figures consisting of the following.

• Ir. Sukarno as chairman of the Committee of Nine
• Drs. Moh. Hatta as deputy chairman of the Committee of Nine
• Mr. Achmad Soebardjo as a member of the Committee of Nine
• Mr. Muhammad Yamin as a member of the Committee of Nine
• KH. Wachid Hasyim as a member of the Committee of Nine
• Abdul Kahar Muzakir as a member of the Committee of Nine
• Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso as a member of the Committee of Nine
• H. Agus Salim as a member of the Committee of Nine
• Mr. AA Maramis as a member of the Committee of Nine

The Jakarta Charter itself was drafted because of Jakarta’s great territory, and includes five cities and one district consisting of Central Jakarta, West Jakarta, East Jakarta, North Jakarta, South Jakarta, and the Thousand Islands. Therefore, the province of DKI Jakarta was formed through the form of the Jakarta Charter and established Suwiryo as the first governor of the province of DKI Jakarta until 1947.

History of the Formulation of the Jakarta Charter

At the beginning of the history of the Jakarta Charter, it was started with the formation of the Investigative Body for Preparatory Work for Indonesian Independence, or BPUPKI for short. At the time the BPUPKI was formed, it had the task of preparing the Indonesian nation for its independence process to become the Republic of Indonesia.

After it was formed, BPUPKI members began to express their opinions regarding various values ​​that could form the basis of the Indonesian state which was later formed and referred to as Pancasila. In the formulation of the Pancasila, there are several text formulations put forward by three figures, namely Muhammad Yamin, Soepomo, and Soekarno.

1. Pancasila according to Muhammad Yamin on May 29, 1945

Pancasila according to Muhammad Yamin consists of five values, which consist of:

• National fairy
• Human fairy
• Divine fairy
• Citizen fairy
• People’s welfare

2. Pancasila according to Soepomo on May 30, 1945

Pancasila according to Soepomo consists of five values, which consist of:

• Unity
• familial
• Consensus or democracy
• discussion
• Social justice

3. Pancasila according to Ir. Sukarno on June 1, 1945

Pancasila according to Ir. Soekarno consists of five values, which consist of:

• Indonesian Nationality
• Internationalism or fairy humanity
• Consensus or democracy
• People’s welfare
• Belief in the one and only God

With three different opinions, a small committee was formed which had the task of compiling the formulation of Pancasila which would be used as the basis of the state and included in the 1945 Constitution. The small committee was called the Committee of Nine which consisted of nine national figures.

The formulation of Pancasila in the Jakarta Charter

In perfecting the various proposals issued by the three figures to be used in making the basis of the Pancasila state, a Committee of Nine was formed which had duties outside of the official meeting in formulating a draft preamble to the basic law.

The members of the Committee of Nine consist of nine figures which consist of the nine figures described above.

The task of the Committee of Nine was to compile a draft text that would be used for the preamble of the basic law which was then called by Mr. Muhammad Yamin as the Jakarta Charter which is known today.

The Jakarta Charter contains the basic formulation of the state which is the result that was first agreed upon in the session. The formulation of the state foundation contained in the text of the Jakarta Charter consists of the following.

• Belief in God with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents.
• Just and civilized humanity.
• The unity of Indonesia.
• Population led by wisdom in deliberations or representatives.
• Social justice for all the people of Indonesia.

The manuscript which was the result of the work of the Committee of Nine that was formed was then accepted by BPUPKI to become the Draft Preamble to the Basic Law of the Independent Indonesian State on July 14, 1945 to be precise.

After the independence of the Indonesian state, the formulation of the Pancasila state basis was then ratified by the PPKI in a session that took place on August 18, 1945 as the basis of the philosophy of the Indonesian state.

However, there have been changes made by removing the part of the sentence “with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents”. The deletion of this sentence contained in the first precept of Pancasila was carried out on the grounds that there were objections from adherents of various religions other than Islam and for the sake of maintaining the unity of the plural Indonesian nation.

The text of the Jakarta Charter which contains the basic formulation of the state which was amended by the PPKI and then ratified to become part of the preamble to the 1945 Constitution and is known today as the preamble. After the ratification of the Jakarta Charter to become part of the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution or the 1945 Constitution to be precise on August 18, 1945, Pancasila has become the ideology of the republic of Indonesia.

The Jakarta Charter itself also contained various lines of rebellion against imperialism, capitalism and fascism, and was the starting point for the formation of the Republic of Indonesia. The Jakarta Charter itself, which continues to grow older than the San Francisco Peace Charter formed on 26 June 1945 and the Tokyo Capitulation which occurred on 15 August 1945, is a source of sovereignty that radiates the Proclamation of Independence and the Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia.

Background to Changes in the Contents of the Jakarta Charter

The Jakarta Charter is a result issued from a meeting held by the Committee of Nine, in the context of welcoming the independence of the Republic of Indonesia. The contents of the Jakarta Charter outline itself regarding the direction and goals of the state as well as the initial draft of the basic formulation of the Indonesian state, which until now is known as Pancasila.

In the formulation process, the ratification which had to be carried out immediately was faced with several debates that occurred between nationalist groups and Islamic groups in Indonesia. Where, based on the opinions of national groups regarding the contents of the Jakarta Charter, it cannot be a reflection of the diversity that exists in Indonesian society.

The change actually occurred in the first basic formulation of the precepts in the text of the Jakarta Charter. The initial formulation containing the various precepts listed in Pancasila itself was originally contained in the contents of the Jakarta Charter text, but at a meeting of the Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence or PPKI on August 18, 1945, it was formulated that the first precepts contained in Pancasila would be changed.

Based on Muhammad Nurudin (2019: 153) in his book entitled Scraping the Ink in the Green Valley, he stated that the background to the change in the basic formulation of the state in the first precepts of the Jakarta Charter according to Mohammad Hatta was because some representatives of other religions felt objections to this formulation. The first formulation of the existing precepts reads “Godhead with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents”.

With the existence of several parties who objected to the formulation of the first precepts, therefore there was a change in the first precept to “Belief in the One and Only God” based on the results of deliberations conducted with the aim of protecting the Indonesian nation and maintaining the existing relationship between the founding figures of the Indonesian nation so that no split.

The following are various factors that influenced the change in the basic formulation of the state in the first precepts in the Jakarta Charter text based on the opinion of Mohammad Hatta, as follows.

• The first factor, the people of Indonesia have diverse and different religious backgrounds and beliefs from one another. Therefore, the formulation which reads “Godhead with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents” cannot be representative of the entire society in Indonesia.
• The second factor, as a founding figure of the Indonesian nation, he made an effort to accommodate various aspirations and opinions, especially from representatives of Eastern Indonesia where adherents of other religions exist in Indonesia.
• The third factor, the changes made to the formulation of the first precepts of the Jakarta Charter were carried out in order to maintain the integrity of the Indonesian nation and strengthen the unity and unity that is owned as the Indonesian nation.

Contents of the Jakarta Charter 

The contents of the Jakarta Charter consist of four paragraphs which later became the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution, apart from that the Jakarta Charter is also included in five points, one of which was later replaced with “Belief in One Supreme God” in Pancasila.

The following is the contents of the Jakarta Charter:

That in fact independence is the right of all nations, and because of that, colonialism in the world must be abolished, because it is not in accordance with humanity and justice. 

And the struggle for the movement for Indonesian Independence has come to a happy moment when we are safely bringing the Indonesian people to the gates of the Indonesian State, which is free, united, just and prosperous.

Thanks to the Grace of Allah Almighty, and driven by this noble desire, we can live a free national life. Therefore the Indonesian people hereby declare their independence.

Then, from that, forming an Indonesian State Government that protects the entire Indonesian nation and all of Indonesia’s bloodshed, and in order to promote public welfare, educate the nation’s life and participate in carrying out world order based on freedom, eternal peace and social justice, the independence of the Indonesian nation was drafted. that is in a Basic Law of the Indonesian State, which was formed in a state structure of the Republic of Indonesia which has people’s sovereignty, based on: divinity, by making it obligatory to carry out Islamic law for its adherents; according to just and civilized humanity, Indonesian unity and democracy led by wisdom in representative deliberations, as well as by realizing social justice for all the Indonesian people.

Djakarta, 22-6-1945

Ir. Sukarno

Drs. Mohammad Hatta

Mr. AA Maramis

Abikusno Tjokrosujoso

Abdulkahar Muzakir

A.Salim 

Mr. Achmad Subardjo

Wachid Hasjim

Mr. Muhammad Yamen

Furthermore, during the drafting of the Basic Law which took place at the Second Session of the BPUPKI. The existing formulation of the Jakarta Charter is used as a preamble or preamble. Then, at the ratification of the 1945 Constitution or the 1945 Constitution on August 18, 1945 which was carried out by PPKI, the term Preamble changed to the Preamble to the Basic Law or UUD.

The initial point which previously contained a person’s obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents, was changed to Belief in the One and Only God by Mohammad Hatta who took the suggestion from AA Maramis after consulting with Teuku Muhammad Hasan, Kasman Singodimedjo and Ki Bagus Hadikusumo.

The text of the Jakarta Charter itself was written using the Republic spelling which was then signed by Ir. Soekarno, Mohammad Hatta, AA Maramis, Abikoesno Tjokrosoejoso, Abdul Kahar Muzakir. Achmad Soebardjo, Wahid Hasjim, Muhammad Yamin, and HA Salim.

The development of the Jakarta Charter was then continued in a Presidential Decree which took place on July 5, 1959. In the Presidential Decree, the Jakarta Charter stated that it had the soul of the 1945 Constitution and became a continuum with the Constitution. The House of Representatives that existed at that time accepted this by acclamation which occurred on July 22, 1959.

The GR 1966 DPR Memorandum which discussed the sources of the Republic of Indonesia’s legal order was improved and made into MPRS decision Number XX/MPRS/1966, in which the decision reaffirmed that the Jakarta Charter which was the result of the formulation issued on June 22, 1945 embodied the values Law or the 1945 Constitution and became a continuum with the constitution.

Amendments to the Contents of the Jakarta Charter 

After being read out at the proclamation of Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945, there was a change in the contents of the Jakarta Charter.

This happened in the afternoon right after the reading of the proclamation of independence, where the Vice President of Indonesia at that time, Mohammad Hatta, was visited by a representative or envoy from the Japanese navy named Maeda.

At the meeting, Maeda said that several representatives of Protestants and Catholics who came from areas controlled by the Japanese Navy had objections to the part of the sentence that contained the basic formulation of the state in the text of the Jakarta Charter.

The formula sentence referred to in the Jakarta Charter has the sound “. .. with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents ”.

In responding to the objections of the Protestant and Catholic representatives, Mohammad Hatta invited several figures such as Ki Bagus Hadikusumo, KH Wahid Hasyim, Mr. Kasman Singodimedjo, and Mr. Teuku Mohammad Hasan to hold a meeting before the PPKI trial begins.

At the preliminary meeting, a decision was issued to remove the sentence part of the Jakarta Charter and replace it with the sentence Belief in One Almighty God.

This is done in order to prevent divisions among Indonesian people who consist of various beliefs within them. After this change, the name of the Jakarta Charter was changed to the Preamble to the 1945 Constitution, which was then re-officially re-enacted by PPKI on August 18, 1945.

Comparison of the Contents of Pancasila

The contents of Pancasila as conveyed in the Jakarta Charter are as follows.

• Godhead, with the obligation to carry out Islamic law for its adherents
• Just and civilized humanity
• the unity of Indonesia
• Population led by wisdom in representative deliberations
• Social justice for all the people of Indonesia

The contents of Pancasila which were then perfected and re-established on August 18, 1945, are as follows.

• Belief in the one and only God
• Just and civilized humanity
• the unity of Indonesia
• Population led by wisdom in representative deliberations
• Social justice for all the people of Indonesia

Read more articles on  “Contents and History of the Formulation of the Jakarta Charter”  :

Connotation is – The words connotation and denotation are definitely terms that are often heard and are familiar to our ears, of course, because these two words will appear in Indonesian subject matter. Maybe You is still confused about the terms connotation and denotation. These two terms refer to the meaning contained in a word.

We as humans certainly use language to serve as a communication tool in interacting with other humans in everyday life. In communicating, someone sometimes uses sentences that have figurative meanings or not true meanings.

Connotation is often used to beautify a sentence of expression on a word. We can find this in literary works such as rhymes, poems, short stories and others. In this article, we will discuss more fully about connotation. So, see this article to the end, You.

Definition of Connotation

Connotative meaning is a type of meaning in which stimulus and response contain emotional values. This meaning can arise because the speaker wants to express feelings of approval, disapproval, pleasure, displeasure and so on to the listener or speaker.

Of course, the choice of connotative words must be careful and not to choose the wrong word. For example, the word ‘thin’ to replace the word ‘slender’, in a complementary context, this kind of error is very easy to spot. However, it will be difficult if the difference in meaning between words that are synonymous, but have a large difference in meaning in a particular context.

The use of this connotation itself is often found in short stories, rhymes, poems, songs, or some works of art, especially other literary works. Connotation also aims to beautify an expression sentence.

Characteristics of Connotative Meaning

To be able to understand connotation, here are some of the characteristics of connotation that you need to know:

1. The connotative meaning occurs when the word has a sense value, either positive or negative. If it doesn’t have a taste value, it can also be called a neutral connotation.
2. The connotative meaning of a word may differ from one community group to another. In accordance with the views of life and norms that exist in the community.
3. The connotative meaning can change from time to time.

Connotative Meaning Function

The connotation used in a piece of writing certainly has its function. The following are the functions of connotative meaning or connotative words that You needs to know:

1. To embellish a story
2. To soften a speech
3. To show dislike to others
4. To show anger to others
5. To curse others for their emotional reactions
6. To increase the intensity of meaning.

Type of Connotation

The connotation itself has 2 types, namely good connotation and bad connotation. Here is an explanation.

Good Connotation

Good connotations are words that have good meaning and are considered by some people to have good taste, familiar, polite and high value. However, this good connotation is also divided into two, namely high connotation and low connotation.

Bad Connotation

Bad connotations are words that some people consider to have a sense of being impolite, inappropriate, rude and could offend other people. Bad connotation itself is divided into five namely dangerous connotation, inappropriate connotation, unpleasant connotation, harsh connotation, and hard connotation.

Examples of Connotation Words

So that you are not confused and it is easier to understand the word connotation, then you can see the example of the word connotation below.

1. Rini is a lighthearted and kind child. The word ‘light hand’ means a child who is diligent and likes to help.
2. Mutiara is the golden child in her family. The word ‘golden child’ has the meaning of the most beloved child.
3. Due to her big head, Reni is shunned by her friends. The word ‘big head’ has a conceited meaning.
4. The official is looking for a scapegoat to keep his post. The word ‘scapegoat’ has the meaning of someone who is blamed.
5. If you have a problem, it’s better to solve it with a cold heart. The word ‘cold heart’ means patient
6. Pak Bambang becomes the police’s right-hand man to help solve kidnapping cases. The word ‘right hand’ has the meaning of a confidant
7. Many heroes have died on the battlefield. The word ‘aborted’ means to die.
8. An ink coolie doing news coverage. The word ‘ink worker’ means journalist.
9. The instant success he got made him forget the land. The word ‘forget the mainland’ has the meaning of being arrogant or forgetting oneself.
10. The workers feel that the company they work for only turns them into cash cows. The word ‘dairy cow’ has the meaning of a person who is used by other people to gain an advantage.
11. After visiting the RT’s house, Riri became the talk of the town. The word ‘fruit of the lips’ has the meaning of material for discussion.
12. With a heavy heart, the boss fired his employee because of the mistake he made. The word ‘heavy heart’ has the meaning of not having the heart.
13. The perpetrators of the theft have been put in jail. The word ‘iron bars’ has the meaning of prison.
14. You have to be tolerant of your failures. The word ‘broad’ has the meaning of accepting steadfastly.
15. Yuyun became an alone child because her parents died. The word ‘alone’ has the meaning of not having a family.
16. Mother brought lots of souvenirs after recreation. The word ‘handicap’ has the meaning of souvenirs.
17. Putri is known as a geek at her school. The word ‘bookworm’ has the meaning of a person who likes to study or read books.
18. Office rats should not be given a light sentence. The word ‘office rat’ means corruptor.
19. During the pandemic, many traders were forced to go out of business. The word ‘bankrupt’ means bankrupt.
20. Naufal decided to hang up his racket. The word ‘hang racket’ has the meaning of stopping or retiring in badminton.
21. Father works hard to pay for his children to go to school. The word ‘work hard’ has the meaning of working hard.
22. Devi always uses shortcuts when facing exams. The word ‘shortcut’ has the meaning of using bad methods or cheating.
23. Deni was ordered to leave the house because he was caught stealing his friend’s belongings. The word ‘pick up’ means to go.
24. Devi is the flower of the village because of her pretty face. The word ‘village flower’ means the most beautiful woman in the village.

The Difference between Connotation and Denotation

If you have ever heard the word connotation, You will definitely know what is meant by denotation. Maybe some people will find it difficult to distinguish between these two things. However, the two have very visible differences.

Denotation is the real meaning. Denotation also means the meaning as it is attached to an object. In other words, denotation has an original meaning, does not evoke feelings either negative or positive, and has a general nature.

In addition, denotation also has an explicit and objective meaning based on objects that are seen and captured by the five human senses.

So, in simple terms, the word connotation has no real meaning and the word denotation has real meaning.

Examples of Denotation Words

If you have previously given examples of connotation words, so that you can easily distinguish between them, you also need to know some examples of denotation words.

1. Today’s weather is very hot. The word ‘hot’ means high temperature.
2. The glass fell and shattered. The word ‘destroyed’ means broken into small pieces.
3. Boni picked rambutan fruit that was still green. The word ‘green’ means young.
4. The Ciliwung River overflowed due to heavy rains. The word ‘overflow’ has the meaning of overflowing with many.
5. As a child, Wendi had a habit of biting his fingers. The word ‘biting the finger’ has the meaning of putting the finger in the mouth and biting it.
6. Uncle has a dairy cow. The word ‘dairy cow’ means a cow whose milk is taken.
7. Security was working until early morning. The word ‘early morning’ means early in the morning.
8. Rino’s hand caught fire while playing with fire. The word ‘playing with fire’ has the meaning of playing with fire.
9. My sister sat in a soft chair made of foam. The word ‘soft chair’ means a comfortable chair to sit on.
10. After playing, Dian rolled up the mat and put it back. The word ‘roll mat’ has the meaning of rolling up mats, mats are webbing that is commonly used for sitting mats.

So, that’s a complete explanation of connotation along with the difference between it and denotation. As previously explained, connotations are often used in literary works, so if you want to find article related to literature, you can get them at Sinaumedia.com .

Conductor or conductor of electricity is a material that easily conducts electric current. The nature of its conduction is to move electrons from one electrical point to another easily. The main use of electrical conductors is to carry electric current.

Conductors have atomic nuclei with electrons that are loosely bound and can move freely. The process of conducting electricity occurs when positively charged materials are connected to electrical conductors. The interaction that arises is the transfer of electrons from electrical conductors to positively charged materials.

The easy flow of electric current through electric conductors is due to the fact that the content of electric charges easily moves when an electric field arises, even in very small amounts. The electric field in the conductor is zero as long as it is not electrified.

Conductor and Semiconductor Materials

Definition of Conductor Materials

In everyday life, humans often use objects that use conducting materials to conduct heat and insulating materials to prevent heat from spreading. Conductors and insulators are interrelated properties, so that they can be used simultaneously on an object.

These conductors and insulators have something to do with temperature matter. Temperature is a thing to express the level of heat objects. At the same temperature, the substance with the greater mass will have more heat energy. Heat energy that moves from high temperature to low temperature is called heat. As a form of energy, the SI unit of heat is the joule (J).

The most popular units of heat are the calorie and the kilocalorie. One calorie is the amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of water by 1 degree Celsius. One calorie is equal to 4.184 J, which is often rounded up to 4.2 J. In addition to the amount of heat and mass of an object that affects the temperature rise is the type of object. The greater the increase in temperature, the greater the heat required. The greater the mass of the object, the greater the heat needed by the temperature.

The heat required to raise the temperature = specific heat × object mass × temperature rise, represented by the following formula:

Q = c × m × Δt.

Information:

Q = Heat required
c = specific heat
m = mass of object
Δt = temperature rise

Conductor materials are known as materials that can conduct heat well. Conducting materials have little resistance because their specific resistance is small. Conducting materials have electrons in the outermost shell of atoms whose attraction to the atomic nucleus is weak.

Thus, if the ends of the conductor are connected with only a small voltage, the electrons will move freely, thereby supporting the flow of electrons (electric current) through the conductor. Examples of conductor materials include iron, copper, silver, aluminum, nails, carbon, paper clips, coins.

Definition of Semiconductor Materials

A semiconductor is a material with an electrical conductivity that is in between that of an insulator and a conductor. A semiconductor acts as an insulator at very low temperatures, but at room temperature (high temperatures) it acts as a conductor.

The semiconductor materials that are often used are silicon, germanium, and gallium arsenide. To get objects like this, doping is usually done certain atoms. Germanium was once the only material known to make semiconductor components. But recently, silicon became popular after it was discovered how to extract this material from nature.

Silicon is the second most abundant material on earth after oxygen. Sand, glass and other rocks are natural materials that contain lots of silicon. The atomic structure of silicon crystals, one atomic nucleus (nucleus) each has 4 valence electrons. A stable atomic nucleus bond is if it is surrounded by 8 electrons, so that the 4 electrons of the crystal atom form covalent bonds with neighboring atomic ions.

 

Properties and Types of Conductor Materials

Any material that can carry current easily is called a conductor. Meanwhile, which includes conducting materials are materials that have many free electrons in the outer shell of the orbit. These free electrons will greatly affect the properties of the material. If an electrical material has many free electrons in electron orbits, this material has the property of being a conductor of electricity.

Conducting materials have important properties, namely:

• Electrical conductivity.
• Additional temperature coefficient.
• Heat conductivity.
• tensile strength.
• The emergence of thermo electro-motor power.

Meanwhile, citing the Class IX High School Craft module (2018), the following are the types of conducting materials or conductors:

1. Aluminum (AI)

Important properties of aluminum materials, namely:

• Cold forged.
• Does not tolerate table or sea salt.
• Color silver or silver.
• Boiling point=18000C .
• Rho (ρ) = 0.0278.
• •Alpha (α) = 0.0047

2. Copper (Cu)

Some important properties of copper metal, namely:

• Can be plated and corroded when exposed to CO².
• Boiling point = 22360C – 23400C.
• •Rho (ρ) = 0.017.
• •Alpha (α) = 0.0043.

3. Zinc (Zn)

Some important properties possessed by zinc metal, namely:

• Cold forged.
• Not resistant to salt and acid salts.
• Bluish white color.
• • Boiling point = 9070C.
• •Rho (ρ) = 0.0043.
• •Alpha (α) = 0.006.

4. Tin (Sn)

Some important properties possessed by tin materials, namely:

• Shiny clear color.
• Boiling point = 2360C.
• Bluish white color.
• Boiling point = 9070C.
• Rho (ρ) = 0.0043.
• Alpha (α) = 0.12.

In addition to the metal materials mentioned above, there are also other metal materials that are classified as conductor materials for precious metals, such as silver, gold and platinum. This metal material is called a noble metal because this material has a complete number of valence electrons, making it very difficult to carry out other reactions.

Another solid material used for conductors is tungsten which is used for the cathode filaments in electron tubes, incandescent lamps, and high temperature heaters. Bimetallic or often called bimetallic are two types of metals that are joined together.

Its use in the electrical field is very broad, for example contact regulators and regulators are used to keep the hot temperature constant. This bimetal is installed in the heater and its function is to break the circuit when the temperature increases and will reconnect the circuit when the temperature drops.

Atomic Properties of Conductors

1. Band Gap Width

Conductors have a very small and thin valence band gap so that valence electrons in atoms can move easily to other atoms using very little energy. Electrons moving freely from one atomic orbital to another are constantly causing electrical conduction. The orbital left by the electron is called a hole. Subsequent atomic orbitals will experience the same holes as the first orbital due to a reduction in the number of electrons. This process takes place continuously so that electricity arises.

2. Number of Valence Electrons

The electrical conductivity of an electrical conductor is determined by the number of valence electrons present in each atomic orbital making up the electrical material. Electrical conductors with good electrical conductivity have 1 to 3 valence electrons. Within the atomic orbital, a weak force of attraction always exists between the valence electrons and the protons. Valence electrons can move freely even though the electromotive force occurs at a very small value.

The more free electrons in an electrical conductor, the smaller the value of the electrical resistance and the better the electrical conductivity. Conversely, the fewer free electrons in a conductor, the greater the value of the electrical resistance and the worse the electrical conductivity. Types of electrical conductors with good levels of electrical conductivity and low electrical resistance values ​​are copper, aluminum, gold and silver.

 

Conductor Electrical Properties

1. Conditions of the Electric Field

In a balanced state, the conductor always generates an electric field in a position parallel to the electric conducting surface. In unbalanced conditions, the electric field in the electric conductor will have a component that touches the slanted surface. The electric current on the surface is generated by the field component that touches the surface due to the force on the charge.

Calculation of the amount of electric field generated on the surface of the electric conductor is done by applying Gauss’s law. Electric charge on an electric conductor will move if an electric field is given around it, on an electric conductor. The magnitude of the value of the electric field at all point areas in the electric conductor is zero.

2. Electric Charge Force

In a balanced state, the electric charge on the electric conductor always lies on the surface. Repulsive force will occur if the electric conductor is given an electric charge. The existence of this repulsive force is a result of the nature of the electric charge in the electric conductor which always moves freely easily. The electric charges will continue to repel each other until they reach a state of complete immobility.
Electrical current flow

The amount of electric current flowing is directly proportional to the cross-sectional area of ​​the electric conductor. The larger the cross-sectional area, the greater the conductivity. Conversely, the smaller the cross-sectional area, the lower the conductivity. The difference in the amount of current flowing is due to the electrical conductor having a specific resistance that is proportional to the cross-sectional area.

3. Electrical Resistance

The electrical resistance of most electrical conductors increases with increasing temperature. An increase in temperature causes the movement of electrons to be faster, but the direction of movement is random and irregular, thus increasing the value of the electrical resistance. In electrical conductors that have the same material and cross-sectional area, the value of the electrical resistance is determined by the length of the conductor. This electrical resistance generally uses units of ohms per meter.

4. Electrical Conductivity

Electrical conductors in the form of liquids and solid objects have electrical conductivity. Measurement of the electrical conductivity of an electric conductor is done by quantization. The value of electrical conductivity affects chemical reactions, the number of valence electrons, and the degree of accumulation of electrically conducting ions in solution. Organic compounds have high electrical conductivity, while inorganic compounds have weak electrical conductivity.

5. Magnetic Field

An electric conductor that is powered by an electric current always produces a magnetic field around it. The relationship between the existence of a magnetic field around the conductor became known in the late 18th and early 19th centuries AD.

How Conductors Work

Conductors are materials that allow electrons to flow freely from particle to particle. An object made of a conducting material will allow charge to be transferred across the surface of the object. If a charge is transferred to an object at a certain location, that charge is rapidly distributed over the entire surface of the object.

If a charged conductor is brought into contact with another object, the conductor may even transfer its charge to that object. Transfer of charge between objects occurs more easily if the second object is made of a conducting material. The shape and size of materials affect their conductivity. For example, a thick piece of material conducts better than a thin piece of the same size and length. Temperature also affects conductivity. When the temperature increases, the atoms and their electrons gain energy.

Some insulators such as glass are poor conductors when cold but good conductors when hot. Meanwhile, most metals are better conductors when cold and less efficient conductors when hot.

In electricity, a conductor is a material or substance that allows electricity to flow through them. They conduct electricity because they allow electrons to flow easily in them from atom to atom. Also, conductors allow the transmission of heat or light from one source to another.

Conductors have free electrons on their surface which allow current to flow easily. This is the reason why conductors can conduct electricity. Conductors have free electrons on their surface which allows current to flow easily. This is the reason that electricity transmits freely through conductors.

 

Practical Uses of Conductors

1. Lightning rod

Lightning rods are used to divert the direction of lightning strikes towards the outside of the building so as not to damage the electrical equipment inside the building. The lightning rod consists of two conducting rods with a pointed end at one end. The building blocks of lightning rods are conductors of electricity. Lightning rod is a long conductor of electricity and has two parts which are located at the ends and are installed at a distance apart. The first part is installed vertically on the roof of the building and the second end is buried in the ground.

The electric charge that collects at the end of the lightning rod is channeled through a cable connected between the conducting rods on the roof of the building and the conducting rods in the ground. The flow of lightning to the ground makes the air around the building always neutral. The existence of a lightning rod makes the environment around the building rarely exposed to lightning strikes.

2. Electrostatic Capacitor

In the field of electrostatics, electrical conductors are used as capacitors that store electric charge. Storage of electric charge is done by providing an electric potential like a battery.

Examples of the Use of Conductors and Insulators

Conductor and insulator materials are often used in everyday life. The types of metal most often used to make these tools include iron, aluminum and copper. Electric stove is a cooking tool that has parts made of conductors and insulators. Another example is a frying pan made of aluminum which is a conductor. This is so that the heat from the fire quickly transfers to the pan so that the food is cooked quickly.

Meanwhile, other cooking utensils, such as Teflon, have handles made of insulators, such as plastic so that our hands don’t get hot when holding them. Then, the iron is also an object that is often used to smooth clothes using heat energy. The heat energy is produced from changes in electrical energy.

Irons are made of conductors and insulators. The conductor properties of the iron are located on the iron base which is made of metal and the insulator properties are located on the top of the iron body and on the plastic handle. This is so that the hands do not feel hot when rubbing clothes.

Definition of Conditional Sentence – Everyone must have imagined. If it didn’t rain this morning, I would go to the park today, if I had money I would buy a new car. Supposedly like that of course can not be separated from everyday life is not it. Then what about the conditional in English?

How do you express supposition? In English, presuppositions can be expressed in conditional sentences. However, conditional sentences are not only used to express suppositions. Conditional sentences themselves have several types and are used with different conditions as well. To understand more about conditional sentences, see the text below.

Definition of Conditional Sentences

Conditional sentences are compound sentences that have a condition about imagination, supposition, and something that has never happened. This presupposition expressed may or may not materialize.

Conditional sentences consist of independent clauses and dependent clauses which usually start with the word ‘if’ or if. A sentence that consists of both clauses can then be called a conditional sentence. However, there are some sentences that can be started with ‘when’ or when.

The form of a conditional sentence is an if-clause + main clause. if clause is a clause that is part of the conditional. main clause is a sentence that contains the consequences of the conditional presupposition at the beginning of the sentence. Besides that, the conditional sentence formula can also be reversed into a main clause + if-clause.

Examples of conditional sentences:

a. If i save enough money, i can go to Bali this year = If i save enough money, i can go to Bali this year.

(the beginning of this sentence is an if – clause followed by the main clause)

b. My sister can have dessert if she finishes her homework . = My sister can get dessert if she finishes her homework.

(beginning of the sentence is the main clause, and followed by if – clause)

However, before you can compose good sentences, you must first understand grammar in English. You can use the Smart Trick Grammar book to learn various tips and tricks for understanding grammar easily.

Conditional Sentence Types

After understanding what a conditional sentence is, you must also understand the types of conditional sentences. This is because so you can use it correctly according to the circumstances and conditions that exist. Because of the many types of conditional sentences, many English users have difficulty and are not used to using them. Therefore, consider the types of conditional sentences below.

With so many types of conditional sentences, there are also various sentence elements, variations of expressions, and much more for you to learn. All of these things have been summarized into one in the book Sentence Writing: Exploration of Models and Practice.

1. Conditional Sentence Type 0

For the first type, it is actually still simple and very easy to understand. Conditional sentence zero is used to express a fact with the formula “if…then…”. In Indonesian, for example, “if it rains, the streets will get wet”, ‘if it’s hot, the clothesline dries quickly’ and so on.

These two sentences are called conditional sentence zero because they express a common fact that many people already know. Conditional sentence zero is usually found in the present tense.

Formula: if + simple present, simple present

simple present + if + simple present

Example of sentences:

a. if you drink a glass of milk before sleep, you sleep well = If you drink a glass of milk before bed, you will sleep well.

(The sentence above is a fact, many people already know the fact that drinking milk before going to bed can make you sleep better)

b. If it rains, the road gets wet. = if it rains, the streets get wet.

(This is of course commonplace and people should know this fact)

c. If you stare at the sun too long, your eyes will be damaged. = If you stare at the sun for too long, your eyes will be damaged.

d. When she goes on a trip, she always takes lots of videos. = When he travels, he always takes a lot of videos.

e. If you heat the water to 110 degrees, it boils. = If you heat water to 110 degrees, it will boil.

2. Conditional Sentence Type 1

Conditional sentence type 1, or first conditional sentence is a form of conditional sentence that is used to express when the consequences or results are likely to occur in the future. This can happen because it is still realistic or makes sense for the possibility of this supposition to occur. Therefore, the first conditional sentence uses sentences with the simple future.

Formula: if + simple present, simple future tense

simple future + if + simple present

Example of sentences:

a. If you tell your mom the truth, she will forgive you. = If you tell your mother the truth, she will forgive you.

(the sentence above states that there is still a possibility that if he is honest with his mother, there is still a possibility that his mother will forgive him)

b. If I win the lottery, I will take you to Paris. = If I win the lottery, I will take you to Paris.

(The sentence above implies that the speaker entered the lottery, and if he wins, he will take his friend to Paris. But it means that there is a possibility that he will lose the lottery, so he and his friend do not go to Paris.)

c. If I come home late, I will get in trouble. = If I come home late, I will get into trouble.

(The condition is that the speaker will get in trouble if he gets home late, but if he doesn’t, then he won’t get in trouble.)

d. I will buy you a pizza if you wait for me a little longer. = I’ll buy you a pizza if you wait a little longer.

In addition, the first conditional sentence can also be used to give instructions or advice. However, what is used is not ‘will’ anymore, but the imperative mood. The imperative is the form of the verb, more precisely the mood. This form expresses an explicit order, demand, command, request and so on.

e. If you don’t like coffee, don’t drink it. = If you don’t like coffee, don’t drink it.

f. Listen to me carefully if you don’t want to miss something. = Listen to me carefully if you don’t want to miss anything.

3. Conditional Sentences Type 2

Conditional sentence type 2, or second conditional sentence is a conditional sentence that is used to express when a consequence or result can occur even though the possibility is very small for that to happen. The second conditional sentence is very suitable to be used to express dreams and wishes. Even though it may not necessarily happen, it could happen. The second conditional sentence uses would, could and might which are used to explain how much the condition will occur.

Formula: if + past tense, past future

past future + if + past tense

Example of sentences:

a. If I become the President of this country, I will pay more attention to the education sector. = If I become the president of this country, I will pay more attention to the education sector.

(The sentence above of course expresses a supposition about what the speaker wants to do if he becomes president. He uses the second conditional sentence, meaning he thinks that his dream of becoming president is just wishful thinking.)

b. If I owned an amusement park, I might open it up to 24 hours. = If I had an amusement park, I might open it up to 24 hours.

(From the sentence above, we can know that the speaker doesn’t have an amusement park, and it’s possible that it could happen, but the probability of that dream happening is very small.)

c. If I won the lottery, I would go on a trip around the world with you. 

(The sentence above means that he will take his friends around the world if he wins the lottery, but the probability is very small that the speaker wins the lottery.)

When using the second conditional sentence to give advice, usually use the phrase ‘if i were’,

d. I wouldn’t be thinking about it if I were you. = I wouldn’t think about that if I were you.

e. If I were you, I would continue my study to get a master’s degree. = If I were you, I would continue my studies to get a master’s degree.

4. Conditional Sentence Type 3

Conditional sentence type 3 or third conditional sentence is a conditional sentence that is used when you want to express a condition that is not possible at all. This is because the conditions expressed are simply impossible, or just an imagination.

This third conditional sentence also expresses something that is contrary to what has happened in the past. In conditional sentences of type three, the past perfect tense is used and an auxiliary modal (would, should, could) is also added.

Formula: if + past perfect, future perfect

future perfect + if + past perfect

Example of sentences:

a. If my grades were good, I would have gotten a better job. = If my grades were good, I would have gotten a better job.

(From this sentence we can see that the speaker did not have good grades during his studies, and he is currently not getting a job that he thinks is good.)

b. If I hadn’t broken my arm, I would have traveled to Bali with my boyfriend. = If I didn’t break my hand, I would definitely go to Bali with my boyfriend.

(from this sentence we know that she can’t go to Bali with her boyfriend, it’s just wishful thinking because the speaker has broken her hand so she can’t go anywhere.)

c. If she had taken the bus, she wouldn’t have had a car accident. = If only he had taken the bus, he wouldn’t have had a car accident.

To make sentences in good English, Grammar is important as a set of rules that govern the arrangement of sentences. Learn how through the Grammar Plus B2 book.

Examples of Conditional Sentence Questions and Answers

1. If I have time, I (go) camping with you. = If I have time, I will go camping with you.
2. If you (speak) Japanese, you will get along with my family perfectly. = If you can speak Japanese, you will get along with my family really well.
3. If we had gone for a walk, we (turned off) the lights off. = If we go for a walk, we turn off the lights.
4. If my mom (come) to see us, we will go to the beach. = If my mother comes to visit us, we will go to the beach.
5. I would have told you if I (see) her. = I will tell you if I see him.
6. Would you mind if I (open) the door?= Do you mind if I open the door?
7. If Rina and John (invited) me, I would not have said no. = If Rina and John invited me, I would not say no.
8. My sister (will meet) me at the airport if she gets the afternoon off. = My sister will meet me at the airport if she has an afternoon off.
9. If i (did not do it), my brother would do it. = If I don’t do it, my brother will.
10. If my mom (does not pick up) me up, I’ll take the subway home. = If my mom doesn’t pick me up, I’ll take the subway home.
11. If Jane eats too much cheese, she (will) get sick. = If Jane eats a lot of cheese, she will get sick.
12. If you (don’t study), you will fail the math exam. = If you don’t study, you will fail the math test.
13. If I (leave) my job, I could travel around the world. = If I leave my job, I can travel the world.
14. It (would be) nice if the rain stopped. = It would be better if the rain stopped.
15. If she (not asleep) fell asleep while driving, she wouldn’t have crashed her car. = If he hadn’t fallen asleep while driving, he wouldn’t have crashed his car.

Find hundreds of other English questions that can help you hone your English grammar skills in the book 250 English Grammar Practice below.

Answer:

1. If I had time, I would go camping with you. = If I have time, I will go camping with you.
2. If you speak Japanese, you will get along with my family perfectly. = If you can speak Japanese, you will get along with my family really well.
3. If we had gone for a walk, we would have turned the lights off. = If we go for a walk, we turn off the lights.
4. If my mom comes to see us, we will go to the beach. = If my mom comes to see us, we will go to the beach.
5. I would have told you if I had seen her. = I will tell you if I see him.
6. Would you mind if I opened the door? = Do you mind if I open the door?
7. If Rina and John had invited me, I would not have said no. = If Rina and John invite me, I won’t say no.
8. My sister will meet me at the airport if she gets the afternoon off. = My sister will meet me at the airport if she has an afternoon off.
9. If I didn’t do it, my brother would do it. = If I don’t do it, my brother will.
10. If my mom doesn’t pick me up, I’ll take the subway home. = If my mom doesn’t pick me up, I’ll take the subway home.
11. If Jane eats too much cheese, she gets sick. = If Jane eats a lot of cheese, she will get sick.
12. If you don’t study, you will fail the math exam. = If you don’t study, you will fail the math test.
13. If I left my job, I could travel around the world. = If I leave my job, I can travel the world.
14. It would be nice if the rain stopped. = It would be better if the rain stopped.
15. If she hadn’t fallen asleep while driving, she wouldn’t have crashed her car. = If he hadn’t fallen asleep while driving, he wouldn’t have crashed his car.

That’s an explanation of conditional sentences that you can learn. If you want to learn more about grammar, you can get the best collection of English books at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia is always #FriendsWithoutLimits so you can be more fluent in English.

Conditional material and subjunctive verbs are both conditional sentences. However, the subjunctive is rarely used because the conditional sentence is enough to replace the subjunctive sentence. To understand better, let’s watch it to the end!

Conditional Sentence Material

One of the forms of conditional sentences with the characteristics of the subordinate clause begins with the word if (if) and the main clause uses capital. Conditional consists of if clause (sub-clause) and main clause (main clause). Then it was developed into 3 pair formulas.

1. Conditional Type 1

Used to express suppositions that are made based on facts in the present or in the future and these suppositions may occur. The “if” clause is usually in the simple present tense.

Example: If I see you tomorrow, I will buy you a drink

If clause : If I see you tomorrow
Main clause: I will buy you a drink.

Or

Main clause: I will buy you a drink
If clause: If I see you tomorrow.

We often use unless which means “if not”

Unless you hand in your homework, I won’t mark it

If clause: Unless you hand in your homework,
Main clause: I won’t mark it.

I mean
If clause: If you don’t hand in your homework,
Main clause: I won’t mark it.

Or

Main clause: I won’t mark your homework
If clause: Unless you hand it in.

mean
Main clause: I won’t mark your homework
If clause: If you don’t hand it in

2. Conditional Type 2

Used to express an unreal situation in the present or future. This type is used to express a hope. The tenses used in the if clause are simple past tense.

Example: If I won the quiz, I would buy a new house

If clause: If I won the quiz
Main clause: I would buy a new house

or

Main clause: I would buy a new house
If clause: If I won the quiz

Notes: The use of would or wouldn’t is prohibited in the if clause.

3. Conditional Type 3

Used to express a condition in the past that is unlikely to occur again. Often used to criticize or regret. The tenses used in the if clause are the past perfect tense

If clause: If I had worked harder
Main clause: I would have passed my exam.

If clause: If I had worked harder
Main clause: I could have passed my exam.

If clause: If I had worked harder
Main clause: I should have passed my exam.

Or

Main clause: I would have passed my exam
If clause: If I had worked harder.

Main clause: I could have passed my exam
If clause: If I had worked harder.

Main clause: I should have passed my exam
If clause: If I had worked harder

To make it more practical, pay attention to the following formula!

Now we look for facts on conditional type 2 and type 3 according to the practical formula above:

Supposition:
If he studied he would pass the exam. -> V2 (+)

If he had studied he would have passed the exam. -> Limited V3 (+)

Fact:
He doesn’t study so he doesn’t pass the exam. -> V1 (-)

He didn’t study so he didn’t pass the exam. -> V2 (-)

Subjunctive Sentence Material

Sentences that express expectations that are usually contrary to reality.

1. Future Subjunctive

Example:
I wish Amin would go to the office tomorrow.
(I hope Amin can go to the office tomorrow.)
(In fact Amin won’t go to the office tomorrow/Amir won’t go to the office).

2. Past Subjunctive

Example:
I wish I were a doctor.
(I wish I was a doctor.) (In fact I am not a doctor).

3. Past Perfect Subjunctive

Example:
I wished I had typed a letter.
(Supposing (past) I had typed a letter.)
(In fact I didn’t type a letter).

Examples of Conditional and Subjunctive Sentence Questions

1. Had my parents had enough money, I would have studied at this academy. From this sentence we know that the speaker …
a. failed the entrance test
b. was a student of the academy
c. had applied for a scholarship
d. was not a student of the academy
e. had not been given a scholarship

Discussion: Sentences in the form of conditional type 3 (main clause: past future perfect–would have V3/been, subclause: past perfect–had V3/been) in the form of inversion (removing the word ‘if’ by placing the auxiliary had at the front of the sentence) . The conditional type 3 pattern states something contrary to what actually happened in the past. The question sentence has the meaning: If my parents have enough money, I will study at this academy. This meant that my parents actually didn’t have enough money, so I didn’t study/was not a student of the academy.

2. … I can drive, I often ask my brother to drive me to the city.
a. since
b. When
c. because
d. Whether
e. Although

Discussion: The fact that I can drive with the fact that I often send my sister to drive me to town is a synergistic counter. Of the answer choices, there is a conjunction that shows a synergistic counter, although.

3. The Tourist bus came to our school thirty minutes late … we had repeatedly told the driver to be on time.
a. even though
b. so that
c. because
d. provided that
e. in order that

Discussion: The causal sentences above state a contradiction. The conjunction (conjunction) to express conflict is ‘even though’ (even though).

3. I don’t have a laptop. If I … a laptop, I would lend it to you.
a. have
b. had
c. having
d. has

Discussion: Sentences are conditional sentence type 2 patterns. So in the if clause, sentences are used in the simple past form.

4. You are the teacher and I am the student. If I …, I would give a lot of excercises.
a. am
b. are
c. becomed
. were

Discussion: The sentence is a conditional sentence type 2, so the sentence pattern in the if clause uses the simple past. Because the sentence is nominal, the to be used is were.

It’s really easy to understand the use of conditional sentences and subjunctive sentences. The conclusion is that Type 1 is an assumption that is likely to occur.

Types 2 and 3 are the impossible assumptions. Facts for type 2 are present (did not occur in the present) and for type 3 are past (did not occur in the past).

Then for the subjunctive sentence is a sentence to show expectations or assumptions that are different from reality.

Definition of Condensation – What is condensation? If you have ever left your house to breathe fresh morning air, you are sure to have seen water droplets sticking to the windows of houses or motorized vehicles and leaves at dawn when dawn has not yet arrived. The water droplets that seem to stick together are what we call dew.

A natural phenomenon that is natural in the form of a beautiful natural process and is always a calming and comfortable thing to look at. For those of you who like to climb mountains, it is commonplace to see dew in the morning clinging to the trees at an altitude of several thousand meters above sea level.

Especially if you are in a hamlet that is still surrounded by natural scenery in the form of forests, hills, and tea plantations, you will easily find lots of morning dew resting on tree trunks and leaves.

When we were children, we must have played with our ignorance playing with the dew that sticks to the leaves, not only because it looks quite unique, the dew that comes in the morning also indicates that the air feels fresher and clearer than any water. and what’s in the bathroom tub, especially the boiled water in the house cup.

The average young child prefers to figure out how to transfer this moisture to the surface from the other side of their hand without trying to break it. Sadly, because dew is essentially water-based, the dew that had been trying to maintain its round shape suddenly broke easily into water droplets.

So, when discussing the matter of morning dew, have you ever tried to think, where do these little round dewdrops come from? In short like this, the round grains that we call morning dew appear due to a process called condensation which is carried out naturally by nature.

Hearing the term condensation, you must not be very familiar with this term. Granted, condensation wasn’t a term that many people knew about, so it was rare for anyone to know about it.

Even worse, maybe your friends who used to go to school majoring in natural sciences may not know at all or don’t remember this one term, or the worst situation is that they have never even studied and understood the context of condensation in their learning at school. Formerly?

If you yourself are one of the many people who also don’t understand the context of condensation, you are very lucky because on this topic we will try to discuss it. So the big question is, what is condensation? Let’s look together at the following explanation of what condensation is!

What Is Condensation?

Condensation is the process by which the state changes from gas to liquid. Condensation, also called condensation and the opposite of evaporation or vaporization process. For example, if a glass with a lid is filled with hot water, the glass lid used will gradually condense. Condensation occurs when the vapor cools down to a liquid, as described in the book Bioenergy and Biorefinery .

However, it can also occur when a vapor is compressed into a liquid (i.e., the pressure is increased) or when it is subjected to a combination of cooling and compression. The liquid condensed from the steam is called condensate. Mirror condensation is one of the most common forms of condensation. The same thing happens in the bathroom when humidity or body heat or the water heater condenses on the cold mirror.

 

The Process of Condensation

The process of condensation occurs when water vapor in the air flows over a surface that is colder than the dew point of the water vapor. Air temperature plays an important role in the condensation process. For example, condensation in the morning. Dew is water vapor that turns into water droplets. This condensation or condensation occurs at night when the air is cooler.

At night, the temperature drops below the dew point, so the water vapor cannot be held in and becomes dew. The dew point is the temperature at which condensation occurs. Temperatures can naturally reach or drop below the dew point, which is common at night. As a result, lawns, cars and homes are often flooded in the morning.

Condensation can also cause water droplets to fall on the exterior of vehicle or vehicle windshields and cold items. When warm air meets a cold surface, it reaches the dew point and condensation occurs. This will allow the water to drip into the cool container or place.

Causes of Condensation

When condensation occurs indoors or where you live, there are at least three main triggers that also affect the process of forming these water droplets. In general, condensation can be caused by humidity inside your residence. Condensation occurs when the air in the room can no longer hold water vapor.

In addition, the low temperature at which moist air is in direct contact with surfaces in a cold room atmosphere. If the airflow is poor and there is no room for air circulation between hot and cold, moisture will build up in the room and condensation will increase.

Condensation is the process of changing state from gas to liquid. This natural process can occur for two reasons, namely when water vapor moves through a cooler surface and when water vapor is compressed.

1. Water vapor moves through a warm surface to a colder surface

The phenomenon of condensation occurs when water vapor flows over a surface that is colder than the dew point. The dew point is the temperature at which the condensation phenomenon occurs.

In this case, morning dew is an example of a condensation process. Because the temperature is much lower at night than during the day, the gas vapor is cooled. Then, as the temperature at night is much lower than during the day, the cooled vapor forms the dew that is visible the next morning.

This dew is usually easy to find on the grass and leaves around your house. As the nights get colder, the water vapor condenses, eventually forming morning dew.

2. When water vapor is compressed or subjected to temperature suppression

In the following situations, condensation may occur when the water vapor is compressed or compressed. When the vapor is pressurized, it returns to its liquid state. For example, if you try to pour hot water into a jar and place it on top of it, then the moisture from the hot water is compressed and cannot escape from the lid of the jar, causing water droplets to stick to the surface of the lid of the jar.

Another example of the condensation phenomenon is on energy drink cans. When you take the can out of the refrigerator, the outside of the can will cool down and a condensation phenomenon will form on the surface of the can, why does this happen?

This kind of event can happen because the temperature outside the refrigerator is much higher than inside the refrigerator. Cold steam that sticks inside the can eventually condenses and processes into water droplets on the surface of the can. In essence, this applies not only to soft drinks, but also to various containers and jars that have been stored in the refrigerator and taken out at a much warmer room temperature.

Types of Condensation

As an example where the condensation phenomenon itself occurs, we can easily find it around the area where we live. For example, the windows of four-wheeled vehicles fog up in the morning. Condensation can also be classified into two types, namely: condensation due to external factors and condensation due to internal factors.

1. Condensation due to external factors

External condensation is a type of condensation that occurs when moist air comes into direct contact with a cooler surface such as a car window. This event can occur when the surface temperature is below the dew point of the air. Therefore, the amount is proportional to the heat of the air in the room. The air dew point is the temperature at which the water vapor in the air condenses and a certain proportion of the water vapor and air becomes water.

2. Condensation due to internal factors

Condensation that occurs due to internal or indoor factors is a type of condensation that occurs due to excessive humidity in an enclosed space. This usually causes our windows to fog up. This internal condensation usually occurs at night due to excessive humidity and condensation on the windows of our homes.

 

Condensation Forms

Besides being able to be classified into two categories, the results of the condensation event are further divided into several forms. Even though we cannot directly witness the process of condensation, we can easily see the results of the condensation process that occurs every morning. So, what exactly are the results of this condensation event?

There are three forms of condensation that are most commonly encountered, namely dew, fog, and clouds. Here’s the explanation:

1. Dew

Dew which is one form of the result of the process of condensation. Dew is water droplets made of water vapor on a surface that is usually cooler. We can see it more often because of the process of creation when the temperature of an item drops below its dew point temperature.

Dew is the result of the most common and simple series of condensation occurrences. When you have seen dew resting on leaves and grass in the morning or perhaps on the surface of house windows and motorized vehicle glass, you may wonder to yourself where all this dew has come from.

So, as previously explained above, condensation is the result of a condensation process that is created when it is late in the day. The dew form itself is created when vapors in the earth’s atmosphere condense on cooler surfaces, which in turn condense on leaves, grass, and even building glass or motor vehicle glass.

2. Mist

Fog is a collection of gases that descend to the surface of the earth. This event can occur when rain falls from warm air temperatures to cooler air temperatures, and water vapor in cold air moves through its saturation point.

For example, fog at the foot of mountains or hills. This type of fog is formed when moist air descends on the other side of windy hills and mountains.

Fog is a kind of rare and unique event that we cannot witness every time. This is actually a common thing when you see that most of us live in cities that are polluted and have no trees. However, you can still see the fog covering the urban area early in the morning. Fog is most common in the morning or shortly after rain.

Fog is also the result of the condensation process. Just after rain or at dawn when dawn breaks, water vapor forms tiny droplets in the air. These tiny droplets have become known as nebulae. However, because there are so many tiny droplets of them, they can block your vision. The more tiny water droplets in the air, the more it blocks your line of sight.

Not as beautiful as it looks, fog can also harm people. Thick fog obscures visibility and makes it difficult to determine which path is correct, it is not uncommon for hikers to get lost twice. In addition to climbers, fog can also disturb motorcyclists and four-wheeled vehicle drivers, which sometimes leads to accidents.

Fortunately, most fogs only occur for a short period of time. The fog slowly clears as the sun rises. This is because the presence of the sun causes the temperature to rise, thereby making the tiny water droplets evaporate again and eventually disappear.

3. Clouds

Another form of condensation is clouds. A collection of tiny water droplets or ice crystals visible in the air. Clouds form when invisible water vapor in the air condenses into visible water droplets and ice crystals.

In the atmosphere, cloud droplets form in aerosols that act as condensation nuclei or condensation nuclei. The rate at which these droplets are created is determined by the number of condensation nuclei. The process in which water droplets from the gas phase form on condensation nuclei is called heterogeneous nucleation.

The formation of water droplets from the gas phase in a clean environment requiring supersaturation is called homogeneous nucleation. Homogeneous nucleation, that is, freezing of pure water, occurs only at temperatures below -40 degrees Celsius. However, in the presence of aerosols as condensation nuclei, freezing can occur at temperatures of only a few degrees below zero degrees Celsius.

Condensation nuclei are solid or liquid particles in the form of dust, smoke, sulfur dioxide, sea salt (NaCl), or other hygroscopic microscopic objects that are 0.001 to 10 microns in size.

4. Frost

If fog alone is rare, freezing dew events are even more rare, especially for those of us who live in an area with a tropical and temperate climate like Indonesia.

To those who have no idea at all, frost is a thin layer of ice clinging to a hard surface. If you have ever known a unique event about freezing plants in the Dieng plateau during the summer, that’s roughly what happened.

Like fog and dew, frost also appears from condensation. This process occurs because the dew point is lower than the freezing point. As a result, water vapor that normally forms frost freezes into very fine ice particles.

 

Conclusion

That’s all for a brief discussion of the phenomenon of condensation, the meaning of condensation. Not only the definition, but how the process is created, the forms of the results of the condensation process and the motives that trigger it, what are the classifications of condensation, to its effects.

Even though condensation can cause a problem, condensation is still a natural process carried out by nature and is purely created naturally and we can enjoy its beauty.

Thus a review of condensation. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about condensation, the water cycle and other natural sciences, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

Example of Thesis Abstract – Every student must write a thesis as a graduation requirement. If they don’t write a thesis, students usually make a final assignment (TA). The assignment is usually carried out through research with either quantitative or qualitative data.

Undergraduate thesis is usually started by students in grades three or four. And the maximum pass for the S1 level is 14 semesters. Students have to work hard with journal articles, books, laboratories, or other research objects. It is not uncommon for students to experience stress or deadlock in writing their thesis.

So, what exactly is a script? How to make? The following is an explanation of the thesis that has been summarized from various pages on the internet.

Thesis Concept and Objectives

Thesis is a term used in Indonesia to describe scientific writing as a result of undergraduate research. In the thesis there is a complete discussion of certain problems or phenomena by following the procedures for writing thesis in accordance with applicable regulations.

Launching from the Duniaduniadik.co.id page, the purpose of writing a thesis is to demand that students think logically in describing and solving a problem. As well as being able to write down the results of his thoughts in the form of a structured and systematic thesis report.

In general, the stages of thesis are through understanding a problem, conducting research, analyzing, obtaining research results, and compiling them in the form of a report. These steps must be carried out sequentially. Can’t jump over each other.

Not only that, thesis writing is also used as a requirement for obtaining a bachelor’s degree at every tertiary institution. Both state universities (PTN) and private universities in Indonesia.

Not only that, the thesis is made to present the results of scientific research findings. The aim is to develop knowledge and/or practical interests in state administration and communication. Launching from the Deepublishsote.com page, the thesis has the following characteristics.

• It is a scientific work so that a scientific method is needed in its research.
• Written reports from the results of student research on one aspect of community life and living things.
• The research results are reviewed based on phenomena that exist in society and are relevant to previous studies.
• In the field of education, this scientific work is aimed at exploring and solving educational problems.
• In the non-educational field, this scientific work is aimed at solving scientific problems in accordance with the field of student study programs.
• Written in good and correct Indonesian, based on research results and field observations.

 

Types of Thesis

Thesis is the final scientific work and is a requirement for student graduation. Students must determine the type of research method so that they can make the right design. The following are the types of theses that have been summarized from the Kumparan.com page.

1. Thesis Based on Research Methods

Types of thesis based on research methods have been grouped into two types, namely qualitative and quantitative thesis. Launching from the Kumparan.com page, the following is an explanation of the two methods.

• Quantitative Thesis

Quantitative thesis is a type of thesis in which data collection and research methods use questionnaires or survey results. The results obtained will be processed with software, for example Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS), Minita, MatLab, and so on.

• Qualitative Thesis

The thesis with a qualitative model uses data collection methods and research by conducting interviews or field observations. Working on this thesis method requires quite a long time because of the demands for detailed and in-depth analysis.

2. Thesis Based on Literature Review

The thesis that uses the literature review model is a study that contains discussion of a topic or a problem that is carried out to solve problems critically and in depth towards library materials that are aligned or relevant to the research topic.

3. Thesis Based on Field Research Results

Scientific work based on the results of field research is a type of research method that refers to data collection in the field.

4. Thesis Based on Development Results

Thesis based on development results is a design activity in solving a problem that exists in the field applying relevant research concepts, theories and principles.

Thesis Elements

In general, the elements of the thesis can be grouped into three, namely the initial part of the thesis, the main part of the thesis, and the final part of the thesis. The following is an explanation of the elements of the thesis.

1. The Beginning of Thesis

Launching from the Duniaduniadik.co.id page, the initial part of the thesis consists of the following sections.

• Outer Cover

The outer cover is the thesis cover which is located on the front. The cover usually contains the title, thesis writing, the student’s name and NIK, the university logo, the name of the department, the name of the university, the month and year of graduation. All text on the outer cover must be arranged symmetrically and written in capital letters.

• Inside Cover

The inner cover is located on the inside after the outer cover. The cover contains the title, thesis writing, the purpose of writing the thesis, the student’s name and identification number, the name of the department, the name of the university, the month and year of graduation.

• Advisory Approval

The supervisor’s approval is a sign of the supervisor’s approval of the contents of the manuscript that has been prepared by the student. The page states that the manuscript has been reviewed and approved by the supervisor and meets the requirements to conduct a trial session.

• Approval of the Examiner Team

After students face exams and are declared passed as a scholar. Then the examiner team will give a signature as a form of validation on the thesis that has been made. The signature will be given on the test team’s validation page.

• Foreword

In the preface, students are given the opportunity to thank God, supervisors, parents, friends, and other parties who accompany and assist in the preparation of the thesis.

• List of contents

The table of contents is arranged as a navigation or description of the contents in a thesis. It usually contains chapter titles, sub-chapter titles, sub-chapter titles, and page numbers.

• List of Tables

The table list contains information on table numbers, table titles, and page numbers. Table titles cannot be abbreviated and must be written in accordance with the table titles in the thesis text. Meanwhile, the spacing between table titles is 1/2 space.

• list of Figures

List of images is information about the number of images, the title of the image and the page number. The title of the image cannot be abbreviated and must match the title of the image in the thesis text. The spacing between image titles is 1/2 space.

• Appendix List

The list of attachments contains information on attachment numbers, attachment titles, and page numbers. Writing between attachment titles uses 1/2 space.

 

2. Main Thesis Section

Launching from the Deepublishstore.com page, the core part of the thesis consists of the following things.

• Introduction

The introduction contains background, problem formulation, research objectives, research benefits, research hypotheses, research scope and writing systematics.

• Literature review

The literature review contains theoretical ideas about the object to be studied. The theory used as the basis for the literature review must be relevant and up-to-date. Relevance in question is in accordance with the issues raised. Meanwhile, the latest in question is the latest research or considered to most represent the development of the science in question.

• Research methods

The research method contains research patterns, sources and types of data, population and research sample, data collection techniques and instruments, along with data analysis techniques.

• Research result

The research results explain the description of the data and testing the hypothesis. Data descriptions are usually presented in the form of graphs or tables. As well as given a glimpse of the facts to clarify the contents of the graphs or tables presented. Meanwhile, hypothesis testing contains explanations related to the results of testing each hypothesis in a concise and concise manner.

• Discussion

The discussion is usually in the fifth chapter. The aim is to answer the research problem that has been formulated in the introductory chapter. Discussion should not be haphazard. The author must carry out a rational research analysis and in accordance with the logic of thinking.

• Closing

The closing contains conclusions and suggestions. The conclusion must be able to explain the problems and solutions offered by the author. The suggestions must be in accordance with the subject matter discussed.

3. Final Part of Thesis

The final part of the thesis usually contains a bibliography and a list of appendices. The author is obliged to write down all sources and attachments that are used as a reference in the preparation of the thesis.

The difference between Thesis and Final Project

Students in tertiary institutions usually write scientific papers as a graduation requirement. Sinaumed’s may hear the thesis or final project (TA) that students often talk about. The principle of manufacture is almost similar, but both have differences. The following are the differences between thesis and final assignment as reported from the Deepublishstore.com page.

• Thesis as a requirement for graduation S1 while the Final Assignment (TA) as a condition for passing the diploma (DIII/DIV).
• Thesis usually contains scientific research based on information from books, research journals, research reports, seminars or field conditions.
• Final Projects usually raise more issues related to the world of work, whether it’s making tools/prototypes or raising research from practical fieldwork (internships) that are turned into scientific works.

Concepts and How to Make a Thesis Abstract

The thesis abstract is a brief summary of the overall explanation of the contents of a scientific paper starting from the background, methods used, results, and conclusions. An abstract is not only a summary, but can also help writers stay on track with their research plans.

The discussion in the abstract has been determined from the start. So, the writing material is not widened or conical. Not only that, the abstract can also make it easier for readers to understand the flow of objectives and research results conveyed by the author.

Abstracts are usually written with a total of between 250-300 words. Launching from the article.rumah123.com page, the explanation for limiting the number of words is as follows.

• Make it easy for readers to find reviews of written works in a short time, as a consideration to read the work or not.
• As a quick way to obtain the right references for research needs according to disciplines.
• Become a reader’s guide for scientific writing, so that readers get detailed information, analysis and arguments of the author.
• Help readers remember important points in a scientific work.

Even though it is concise, concise, and clear, abstract writing should not be done haphazardly. Launching from the article.rumah123.com page, the following are the stages in making a thesis abstract.

1. Writing Background

Background becomes an important part of thesis writing. It provides an outline of the topics to be covered. The background in the abstract becomes a summary of the background subchapters in the thesis.

2. Explain the Research Method

After explaining the background, it must also explain the research method used. Research methods can be designed from experiments to literature study. Including adding data analysis according to the research variables.

3. Presenting Research Results

The writer must also explain the research results briefly, either in the form of simple numbers or descriptive results.

4. Write a Conclusion on the Abstract

At the end of the abstract, the research conclusions must be written in a concise, clear and concise manner.

5. Insert Keywords

Keywords are important in the abstract. Keywords usually contain the topic of the problem and it is necessary to ensure that the keywords are made in accordance with the points in the title of the paper.

 

Example of Thesis Abstract

Thesis requires an abstract to provide a brief description of the contents of the thesis. Launching from the article.rumah123.com page, the following is an example of a thesis abstract.

1. Example of a thesis abstract regarding consumer interest in buying an electric car

Relations of Public Interest in Electric Vehicles



Abstract



This thesis aims to find out the public's interest in buying electric vehicles, both two-wheeled and four-wheeled, and what are the supporting factors.



The data collection process and thesis research were carried out from January to May 2022 with seven sources.



The thesis data collection technique was carried out verbatim and qualitative interviews with informants regarding their experiences with using electric vehicles.



The results of research and interviews show that there is a high interest in using electrified vehicles, both two-wheeled and four-wheeled.



The basis for their considerations is not only the increase in oil prices, but also practicality and lifestyle factors, with good electricity infrastructure. 



Apart from the practicality factor, the Government's support for using electric cars is also an added value for current electric vehicle users to add their units in the garage.



Keywords: Consumer buying interest, electric car, qualitative research.

2. Example of a thesis abstract regarding personality development

3. Examples of Thesis Abstracts in English

Kinds of Social Values ​​- Values ​​are one of the guides or guidelines for humans to live life. Without value, maybe we will live life as we want. Not respecting each other or even depriving each other of the rights of each other. Therefore, in living life it is necessary to hold values.

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), value is defined as price (in the sense of estimated price); price of money (compared to the price of other money), intelligence numbers; seed; more or less content; rate; quality; characteristics (things) that are important or useful for humanity; something that perfects man according to his essence.

Meanwhile, according to Steeman, value is something that gives meaning to life, which provides a reference, point of departure and purpose of life. Value is something that is upheld, which can color and animate one’s actions. Values ​​are not only seen as mere beliefs, values ​​always involve mindsets and actions, so that there is a very close relationship between values ​​and ethics.

In line with Steeman, Rokeach also defines value as a deep belief about actions, actions or behavior that are considered bad. Meanwhile, according to Linda and Richard Eyre, values ​​are standards of behavior and attitudes that determine who we are, how we live and how we treat others. Of course good values ​​can make people better, live better and treat others better.

Tyler also defines value as an object, activity or idea expressed by individuals who control education in directing interests, attitudes and satisfaction. It is further explained that since humans have learned to value an object, activity and idea, this object becomes an important regulator of interest, attitude and satisfaction. Therefore, schools must help students find and strengthen meaningful and significant values ​​for students in obtaining personal happiness and making positive contributions to society.

Social Value Concept

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), value is defined as price (in the sense of estimated price); price of money (compared to the price of other money), intelligence numbers; seed; more or less content; rate; quality; characteristics (things) that are important or useful for humanity; something that perfects man according to his essence.

Meanwhile, social in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), social is defined as relating to society; likes to pay attention to the public interest (like to help, donate, and so on).

Social values ​​themselves can be interpreted as values ​​held by a society regarding what is considered good and what is considered bad by society. Social values ​​are the result of a collective agreement that has been recognized and adhered to by a community group.

Although social values ​​are not written down and tend to be considered implicit or abstract. However, social values ​​are binding on individuals. Over time, a value can shift, change, adapt to the times, be updated, even be abandoned.

For example, the culture of greeting and greeting has begun to erode in urban communities due to self-occupation and the introduction of individualistic culture. This will be different if in the village, residents will greet each other, both those who pass by are familiar or only know their names.

Social values ​​that develop in a society become a way of life. It is always present in society and is practiced from generation to generation.

It should be remembered that social values ​​are not a matter of right and wrong. It becomes a concept that exists within humans, is philosophical about what is considered good and what is considered bad. A thing can be said to be valuable if it is useful (use value), true (truth value), beautiful (aesthetic value), good (moral value), and so on.

Social values ​​are very necessary in society. This is because social values ​​are often used as a guideline for life by the community in determining attitudes in everyday life.

Not only that, social values ​​are also used as the value of human life in dealing with other humans. Social values ​​are not simply obtained when they are born. It is obtained through a value system taught by parents to their children with various adjustments.

Characteristics and Functions of Social Values

Social value can be identified from several characteristics that have been summarized from the Bola.com and Studiobelajar.com pages as follows.

• Value is created socially, in the sense that value is the result of an agreement with a community to meet human needs and achieve certain goals,
• Values ​​have a broad scope, including ways of behaving, customs/habits, and culture.
• Social values ​​are passed down from generation to generation through social interaction over a relatively long period of time.
• Social values ​​are not static, in the sense that over time values ​​can shift, change, be renewed and abandoned.
• Social values ​​vary between communities due to differences in cultural systems.
• Social values ​​are binding on individuals or groups in a society.
• Created from a process of intensive human interaction and not behavior that was born.
• Transformed through a learning process that includes socialization, acculturation, and diffusion.
• There are social measures or rules that help meet social needs.
• Different for each group of people.
• Each value has a different effect on human action.
• Can influence individual personality as a member of society.

Launching from Studiobelajar.com, there are at least three functions of social value as follows.

1. As a Code of Conduct

Social values ​​contain the way individuals act in everyday life so that they can be accepted in society. Value as a guideline means that value takes on a function as a source of reference and guidance for individual life in thinking, acting, and behaving.

All actions taken by individuals on the basis of freedom of expression must still be guided by the values ​​or norms that exist in society. The goal is to stay under control and not harm themselves or the community group itself.

2. As Social Control

Social values ​​are formed from mutual agreements. Therefore, values ​​are binding on individuals or groups in a society. Value has a function as a limiter regarding things that are appropriate and inappropriate to do. As well as, reinforce behavior that is considered good and bad.

Thus, it is hoped that every individual who grows up in society will be good and not do evil or deviate. However, unfortunately these values ​​sometimes limit self-development. For example, women are not allowed to go to high school because later they will only become housewives or fight against their husbands. In fact, women who go to high school can educate their children properly and stay sane in running the household.

3. As Social Protector

Social values ​​are passed down from one generation to the next in a relatively long time. Social values ​​carry a broad vision, which is to encourage the creation of social order in social life.

Values ​​have a function as a social protection that minimizes the occurrence of forms of social deviation and provides a feeling of security for individuals or groups in a society.

Kinds of Social Values

Launching from the Bola.com and Studiobelajar.com pages , social values ​​can be grouped by type as follows.

1. Material Values

Material value is everything whose function can be felt physically (physical elements). For example, stone can be used to build buildings. Therefore, stones have material values ​​that can be felt by humans.

2. Vital Value

Vital value consists of everything that is useful in supporting daily activities. For example, jackets in winter or rain are used to warm the body. However, in hot or dry season the jakret has no value or its use decreases. Jackets based on their uses are included in objects that have vital value.

3. Spiritual Values

Spiritual value includes everything whose benefits can be felt mentally or spiritually. Spiritual values ​​include religious, moral or goodness values, beauty or aesthetics, and truth. For example, every individual believes in a religion or belief and practices these teachings in everyday life.

Which teachings are believed to give peace and serenity in their hearts. The freedom to have a religion or belief and to worship according to religious teachings is part of spiritual values.

Spiritual values ​​can be grouped into four groups as follows.

• The value of truth, namely the value that comes from the elements of human reason (logic, reason, reason, mind, creativity). For example iron when heated expands, 1 + 1 = 2.
• The value of beauty, namely the value that comes from the elements of human feelings (feelings and aesthetics). For example, works of art.
• Moral values, namely values ​​relating to good and bad, originate from elements of human nature such as will or will (intention and ethics). For example helping victims of natural disasters.
• Religious value, namely the highest and absolute spiritual value originating from human belief or belief in God Almighty. For example, religious rituals.

Launching from the Bola.com page, social values ​​can also be grouped based on their characteristics. The following is a more detailed explanation of the classification of social values.

1. Ingrained Social Value ( Internalized Value )

An ingrained value is a value that becomes a subconscious personality or encourages actions without thinking with a cool head. However, when the act is violated it will cause a deep sense of shame or guilt and is difficult to forget or erase. For example, people who have sex outside of marriage without responsibility when their partners are pregnant.

2. Dominant Value

Dominant values ​​are values ​​that are considered more important than other values. This can be seen from the choices made by individuals when faced with several alternative actions to choose from. Garmeds can determine whether or not a value is dominant based on several indicators as follows.

• The number of people who adhere to these social values. Example: most people want change towards improvement (reform) in all areas of life.
• The length of time the social value is felt or embraced by the members of the group.
• The high effort to maintain or enforce these social values
• The high position (prestige) of the person who carries or uses these social values.

Examples of Software – Today, work and education are facilitated by advances in technology. When You is out of town and has to hold a meeting, it can be diverted by virtual face-to-face meetings through a number of applications or software on mobile devices or laptops.

The use of software is increasingly massive when the world was hit by the Covid-19 pandemic in 2010. Human habits that always meet face to face to hold meetings or schools are required to switch to online applications.

Long before the pandemic, humans used software technology for work or school. Like setting schedules, sharing workload, looking for ideas on the internet and so on.

Then, what is the software itself? how does it function? And what kind? You can listen to explanations about examples of software that have been summarized from the following sources.

Concept and History of Software

Launching from the Wikipedia page, software or software is a special term used for a part of a computer system whose physical form is not visible. Software is also understood as an act that is programmed, formatted, and stored digitally, without having a physical form. However, it can be operated by users via a computer device.

An expert argues, Roger S. Pressman argues that software is a command program on a computer. For its manufacture, it requires a programming language that can be compiled or written by a programmer or an expert in that field. Then, it will be compiled with a compiler application so that it becomes code that can be recognized by a computer / PC hardware machine .

Summarizing from the dictionary.tokopedia.com page, the development of software or software has started since the creation of electronic computers. Software itself was first conceived in the mid-1800’s by Charles Babbage.

However, it was only introduced to the public in 1935 by Alan Turing through his essay entitled, “Computing Numbers with Applications to the Entscheidung Problem “. Alan Turing himself was a mathematician who first suggested that computers could be run with various programs and could be used for various purposes.

In addition, in 1930, Alan Turing also became the inventor of the Turing machine, which is a device that can execute a series of commands. Meanwhile, software was discovered by John Tukey, a mathematician in 1958. Meanwhile, software development is divided into four eras as follows.

1. Beginner Era

Software first appeared in the form of wired connections from one part of the computer to another. Initially, software and hardware were still in one unit and only used for a particular purpose.

2. Stable Era

In the stable era, software can be used for various functions so that it is not only used by researchers and academies, but also by industry and companies. In addition, at this time also began to implement a database system that is able to separate data from programs.

3. Micro Era

The development of software in the micro era can be seen from the difference in software which is divided into two, namely system software that handles computer internals, and application software that can be used by users directly according to specific needs and goals.

4. Modern Era

In the modern era, software has developed to be very sophisticated and modern. At this time, the software already recognizes input in the form of sound and images, and some distributions are paid and some are free.

Software Features

Launching from the championhosting.com page, the following are characteristics that can be used to identify software.

1. Hardware Supporting Devices

Software has the responsibility of managing hardware ( hardware ) on a computer. That way, the computer can work properly depending on what is needed and done.

2. Are Open Source, Freeware, Shareware , or Commercial

The software can be used by anyone free of charge. But developers or programmers have certain conditions. In general, it is included when the user will download the software .

3. Requires an installer file to install it

Software can be used and operated when a computer or laptop already has an installer file. When the installer file is installed, a new computer or laptop can be used as needed.

4. Easily Attacked by Computer Viruses

Software is easily attacked by viruses either from the source site of downloading something or even from a virus that has been implanted. To prevent this, it’s better for You to install a trusted antivirus on your computer or laptop so it will be safer.

Software Function

Of course without software, hardware ( hardware ) will not work. The following are the functions of the software that have been summarized from various pages on the internet.

• Provider of basic functions for computer needs so that they can be operated. For example the availability of operating systems and support systems on computers.
• As an identifier of a computer program.
• As a regulator of every hardware that is in the computer so that it can work simultaneously.
• As a translator of a command from other software into machine language so that it can be understood or accepted by
• As a liaison between some software with hardware in the computer world.
• You can also use this computer software to identify a program on your computer.

Types of Software

When viewed in general, software can be categorized into three groups. The following details have been summarized from the katadata.co.id page.

1. Operating System

The operating system or operating system is known as software that is used to manage every piece of hardware connected to the computer’s CPU. Not only that, this device also functions in translating activities and managing all processes that occur and are ordered by the user on the CPU. So, the user’s command will be carried out by the computer properly.

2. Application Programs

In general, a software has been used to complete certain tasks. The software functions according to its intended purpose. For example Excel, Microsoft Word, calculators, and so on.

3. Programming Language

Programming language is the language used in making a program. If examined further, there are several kinds of programming languages ​​such as JAVA, PHP, HTML, C, C ++, and others. In making programming languages, it still requires special software to design programs according to the methods and structures that exist in the programming language itself.

The programming languages ​​themselves are classified into four, namely object oriented languages ​​( Visual dBase, Visual FoxPro, Delphi, Visual C ), high level languages ​​(Pascal and Basic), middle level languages ​​(such as C language) and low level languages ​​(such as Assembly languages). .

Types of Software Based on Distribution

Software is also grouped by distribution. The following are the types of software based on their distribution which are summarized from the championhosting.com page.

1. Adware

Adware is software designed with the aim of automatically distributing online advertisements to a user’s computer screen. This type of software can also provide revenue through the pay per click (PPC) method.

2. Firmware

Firmware is a type of read-only software storage. This property cannot be changed. If You experiences functional problems, there is no need to make further changes or developments.

3. Malware

Malware is a type of software that is considered dangerous if misused. This is because malware is designed to infect computers and damage them. Malware has various types, one of which is a computer virus.

4. Freeware

Freeware is a type of software that does not have a certain time limit. However, most of the software of this type has features that are not perfect enough to use.

5. Opensource

Open source is a type of software where the source code can be accessed. You, too, can change, upgrade and redistribute it without having to pay. This type of software is developed by programmers with a special programming language.

6. Shareware

Shareware is software that can be used free of charge. This type of software is usually used as a demonstration with limited functionality and use time.

7. Spyware

Spyware is a type of software that is designed as a spy on every user activity. This software is also often misused to steal computer data.

Sample Software

The following are examples of software that have been summarized from various pages on the internet.

1.Mozilla Freefox

Mozilla Freefox is a useful software used as a free cross- platform web browser with open source.

2. Microsoft Excel

Not much different from Microsoft Word, this tool is often used to edit and create a document with a column view.

3. Microsoft Office PowerPoint

This software is used to create a presentation. You can use it to edit photos, create videos, edit slideshows, and so on.

4. Microsoft Office Word

Microsoft Office Word is a type of software used to type and edit a document in a paper view.

5. Paint Software

Software that is used to process images or designs, starting from the process of creating an image to editing a design can be done with some of this software, namely Adobe Photoshop, Coreldraw, Paint , etc.

4. Antivirus Software

This software is used to prevent the entry of viruses that can damage the computer system. Antivirus plays an important role in preventing the computer from virus attacks that may enter when you download files online or from a USB connected to the computer. Examples of anti-virus software are Smadav, AVG, Norton, and many more.

5. System software

This software acts as a computer operating system, for example Windows, Linux, and Mac.

6. Browser Software

As the name implies, this software has a function as a site search engine to get various information online. Some of them are Chrome, Opera Mini, Mozilla Firefox, Internet Explorer, and so on.

So, that’s a brief explanation of examples of software along with an explanation of the concept, characteristics, and types of software on the computer.

In living life, humans have rules that are binding, but not written, namely values. This value has been attached to human beings since he was born. Humans grow with the values ​​that apply in the place where they grow.

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), value is defined as price (in the sense of estimated price); price of money (compared to the price of other money), intelligence numbers; seed; more or less content; rate; quality; characteristics (things) that are important or useful for humanity; something that perfects man according to his essence.

Meanwhile, according to Steeman, value is something that gives meaning to life, which provides a reference, point of departure and purpose of life. Value is something that is upheld, which can color and animate one’s actions. Values ​​are not only seen as mere beliefs, values ​​always involve mindsets and actions, so that there is a very close relationship between values ​​and ethics.

In line with Steeman, Rokeach also defines value as a deep belief about actions, actions or behavior that are considered bad. Meanwhile, according to Linda and Richard Eyre, values ​​are standards of behavior and attitudes that determine who we are, how we live and how we treat others. Of course good values ​​can make people better, live better and treat others better.

Tyler also defines value as an object, activity or idea expressed by individuals who control education in directing interests, attitudes and satisfaction. It is further explained that since humans have learned to value an object, activity and idea, this object becomes an important regulator of interest, attitude and satisfaction. Therefore, schools must help students find and strengthen meaningful and significant values ​​for students in obtaining personal happiness and making positive contributions to society.

Value is objective and subjective. Here’s an explanation of both.

1. Value is Objective

In this view, the value of an object is attached to the object and does not depend on the subject judging it. Each object has its own value even if it is not assigned a value by a person or subject.

For example, the view of the green hills is always beautiful. Anyone who sees it will be amazed and admit that the mountainous landscape will always be beautiful to look at from any side.

2. Value is Subjective

This view assumes that the value of an object depends on the person or subject who judges it. An object that is the same can have different values ​​and even contradict each other for one person to another.

An object can be said to be good or bad, useful or not, depending on the subject who judges it. For example, someone judges the color pink is only suitable for women. Some others consider that the color pink is suitable for all genders and does not reduce the aura of people who believe in a gender.

Functions and Characteristics Value Characteristics

Launching from the Maxmanroe.com page, here are the functions of value for human life.

• As a guide on how to think and act according to the norms and values ​​that apply. As a reference in determining the choice of individual roles in society and as a unifier of many people into certain groups.
• As a means to assist the process of self-development of every individual in society.
• As a protector of every individual in society.
• As a means to encourage everyone to do something based on certain values.
• As a means to convey opinions to the general public.
• As the embodiment of an individual or group of individuals in society.

Value can be identified through several characteristics. The following are the characteristics of the values ​​summarized from the Maxmanroe.com page.

• A value is formed through the process of socialization.
• Value is the result of interaction between citizens in society.
• Values ​​are distributed among the members of society.
• Values ​​are part of efforts to meet human social needs and satisfaction.
• Values ​​can influence social self-development.
• Values ​​can have different influences among members of society.
• Values ​​tend to relate to one another and form a value system.
• Values ​​in society are general, abstract, mixed, and stable.

Value is something conceptual and contains moral qualities that are not always realistic.

Value Formation Process

Values ​​cannot appear suddenly. It goes through a long process to form. The following is the process of forming value that has been summarized from the Maxmanroe.com page.

1. Process from God

Most of humanity believes in God. they believe that God governs everything in the universe including the values ​​of human life. In the holy books of various religions, there are values ​​that guide humans in behaving towards each other and their environment. For example, the value of obedience, the value of compassion, and other human values ​​that are believed to come from God.

2. Process of the Individual

Every human being has a good side and a bad side in each of them. A person’s life journey will be greatly influenced by the values ​​that exist in him. For example, at work, if someone is diligent in pursuing a career then he has a great chance to be successful in the field he is in.

3. Community Process

Most people have the belief that values ​​are absolute and true. This is then used as a guideline in behaving in the life of every individual in society.

For example, good behavior in society in the form of being polite and courteous to others, respecting the opinions of others, greeting each other, participating in mutual cooperation, and participating in every other community activity.

Values ​​in Society

Launching from the Jatikom.com page, the following is a classification of values ​​based on the purpose of the assessment.

1. Ethical Values

Ethical values ​​are values ​​that make a human being a complete person. For example, the value of honesty. Ethical values ​​are related to morals. It is also related to right and wrong held by a group or society. Ethical or ethical values ​​are also often referred to as moral values, morals, or manners.

2. Aesthetic Value (Beauty)

The value of beauty is a value that comes from the element of feelings in humans. The value of beauty is also referred to as the value of aesthetics. Beauty has universal characteristics so that the value of beauty shared by each person will be different from one another.

For example, some people agree that music is a form of beauty. However, some other people think that fine art is the true form of beauty.

3. Religious Values

Religious values ​​are values ​​that are considered to be sourced from God Almighty and are absolute or inviolable. Religious values ​​or religious values ​​become a way or reference for humans in living their lives and relating to their God.

For example, humans worship according to the religious procedures and beliefs they adhere to. For example, Muslims carry out the obligatory prayers, Christians and Catholics carry out services every Sunday, Hindus worship in temples, and so on.

4. Social Value

Social values ​​determine the quality of human relations in their social life. This value relates to attention and treatment of fellow human beings in the environment. This value is created because humans are social beings.

Each individual must maintain relationships with others. This relationship will create harmony and mutual assistance. Concern for environmental issues, such as mutual cooperation activities and mutual assistance in neighbors is a form of social value.

According to Prof. Dr. Notonegoro, values ​​can be classified into three, namely.

1. Material Values

Material value is everything whose function can be felt physically (physical elements). For example, stone can be used to build buildings. Therefore, stones have material values ​​that can be felt by humans.

2. Vital Value

Vital value consists of everything that is useful in supporting daily activities. For example, jackets in winter or rain are used to warm the body. However, in hot or dry season the jakret has no value or its use decreases. Jackets based on their uses are included in objects that have vital value.

3. Spiritual Values

Spiritual value includes everything whose benefits can be felt mentally or spiritually. Spiritual values ​​include religious, moral or goodness values, beauty or aesthetics, and truth. For example, every individual believes in a religion or belief and practices these teachings in everyday life.

Which teachings are believed to give peace and serenity in their hearts. The freedom to have a religion or belief and to worship according to religious teachings is part of spiritual values.

Spiritual values ​​can be grouped into four groups as follows.

• The value of truth, namely the value that comes from the elements of human reason (logic, reason, reason, mind, creativity). For example iron when heated expands, 1 + 1 = 2.
• The value of beauty, namely the value that comes from the elements of human feelings (feelings and aesthetics). For example, works of art.
• Moral values, namely values ​​relating to good and bad, originate from elements of human nature such as will or will (intention and ethics). For example helping victims of natural disasters.
• Religious value, namely the highest and absolute spiritual value originating from human belief or belief in God Almighty. For example, religious rituals.

Meanwhile, according to Walter G. Everee, values ​​can be classified into 6 groups as contained in Jattikom.com as follows.

• Economic values ​​( Economic Values ), namely values ​​related to the economic system. These values ​​are expressed by the market price which includes all items that can be purchased.
• Recreation values , which include the values ​​of the beauty of nature and games at leisure, as long as they can enrich life and physical and spiritual freshness.
• Association values , which include various forms of human association from friendship, family life, village life, nation to international level association.
• Bodily values , which include matters relating to the maintenance of health, efficiency and beauty of physical life.
• Intellectual values , which include the values ​​of knowledge and the search for truth.
• Character values, which include all personal and social challenges and virtues, including fairness, willingness to help, self-control, and love of truth.

Basketball is an idol for young people. It is a sport that is loved by young people. This is because this sport is considered cool. Moreover, with the addition of his portrayal in films or soap operas where the characters are constructed in a cool and up-to-date style for young people.

Just like sports in general, basketball requires techniques and skills to win matches. These techniques and skills do not immediately materialize. It needs long and painstaking practice.

To do the exercises, You must first know the techniques in playing basketball. If You wants to know more about techniques in playing basketball. You can listen to the following explanation which has been summarized from various sources on the internet.

Basketball Sport Concept

Launching from the id.wikipedia.org page, basketball is defined as a ball sport in groups consisting of two teams, each consisting of five people. Both of them competed to score points by putting the ball into the opponent’s basket.

This game can be done in an open or closed field. Meanwhile, the standard international rules for basketball games are four rounds with each round being 10 minutes (4 x 10 minutes). Each break in the game is given 10 minutes.

Launching from the bola.com page, here are the rules in the game of basketball.

1. This player can throw the ball from any direction, which uses one or both hands.
2. Players do not run the ball while holding the ball. The ball must be thrown at the point of the player who received the ball.
3. The ball must be held, either in or between the palms.
4. Players are not allowed to tackle an opponent in any way. The act of tackling an opponent can be subject to severe violation sanctions.
5. If a player makes three mistakes in a row, points will be counted for the opponent’s mistakes.
6. This point will be obtained if the ball is thrown into the basket.
7. If the ball is thrown out of the playing area, the first player to touch it is entitled to play it first.
8. Game time is four quarters, each of which is 10 minutes long.
9. The team that manages to put the ball into the hoop with the most points is declared the winner.

Meanwhile, the size of the basketball court as follows.

• Length: 28 meters
• Width: 15 meters
• Center circle diameter: 3.6 meters
• Distance from the three-point line to the hoop: 6.75 meters
• Distance of the basketball hoop line: 1.25 meters

Meanwhile, the sizes of the hoop and poles of the basketball game are as follows.

• Ring height: 3.05 meters
• Hoop diameter: 45cm
• Ring pole distance to endline : 1 meter
• Reflective board length: 1.8×1.05 meters
• Reflective board mid-square size: 59x45cm
• The distance of the rebound board to the endline : 1.2 meters

History of Basketball

In 1891, the game of basketball was invented by James Naismith, a Canadian sports teacher. He teaches at a college in Springfield, Massachusetts, United States. At that time, he had to make a sports game in a closed room to fill the students’ time during the winter break.

The inspiration for this game is a game he played as a child in Canada. At the beginning of its appearance, many people were against it because they thought that this game was too hard. Not suitable for indoor use. Therefore, James Naismith decided to make basic rules for playing basketball and started to be played by his students.

The first game of basketball was held on January 20, 1892. In that match, the name basketball was born from a student of James Naismith. Since then, the sport of basketball began to spread to the United States.

Many people start playing the game of basketball. Then, there was a basketball game. Now, You can find the game of basketball in the United States and around the world.

On June 6, 1946, a basketball competition was held, namely the National Basketball Association (NBA). In its development, this competition has become the most awaited and famous basketball competition in the world. From this match, NBA basketball stars were born, including Arya Bird, Kareem Abdul-Jabbar, Michael Jordan Kobe Bryant, Stephen Curry and LeBron James.

Basic Techniques of Basketball Game

The game of basketball has several basic techniques that must be known and honed. Here are six basic techniques for playing basketball that You must master.

1. Technique of Dribbling ( Dribbling )

The technique of dribbling or dribbling is a way to carry the ball in all directions. This technique is an attempt to bring the ball towards the front or the opponent’s field. You needs to know how to dribble properly.

The trick, namely with one hand. The aim of the dribbling technique is to look for attack opportunities, break through the opponent’s defense, and slow down the tempo of the game. Launching from the firstmedia.com page, there are several types of dribbling techniques as follows.

• Hesitation Move is done by holding the ball briefly to break the opponent’s concentration or while thinking about the state of the opponent in front.
• Change of pace is the most common basic technique that is done by changing the dribbling tempo to attack and make a strategy to attack the opponent.
• Crossover, done by changing the position of one hand to the other two hands. This technique aims to avoid grabs from opponents.

3. Technique of passing the ball ( passing )

The inside pass in a basketball game can be done in a soft manner. This is still influenced by the situation as a whole. The things that must be considered are the position of the friend’s situation, the tactics used, and the timing.

In order to pass well in various situations, You must first master the basic techniques of throwing and catching the ball well.

There are three types of passing in basketball , namely the chest pass by pushing the ball to chest height, then the bounce pass, which is the ball that bounces off the floor, and the over head pass , which is to feed the ball by bouncing over the head.

3. Ball Control Techniques ( Control )

Ball control techniques aim to control the ball when carrying out attacks. This movement is to catch the ball coming. The direction of the ball must be considered when trying to catch the ball.

4. Pivot Movement Technique (Pivot)

Pivot is a rotating movement of the body with one foot as the fulcrum or axis when the ball is still in control. With the position of one foot as the axis, players can rotate 360 ^​​0 by holding the ball. One of the pedestals as this axis must not shift or be released when rotating. When this happens, an error will occur .

5. Shooting Techniques ( Shooting )

The movement of throwing the ball into the ring with one hand is known as the shooting technique . This technique has basic forms including one-handed overhead shot, lay-up shot, catch followed by shooting, jump shot , and hook shot.

Launching from the firstmedia.com page, here are some basic shooting techniques.

• The jump shot begins with a body position with open legs and shoulders parallel to the feet and jumps while directing the ball above the head.
• Lay Up, is shooting the ball from the right or left which is done with two steps count.
• Free throws are the same as jump shots, but free throws don’t jump, but bend your knees and throw the ball towards the ring.

6. Techniques for Catching Reflections ( Rebound )

Rebound is a technique for picking up a ball that fails to enter the basketball hoop. This movement is done by jumping towards the ball. Then, grabbing it as quickly as possible, can be done with one or two hands. Its function, to secure the ball bouncing off the basketball hoop.

Techniques and Types of Lay Up

The lay up technique is a shooting technique while jumping which was previously done by taking two steps towards the basketball hoop. Lay up is the safest shot method to avoid the opponent’s block

When a player performs a lay-up technique , he must increase his speed during the last step of the dribble. Its function is to bring the ball closer to the basketball hoop. Lay ups can be done in an open situation, namely at the moment of transition from defense to offense or movement without the ball being able to escape guard.

It should be noted that, the lay up technique has two types as follows.

1. Overhand Lay Up Shoot

Overhand lay up shoot is a shot made with a series of movements. Starting from catching the ball, jumping-step-jump. Then, release the ball directly towards the hoop or bounce it off the backboard with your arms bent 90o ^beside your ears, and your palms facing up.

Simply put, the overhand lay-up shoot is a lay-up technique with the position of the hand above or behind the ball. Palms facing down. The release of the ball occurs due to downward movement. The movement occurs due to downward flexion of the wrist and causes back spin as soon as the ball leaves the hand.

This lay up is more suitable and profitable when running not too high. This is because the ball will be prone to falling if done at high speed. if starting from the right side the steps are generally the same as the underhand lay up shoot. The difference is when the ball is released.

2. Underhand Lay Up Shoot

Underhand lay up shoot is a technique where the hands are positioned under the ball, palms facing up and fingers facing forward. The release of the ball occurs due to a movement from the hand followed by a flexion of the wrist.

If starting from the right side then step on the left foot. Then, use the inside leg. Try, keep your head upright and your eyes focused on the box above the basket. The position of the back and waist must be straight.

To push off, use the other knee. The ball shot is directed straight. Then, the movement is continued by straightening the elbows, wrists and fingers. When releasing the ball, do not make the ball spin or spin. The hand that is not used is then used to protect the ball.

The release of the ball is not done with a shot as hard as possible. However, like putting it to the basket. When players move or run at high speed, it is more suitable to use lay-ups with underhand techniques because control over the ball is easier.

Family Types – Keeping the family intact is everyone’s wish, including having a happy family. In practice, the family has an important role in a person’s life, because basically humans are social beings who cannot live alone. That means someone needs someone else to be trusted and to be a pillar or back when we are tired or in trouble.

The answer is of course family. However, does Sinaumed’s really understand the concept and types of family? The term family can of course be interpreted broadly, including how to determine the concept of family and the types of family. In order to understand it better, here is an explanation of the concept and types of families that Sinaumed’s needs to know:

Know How the Concept of Family

Human Resources (HR) is the most important aspect needed to advance the country. National development will run optimally if it is supported by quality human resources. Quality is not only related to physical growth, but also development, intelligence, and personality.

Family can be the first environment to develop quality talent. The family is the smallest socio-cultural institution in society and plays a very important role in shaping children’s behavior and forming an exemplary personality.

In the family, children accumulate their first direct initial experiences that are used as preparation for their future life. The family is a means of educating, raising, introducing the environment and developing the skills of all its members so that they can function properly in society.

Various studies have shown that family status greatly influences the development and life of a child, both economically and not economically. Therefore, the family system is the foundation and support for the existence of the state.

Deacon and Firebaugh (1988) state that the family as a producer of talent must function properly to produce quality talent. Government Regulation Number 87 of the Republic of Indonesia divides family functions into eight functions, namely religious, social and cultural functions, love, protection, production, outreach and education, economic development and the environment.

The function of the family must be the foundation and guideline for the whole family to create a rich and quality family. Therefore, family functions need to be fully understood, well prepared and taught by all families and couples who want to start a family. According to Endah and Herawati (2015), well-managed family reunions affect family welfare. Family care is the dream and hope of every family.

Richardson and Gleeson (2012) revealed that increased family functioning will have a positive impact on the quality and well-being of children. This condition occurs because family function influences the parenting style of parents towards their children. With the optimal implementation of family functions, it is hoped that families will have the opportunity to give birth to quality future generations and families to become quality national leaders.

So the family is the smallest unit in society. Family is defined by the concept of kinship when individuals become parents and are united in wedlock. In a broad sense, the family is an individual in fulfilling their obligations and providing support caused by birth, adoption, or marriage with the aim of creating and maintaining physical, mental, and emotional cooperation.

According to Helby, family is a group of people who are always close to the same household and live in close relationships. Family is two or more people who live in a household through kinship, marriage, and adoption, interact, and create and maintain culture in their respective roles.

This group of people are tied together by marriage, blood, adoption, and live in the same house. The family is basically the smallest social unit in society, but has a huge impact on the country and its environment. The next generation is born from the family, which determines the fate of the country.

If the family works well, we can develop a quality and reliable generation that will become the pillars of the country’s development. Family function is determined by the processes that take place in the family. A peaceful, happy and prosperous family is everyone’s dream.

In various parts of the world with different cultures and social systems, the family is an important social unit in building a society. Family is the eternal human legacy. Rising divorce rates are seen as a sign of declining family values.

He also points out that data on family systems is not always a good place to be for child development. This can be seen from the increasing number of cases of violence against children committed by people around us, including families.

Family is a multidimensional concept. Social scientists are divided on how to clarify the universal definition of the concept of family. One of the scientists who started the family study was George Murdock.

In his book entitled ” Social Structure “, Murdoch states that the concept of family is a social group characterized by living together, with financial cooperation and reproductive processes (Murdoc, 1965). Through a survey of 250 community leaders conducted since 1937, Murdoch found three families, namely the nuclear family, the polygamous family, and the extended family.

Family Types

Regarding the existence of a family, the family can be divided into two parts, namely the nuclear family and the extended family. The nuclear family is a family with only three social statuses: husband, father, wife, mother and children. On the other hand, the nuclear family is formed after the male and female partners get married and have children, so parents use the family as a means of production.

Marriage is the foundation of a family, so when a human pair marries, a new family is born. Becoming a parent is one of the steps that a couple goes through with children.

In practice, type families can be divided into two types, as follows:

1. Traditional Family Type

• The nuclear family or nuclear family is a family consisting of husband, wife and children
• The Dyadic family is a family consisting of husband and wife, but no children
• Single parent, namely a family where one parent has a child due to divorce or death
• Single adults are households consisting of only one adult who is not married
• The extended family is a family that consists of the nuclear family and other families
• Middle-aged couples or parents whose parents live alone at home because their children already have their own household
• Kitnetwork Families , multiple families living together and using shared services

2. Non-Traditional Family Types

• Unmarried parent and child family , namely a family consisting of parents and unmarried children
• Cohabitating couple are adults who live together without being married
• Gay and lesbian families are people of the same sex living under one roof like husband and wife or partners
• Nonmarital Hetesexual Cohabitation families are unmarried people who live with a partner in the same family, families who live together without marriage and often change partners
• Faster family , namely families that accept children who are not related for some time. (Widagdo, 2016)
• The stepparent family family with stepparents
• Commune family is several family pairs (with children) who live in the same house without siblings, the same resources, facilities, the same experience, group activities/socialization of children through joint children’s education
• The group network family is the nuclear family that is surrounded by a set of rules or values, lives close together, shares household goods and services, and is responsible for raising children.
• Homeless families have personal crises formed due to economic and mental health problems and there is no permanent protection
• Gangs are young, destructive family types who seek emotional connection and a loving family, but benefit from violence and crime in their lives.

Apart from the two types of families above, according to Kamanto Sunarto (1993: 159160), families can be divided into six types as follows:

1. Affiliates are those who consist of internal and extended family
2. Based on lineage consisting of parental, matrilineal, and bilateral families
3. Based on the ruler, it consists of parish families, matriarchal families, and equal families
4. Based on marriage consisting of monogamous families, polygamous families, and polygamous families
5. Based on socioeconomic status, it consists of lower, middle and upper class families
6. Based on its integrity, it consists of intact families, broken or divorced families, and pseudo-damaged families.

Now, from the types of families we can observe that children experience a process of growth and development which will be influenced by their environment and association, including the type of family. In a review of developmental psychology, the view of the parent-child relationship is generally related to the attachment theory first put forward by John Bowlby. He then identifies the impact of parenting behavior as an important factor in the parent-child relationship that has been formed since childhood.

Parenting is a parent’s primary responsibility, so it’s a shame that some people still play parental roles without their parents knowing. Parenting produces better results when the father and mother parents are together, that is, when the parents support each other, act as a team, and work together rather than against each other.

In general, fathers and mothers play different roles for the same purpose. Rotenberg’s research (1995) on the process of forming trust between parents and children found that mothers play a role in forming beliefs about the importance of trust and fathers play a role in shaping confident behavior.

The closeness of children with their parents can emerge through collaborative activities and exchanging stories. The closeness of children to parents influences the importance of children to the attitudes and behavior of parents in child rearing. However, parent-child intimacy does not mean there is no conflict in the parent-child relationship. Parent-child intimacy makes it easier to deal with parent-child conflicts, so that these conflicts do not have a negative impact on children’s development.

Family Functions

Each family function has its own meaning and plays an important role in the life of a family. Below is a description of each of the eight family functions to know about:

1. Religious Functions

Religion is a basic need for all human beings. The family is the first place where religious values ​​are taught and religious identity is instilled in children born in Indonesia. Families develop religious values ​​and produce good and pious children. The family teaches all members to worship God Almighty with full faith and dedication. Because Indonesian families have different beliefs and religions, the implementation of religious functions must not ignore religious tolerance.

2. Socio-Cultural Functions

The family is the main vehicle for promoting and disseminating noble cultural values, which are an example of a lifestyle. The socio-cultural function provides the family and all its members with the opportunity to develop the richness of different cultures as a unit. Therefore, we can continue to support and promote noble values ​​that serve as role models for the nation’s life. The family is the first place for children to learn to deal with, adapt and learn about the habits that apply in society.

3. The Function of Affection

Affection is one important factor to shape a child’s personality. The function of affection means that the family must be a vessel or place that can provide an atmosphere of love and affection in the life of the family, community, state and nation. The function of affection can be realized in the form of affection, comfort and attention in the family. The function of family love is a solid foundation between children, husband and wife, parents and children, and intergenerational kin, making it the most important place for a loving family life. for this reason.

4. Protection Function

The family is a place of refuge or protection for all members and a place to create calm and warmth. Being in an atmosphere of mutual protection means that the family needs to be a safe, comfortable and peaceful place for all members. When the family works well, it protects its members and functions to maximize the growth and development of children. The family protects each member from harmful behavior and keeps the family comfortable and safe from discomfort.

5. Reproductive Function

The family is the regulator of healthy and planned offspring reproduction so that the children born to the next generation can meet the requirements. The family is a high-quality place for children with overall healthy reproductive function, including sexuality and sex education. The family is also a place where members are educated about sexuality issues. Continuity of planned offspring can support the creation of family care.

6. Socialization and Development Functions

Family is the first and most important place for teaching and future education for every child. That means family development includes education that is useful for children’s development and the development of their personality. The Socialization and Education function also shows that the family is a place for the development of interaction processes and a learning environment for good and healthy socialization and communication. Very intense interaction in the educational process with the family is very effective. Families tell children about their values, norms, how to communicate with others, and good and evil.

7. Economic Functions

The family is the most important place for regulating the use of finances, promoting and absorbing values ​​related to finances, meeting the necessities of life, and creating a prosperous family. Families need means to procure food, clothing, shelter and other supplies and to provide financial support to their members.

8. Environmental Development Function

The family plays a role in managing life while maintaining the physical, social, micro and macro environment. The family plays a role in protecting the local environment and the natural surroundings. Families need to know their neighbors and local communities and protect their natural environment. A family-friendly approach to the environment to provide the best for future generations.

Well, that’s an explanation of the concept and types of families. Sinaumed’s belongs to which type of family? Creating a happy and harmonious family is certainly not an easy matter. sinaumedia can learn about it through sinaumedia’s collection of books which can be visited at www.sinaumedia.com, enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits

Example of 4P Marketing Strategy Application – A product or service must be marketed with the right strategy. The goal is quite simple, namely to get the maximum profit. Various methods or marketing strategies are carried out, one of which is the 4P marketing strategy .

Marketing is done to make customers aware of a product or service, then buy it. Companies or business actors are willing to allocate funds to make marketing strategies. Marketing strategy is not only carried out by large companies, but also small businesses must have it.

One marketing strategy that is suitable to be implemented is the 4P marketing mix. The 4Ps marketing mix is ​​a mix of many types or tactical marketing techniques. Meanwhile, the role of marketing executive is the right combination to produce excellent synergies between products and targeted audiences.

The role of the marketing mix is ​​to synthesize visible and invisible product quality with the aspirations of clients who are the target market. The marketing mix is ​​applied according to the product being sold. The marketing mix for a manufactured product will be different from a product as a service.

Launching from the Accurate.id page, the inventor of the marketing mix system was Neil Borden in the 1950s. Borden defines a marketing executive as someone who mixes ingredients to make the right recipe so that the marketing of a product will be right.

Then, it was E. Jerome McCarthy who sublimated the 4P concept of marketing from Borden’s marketing vision ideas. McCarthy highlights that the 4Ps consist of product, price, promotion and place. These four things become the initial control elements available as marketing planning.

Factors Affecting Marketing Mix

Every company has an exact offer for the product or service it sells. The brand has carefully calculated the production costs, marketing costs, profits to be gained, and other calculations.

If a company or business wants to use a mix system, at least the level of success is due to two factors, namely internal factors and external factors. Here’s an explanation of both.

1. Internal Factors

Internal factors consist of factors that exist within the organization or are related to the atmosphere within the company. Internal factors are good if you pay attention to four main things, namely the nature of the product; product stages in its overall life cycle; availability of funds; and company goals.

2. External Factors

External factors have a relationship with factors outside the organization. External factors consist of several aspects including the level of competition, channel efficiency, consumer buying behavior, and control from the government side.

4P Marketing Strategy Variables

The 4P marketing mix system consists of four elements, namely product, price, place, and promotion. Summarizing from the Jubelio.com page, here is an explanation of the four elements.

1. Product

Products are the main thing when deciding to do business. Products are the most important embodiment of a business. However, products do not only focus on tangible things, but also pay attention to intangible things such as organizations, services and ideas.

Before determining the right marketing strategy. You can start by developing a product first. One way is by asking customers for criticism and suggestions. Thus, it can be a reference for evaluating the product. At the same time, it becomes a benchmark for which parts need to be changed to suit market tastes.

Therefore, an understanding of the product as well as other marketing parts is important. You must also consider product elements in the 4P marketing mix strategy including features, quality, brand or logo, differences from competitors, product variations, and packaging.

2. Price

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), price is interpreted as the value of goods that is determined or represented by money; the amount of money or other equivalent means of exchange, which must be paid for products or services, at a certain time and in a certain market; honor (self); use (meaning, interests, news, and so on).

Launching from the Accurate.id page, price is defined as the monetary value that must be paid by customers to obtain or own a product from a company. Price is an important component in generating income.

Pricing must be taken with great care and calculation. This is about profit. If the product is set at a very high price, it will give the impression that the product being sold is of high quality. Meanwhile, one way to determine the right price is to look at the market price or calculate the cost of goods sold (PHP).

However, the products offered can only be placed in limited stores. Thus, marketers need to understand the right pricing strategy. The 4P marketing mix decision can be determined by considering several things regarding marketing variables including pricing methods, policies, strategies; profit; discounts, rebates; payment period; credit; price comparison with competitors; and the value of products and services.

3. Place or Distribution

Summarizing from the Accuret.id page, the place is also called physical distribution which is related to the transfer of product ownership from producers to customers. The profit margin that will be achieved depends on how quickly You can deliver the goods.

Strategic locations or places can be seen through the level of crowds of visitors or how many people pass by in the area. the goal is that prospective customers are interested in visiting stores or places of business established by companies or business actors

The faster the product reaches the point of sale, the more likely it is to satisfy customers and increase brand loyalty. Therefore, the place becomes one of the important factors in determining product competitiveness in the market.

The things that must be considered in the place or distribution element are distribution channels, logistics, warehousing decisions, product handling, coverage, inventory control, and the ordering process.

4. Promotion (Promotion)

Launching from the Kompas.com page, in product marketing, usually use flyers, advertisements on social media, banners in several strategic locations, and so on. By doing promotions there are at least two objectives to be achieved.

First, to increase brand awareness of the business being run while at the same time informing people about the business being run. Second, persuade them to buy or use the services offered.

The thing that is the focus of the 4P marketing mix strategy is the right way of communication to hook the target market. Not only that, to promote products, You can use various methods, from conventional to modern methods. For example by implementing Facebookads, Instragram Ads, Google Ads, and other platforms .

In the promotion there are several things that must be considered. Among them are the timing of the promotion, the promotional media used, studying competitors when carrying out promotions, personal selling, advertising, public relations, direct marketing, sales promotion, and publicity—social media, print, and so on.

Benefits of 4P Marketing Strategy

The 4P marketing mix strategy has various benefits. Summarizing from the Accurate.id page, here are some of the benefits of the 4P marketing mix strategy.

1. Creating Synergy

The 4P marketing mix strategy including product, price, promotion and place must be combined correctly so that it will create coordination that provides the right promotion for the product or service offered.

2. Brand Loyalty and Value

The 4P marketing approach has a focus on customer needs and satisfaction. So, these products will generate good loyalty and brand awareness in the eyes of consumers.

3. Bring Customers closer

With promotions, it will be well established between consumers and business organizations that You is running. Price, product, and place features provide a calculation of customer expectations. The promotion aspect contributes to giving customers the product or service offered by positioning the product or service better.

4. Enables Proper Integration

Planning a 4P marketing strategy requires critical thinking and perception. If the two are collaborated properly, the product or service owned by You will find a unique space in the hearts of customers.

5. Higher Sales Volume

When the level of customer satisfaction is high, it will affect a larger market share. This will have a good impact on increasing product sales.

6. Guidance in Making the Right Decision

The marketing strategy forms a state of interdependence and the overall nature of one element with another in decision making. For example, if the product price is high, then in promotional activities. Then it must target customers with high income demographics, and the product design must be based on quality. Distribution channels and locations, etc. Also will be guided by this decision.

Example of 4P Marketing Strategy Implementation

Launching from the Jurnal.id page, the following is an example of implementing the 4P marketing strategy from McDonald’s.

1. McDonald’s Products

As an F&B business, McDonald’s has a product mix consisting mostly of food and beverage products.

McDonald’s product mix has the following major product lines:

• Hamburgers and sandwiches
• Fried chicken
• Salad
• Snack
• Drink
• Breakfast Menu
• McCafé

2. Place

Restaurants are where McDonald’s generates most of its sales revenue.

Some restaurants also operate stalls to sell a limited selection of products, such as sundaes and other desserts.

There are also some temporary kiosks, as in the case of kiosks that are used in certain activities:

The 4P ( Places ) marketing strategy for McDonald’s is:

• Restaurant
• Stall
• Mobile App

3. Price

In McDonald’s 4P marketing strategy, it can be seen that the bundle price and the psychological price (unrounded price) are driving customers to buy more products.

Under a package pricing strategy, McDonald’s offers food and other product packages at a discounted price, as opposed to buying each item separately.

• The package price strategy is cheaper than the unit
• Psychological pricing strategy, for example IDR 49,900 instead of IDR 50,000

4. Promotions

Some of the promotional strategies undertaken by McDonald’s are:

• Advertisement
• Sales promotion
• Public Relations (PR)

The 4P marketing strategy can be applied in various companies, both large and small scale. Launching from various pages on the internet, the following is an example of implementing the 4P marketing strategy which can be used as a reference for determining the right 4P marketing strategy in a company or business that is being implemented by You.

• The first P stands for Product. For example, KFC’s chicken product would include a food display, a shiny red bucket with the smiling face of Colonel Sanders, words on a combo pack like “ Friendship Bucket ” or “ Triple Treat”.
• Second, the pricing strategy has been used by the Spotify company in Indonesia to get the best penetration. This has almost erased all physical tapes.
• The third P is Promotion, for example, Coca cola makes use of the 2010 World cup and the K’naan theme song in such a way that, Coca Cola and football have all become synonymous.
• Place or Distribution is the fourth P. Example: Apple iPhones are found easily in reputed e-commerce stores like Amazon and not in online stores selling building materials.
• The first P, namely the products offered by Burger King have a wide variety of food and drinks such as fried chicken, burgers, ice cream, various drinks.
• Price is a pricing strategy that is used for bundled products, such as the price of food packages being cheaper than the unit price and the application of psychological pricing.
• Place, a place used by Burger King in the form of restaurants, kiosks, and mobile apps. Kiosk like in a mall.
• The fourth P (promotion), promotion strategy carried out through social media, sales promotions such as discounts or price cuts, and public relations (PR).

this city limit